Canon | EOS M3 | User guide | Canon EOS M3 User guide

Canon EOS M3 User guide
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪/ Auto‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪C‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫● ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﻗﺭﺍءﺓ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺑﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻗﺳﻡ ”ﺍﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺳﻼﻣﺔ“ )= ‪ ،(۱۳‬ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺳﺗﺳﺎﻋﺩﻙ ﻗﺭﺍءﺓ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺻﺣﻳﺢ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺣﻔﻅ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻳﻪ ﺑﺳﻬﻭﻟﺔ ﻓﻳﻣﺎ ﺑﻌﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﻧﻘﺭ ﻓﻭﻕ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺟﺎﻧﺏ ﺍﻟﺳﻔﻠﻲ ﺍﻷﻳﻣﻥ ﻟﻠﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺭﺟﻭﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻛﻧﺕ ﺗﻁﻠﻊ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﺭ ﻓﻭﻕ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﺑﺎﻁ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﻼﻧﺗﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﺩﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺻﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻘﺭ ﻓﻭﻕ ﻋﻧﻭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﺻﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻳﻣﻳﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺑﻳﺔ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪© 2016 CANON INC.‬‬
‫‪CEL-SV7LA2N1‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫● ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ‪*SD‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪C‬‬
‫‪،Tv ،Tv‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ٧‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ٨‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ٩‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ١٠‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪/ Auto‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫● ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ‪* *SDHC‬‬
‫‪۲ ۱‬‬
‫● ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ‪* *SDXC‬‬
‫‪۲ ۱‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻳﺔ‬
‫*‪۱‬‬
‫*‪۲‬‬
‫ﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺑﻭﺓ‬
‫ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻣﺿﻣﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺑﻭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﺗﺟﺩ ﺃ ًّﻳﺎ ﻣﻧﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺗﺻﻝ ﺑﻣﻭﺯﻉ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫)ﻣﺯﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻐﻁﺎء ﺍﻟﺟﺳﻡ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻳﺭ ‪ .SD‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻟﻡ ﺗﺗﻡ ﻣﺻﺎﺩﻗﺔ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﻌﻣﻝ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ‪ UHS-I‬ﻣﺩﻋﻭﻣﺔ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﻬﻳﺩﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻭﻧﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫‪LP-E17‬‬
‫)ﻣﺯﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻐﻁﺎء ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﻁﺭﻓﻳﺔ(‬
‫ﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫‪LC-E17/LC-E17E‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﺭﺑﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﻕ‬
‫‪EM-200DB‬‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﺑﻭﻋﺔ ﻣﺭﻓﻘﺔ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﻁﺎﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺑﻭﺓ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻟﻳﺳﺕ ﻣﺭﻓﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ )ﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻠﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺑﻐﺽ ﺍﻟﻧﻅﺭ ﻋﻥ ﺳﻌﺗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ‬
‫‪IFC-400PCU‬‬
‫●‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺟﺭﻳﺑﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﺳﺗﻌﺭﺍﺿﻬﺎ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﺑﺩﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ‬
‫ﺻﺣﻳﺢ‪ .‬ﻭﺍﻟﺭﺟﺎء ﻣﻼﺣﻅﺔ ﺃﻥ ﺷﺭﻛﺔ ‪ Canon Inc.‬ﻭﺍﻟﺷﺭﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻟﻬﺎ ﻭﻣﺅﺳﺳﺎﺗﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻔﺭﻋﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻭﻣﻭﺯﻋﻳﻬﺎ ﻟﻳﺳﻭﺍ ﻣﺳﺅﻭﻟﻳﻥ ﻋﻥ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺃﺿﺭﺍﺭ ﺗﺑﻌﻳﺔ ﺗﻧﺗﺞ ﻋﻥ ﺃﻱ ﺧﻠﻝ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﻲ ﻟﻠﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‪،‬‬
‫ﺑﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺅﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻓﺷﻝ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻓﺷﻝ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻘﺭﺍءﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻟﻼﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺷﺧﺻﻲ‪ .‬ﺍﻣﺗﻧﻊ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺭﺡ‬
‫ﺑﻪ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﻧﺗﻬﻙ ﻗﺎﻧﻭﻥ ﺣﻘﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻊ‪ ،‬ﻭﻻﺣﻅ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺷﺧﺻﻲ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﻳﻧﺗﻬﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺗﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻲ ﺣﻘﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻊ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺣﻘﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻭﻧﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ ﻟﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻷﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﻭﺽ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻳﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻌﻠﻕ‬
‫ﺑﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺗﺟﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺭﺟﺎء ﺍﻟﺭﺟﻭﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺿﻣﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺯﻭﺩﺓ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﺃﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺭﻏﻡ ﻣﻥ ﺇﻧﺗﺎﺝ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺗﺻﻧﻳﻊ ﻓﺎﺋﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺩﻗﺔ ﻭﺃﻥ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﻣﻥ ‪ ٪۹۹٫۹۹‬ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﻛﺳﻝ ﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻣﻳﻡ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺑﻌﺽ ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﻛﺳﻝ ﻣﻌﻳﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺩ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ‬
‫ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺣﻣﺭﺍء ﻭﺳﻭﺩﺍء ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﻧﺎﺩﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﻻ ﻳﺷﻳﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﻭ ﻳﺅﺛﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺩ ﺗﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﻣﻐﻠﱠﻔﺔ ﺑﻐﻼﻑ ﺭﻗﻳﻕ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻼﺳﺗﻳﻙ ﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺗﻬﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﺩﺵ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻐﻠﻳﻑ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﻼﻑ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻟﻔﺗﺭﺓ ﺯﻣﻧﻳﺔ ﻁﻭﻳﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﺗﺭﺗﻔﻊ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺗﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻳﺱ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺧﻠﻼً ﻭﻅﻳﻔﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﻣﺎء ﺍﻷﺟﺯﺍء‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫˺˺‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪C‬‬
‫‪،Tv ،Tv‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ٧‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ٨‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ٩‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ١٠‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪/ Auto‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫˿˻ ˾˻‬
‫˼˻‬
‫˽˻‬
‫˻˻ ˺˻‬
‫˻‬
‫˼‬
‫˽‬
‫˾‬
‫˿‬
‫˹˻‬
‫˻˺‬
‫˼˺‬
‫˽˺‬
‫˾˺‬
‫˿˺‬
‫̀˺‬
‫́˺‬
‫̂˺‬
‫˹˻‬
‫˿˺‬
‫̀˺‬
‫˾‬
‫˹˺‬
‫˺‬
‫˺˺‬
‫˻˺‬
‫˼˺‬
‫˽˺‬
‫)‪(۱‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ / LCD‬ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺳﻳﺔ*‬
‫)‪ (۱۲‬ﺯﺭ ]‬
‫)ﺿﺑﻁ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ‪] / [(AF‬‬
‫)‪(۲‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ‬
‫)‪ (۱۳‬ﺯﺭ ]‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ([‬
‫)‪(۳‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ‬
‫)‪ (۱٤‬ﺯﺭ ]‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ([‬
‫)‪(۱‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ]‬
‫)‪ (۱۹‬ﺯﺭ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‬
‫)‪(٤‬‬
‫ﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﻣﺯﺍﻣﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫)‪(۲‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ‬
‫)‪ (۲۰‬ﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‬
‫)‪(٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫)‪ (۱٥‬ﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫)ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪] / [(ISO‬‬
‫)‪(۳‬‬
‫ﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ‬
‫)‪ (۲۱‬ﻁﺭﻑ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺩﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﻛﺭﻭﻓﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‬
‫)‪(٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺳﻣﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫)‪ (۱٦‬ﺯﺭ ]‬
‫)‪(٤‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ‪EF-M‬‬
‫)‪ (۲۲‬ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ‪ Digital‬ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻓﻳﺔ‬
‫)‪(۷‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫)‪ (۱۷‬ﻗﺭﺹ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ‬
‫)‪(٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺑﺽ‬
‫)‪(۲۳‬‬
‫)‪(۸‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ]‬
‫)‪(٦‬‬
‫ﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ‬
‫)‪ (۲٤‬ﻣﻘﺑﺱ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ‬
‫)‪(۹‬‬
‫ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺭﺑﺎﻁ‬
‫)‪(۷‬‬
‫ﻗﺭﺹ ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫)‪ (۲٥‬ﻏﻁﺎء ﻁﺭﻑ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﻣﻘﺎﺭﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ‬
‫)‪ (۱۰‬ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ‪ HDMITM‬ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻓﻳﺔ‬
‫)‪(۸‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ‬
‫)‪(۹‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪ON/OFF‬‬
‫)‪ (۲٦‬ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ‪ /‬ﻏﻁﺎء ﺗﺟﻭﻳﻑ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩﺓ([‬
‫)‪ (۱۰‬ﻗﺭﺹ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ‬
‫)‪ (۱۱‬ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫)‪ (۱۲‬ﺍﻟﻣﻳﻛﺭﻭﻓﻭﻥ‬
‫)‪ (۱۳‬ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺭﺑﺎﻁ‬
‫)‪ (۱٤‬ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ] )ﺭﻓﻊ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ([‬
‫)‪ (۱٥‬ﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ‬
‫)‪ (۱٦‬ﺩﺑﻭﺱ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‬
‫)‪ (۱۷‬ﻏﻁﺎء ﺃﻁﺭﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ‬
‫)‪ (۱۸‬ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﻫﻭﺍﺋﻲ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫˹˺ ̂ ́‬
‫̀ ˺‬
‫́˺‬
‫̂˺‬
‫˾˺‬
‫̀‬
‫́‬
‫̂‬
‫˿‬
‫˽‬
‫˼‬
‫)ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ‪*(N‬‬
‫* ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻳﺯﺍﺕ ‪.(۱۱۸ =) NFC‬‬
‫˻‬
‫)‪ (۱۱‬ﺯﺭ ]‬
‫)‪ (۱۸‬ﺯﺭ ]‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ([‬
‫)ﻗﻔﻝ ‪] / [(AE‬‬
‫)ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ([‬
‫)‪/ [(Wi-Fi‬‬
‫)ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻳﺩﻭﻱ([ ‪ /‬ﻳﺳﺎﺭ‬
‫)ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻳﻊ([ ‪ /‬ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ‬
‫)‪ (۱۹‬ﺯﺭ ] )ﻓﻼﺵ([ ‪ /‬ﻳﻣﻳﻥ‬
‫)‪ (۲۰‬ﺯﺭ ]‬
‫)ﻣﺳﺢ([ ‪ /‬ﺃﺳﻔﻝ‬
‫)ﻋﻼﻣﺔ([‬
‫ﻭﺍﻕ ﻟﻠﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫* ﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺱ ﺑﺳﻬﻭﻟﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ٍ‬
‫● ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﻗﺭﺹ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﻭﺍﺣﺩ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻋﻧﺎﺻﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻭﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﻣﻌﻅﻡ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ] [] [] [] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺻﻁﻼﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻋﺩﺳﺔ ‪EF-M‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪C‬‬
‫‪،Tv ،Tv‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ٧‬ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ ٨‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ٩‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ١٠‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫́‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫̀‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﻭﺯ ﻟﺗﻣﺛﻝ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﻭﺃﻗﺭﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺳﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺳﺗﺑﺩﻭ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫˺‬
‫˿‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻣﺛﻳﻝ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﻭﻋﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﺑﺭﻣﻭﺯ‪.‬‬
‫˻‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪/ Auto‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫˼‬
‫● ﺗﺗﻡ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﺭﻣﻭﺯ ﻭﺍﻟﻧﺻﻭﺹ ﺍﻟﻅﺎﻫﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﻳﻥ ﻗﻭﺳﻳﻥ‪.‬‬
‫˽‬
‫̂‬
‫)‪(۱‬‬
‫ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ‬
‫)‪(۲‬‬
‫ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء‬
‫)‪(۳‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺳﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻟﺑﻲ ﻟﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺷﺢ‬
‫)‪(٤‬‬
‫ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺗﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‬
‫)‪(٥‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‬
‫)‪(٦‬‬
‫ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ‬
‫)‪(۷‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‬
‫)‪(۸‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ‬
‫)‪(۹‬‬
‫ﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ‬
‫˾‬
‫●‬
‫‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺟﺏ ﻋﻠﻳﻙ ﻣﻌﺭﻓﺗﻬﺎ‬
‫●‬
‫‪ :‬ﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ ﻭﺗﻠﻣﻳﺣﺎﺕ ﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻻﺣﺗﺭﺍﻓﻲ‬
‫●‬
‫‪ :‬ﻟﻺﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺳﻳﺔ‬
‫● = ‪ :xx‬ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻠﺔ )ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﺛﺎﻝ‪ “xx” ،‬ﺗﻣﺛﻝ ﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ(‬
‫● ﺗﻧﻁﺑﻕ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻺﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳُﺷﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﻬﺎﻳﺋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﺻﻁﻠﺣﻳﻥ ”ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺎﺕ“ ﻭ”ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ“ ﻓﻘﻁ‪،‬‬
‫ﺳﻭﺍء ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﻣﺭﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻁﺎﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ُﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻝ‪.‬‬
‫● ُﺗﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺿﻳﺣﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﻫﻲ ﻣﺗﺻﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ‪EF-M 15-45mm‬‬
‫‪.f/3.5-6.3 IS STM‬‬
‫● ﻟﻠﺗﺑﺳﻳﻁ‪ ،‬ﻳُﺷﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﻋﻭﻣﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﺻﻁﻠﺢ ”ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ“‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳُﺷﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯﺍﻥ ” ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ“ ﻭ”‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻭﺍء ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻓﻼﻡ“ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺍﻥ ﺃﺳﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﻭﻳﻥ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﻳﻔﻳﺔ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪۲۲ ...............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺟﺩﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺗﺟﺭﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺝ ‪۲۳ ..................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻣﺳﺎﻙ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ‪۲۳ ...............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ Auto‬ﻟﻠﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻧﻅﺭ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ ﺫﻛﻲ ‪۲۳ ..........................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ‪۲٥ ..........................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪۲٦ .................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪/ Auto‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪C‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻳﺔ ‪۲ ........................................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺑﻭﺓ ‪۲ ................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ‪۲ .......................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﻬﻳﺩﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻭﻧﻳﺔ ‪۲ ...................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪۲۷ ..................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﻣﺎء ﺍﻷﺟﺯﺍء‪۳ ..................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﻳﺯﺍﺕ ﺗﻭﻓﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ )ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‪۲۸ ...........................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻭﻓﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪۲۸ .............................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻭﻓﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ‪۲۸ ..............................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ‪٤ .........................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺻﻁﻼﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ‪٤ ......................................................‬‬
‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺋﻌﺔ ‪۱۲ .............................................................‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ‪۲۸ .....................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺳﻼﻣﺔ‪۱۳ ............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ‪۲۹ ...............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪۲۹ ................................................................... LCD‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺇﻣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻸﺳﻔﻝ ‪۲۹ ........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻸﻋﻠﻰ ‪۲۹ ........................................................................‬‬
‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‪۱٦ .............................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺟﻬﻳﺯﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺩﺋﻳﺔ ‪۱٦ ...........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺭﺑﺎﻁ ‪۱٦ ...................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺷﺣﻥ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪۱٦ ...........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ‪۱۷ ........................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ‪۱۸ ......................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪۱۸ ...........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪۱۹ .......................................................................‬‬
‫ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‪۲۰ ......................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻋﺩﺳﺔ‪۲۰ ....................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻓﺻﻝ ﻋﺩﺳﺔ ‪۲۱ .................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﻟﺔ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ‪۲۱ .......................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻋﺩﺳﺎﺕ ‪ EF‬ﻭ‪۲۱ ................................................................. EF-S‬‬
‫ﻓﺻﻝ ﻋﺩﺳﺔ ‪۲۲ .................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ ‪۲۲ ................................................................‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪۲۷ .................................................................‬‬
‫ﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ‪۳۰ ....................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻳﻊ ‪۳۱ ...............................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺱ ﻟﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪۳۱ ...............................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪۳۲ ........................................................................‬‬
‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺳﻳﺔ ‪۳۳ .........................................................................‬‬
‫ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﻅﺎﻫﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪۳۳ .........................................................‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺅﺷﺭ ‪۳٤ ...............................................................................‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ ‪۳٥ ............................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺣﺩﺩﻫﺎ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪۳٥ ........................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ )ﻣﻧﻅﺭ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ ﺫﻛﻲ(‪۳٥ ....................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‪۳۷ ...............................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻣﻠﺧﺹ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪۳۷ .......................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ‪۳۷ .......................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ‪٤۰ ..........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ ﻟﻣﻧﻊ ﺍﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪٤۱ ..............................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ )ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻣﺱ( ‪٤۱ ..........................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ ‪٤۲ ...............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪/ Auto‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪C‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻹﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻲ ﻟﻠﻣﺣﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﻧﺎﺋﻲ ‪٤٦ ..............................................‬‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪٤۷ ....................................................................‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪٦۰ ........................................................................... P‬‬
‫ﻣﻧﻊ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ ﺗﺧﻔﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺭﺍء ‪٤۷ ...................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻣﺩﺓ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪٤۷ .......................................................‬‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ‪٦۱ ...................................................‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‪٤۸ ...........................................................‬‬
‫ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ )ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ( ‪٦۱ .................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺿﻠﺔ )ﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﺇﺑﺩﺍﻋﻳﺔ( ‪٤۸ .................................‬‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ )ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ(‪٦۱ .............................................‬‬
‫ﻗﻔﻝ ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ‪ /‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ )ﻗﻔﻝ ‪٦۱ .............................................. (AE‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ‪٦۲ .............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪٦۲ ..............................................................................ISO‬‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ ‪٦۳ ......................................................‬‬
‫ﺩﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ )ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ‪٦۳ ..................................(AEB‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺑﺎﻳﻥ )ﻣُﺣﺳﻥ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‪٦٤ ...............................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﻁﻌﺔ )ﺃﻭﻟﻭﻳﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﻭﻥ ﺳﺎﻁﻊ( ‪٦٤ ..........................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺯﺍﻫﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻣﺄﻛﻭﻻﺕ )ﻁﻌﺎﻡ(‪٥۲ .........................................................‬‬
‫ﺃﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ‪٦٥ ................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺣﻔﻅ‪/‬ﺗﺣﻣﻳﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪٤۹ ..........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪٤۹ ..............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻣﻳﻝ ‪٥۰ ......................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪٥۰ ...................................................................‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ‪٥۰ ..................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻹﺑﺩﺍﻋﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ] [‪٥۰ ..................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ‪٥۱ .................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ )ﻣﺭﺷﺣﺎﺕ ﺇﺑﺩﺍﻋﻳﺔ( ‪٥۲ ........................................................‬‬
‫ﻋﺎﻝ )ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺩﻳﻧﺎﻣﻳﻛﻲ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ(‪٥۳ .......................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺗﺑﺎﻳﻥ ٍ‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ‪٥۸ .......................................................‬‬
‫ﻗﻔﻝ ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭﻩ ‪٥۸ .................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ‪٥۹ ................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ‪٥۹ .............................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻣﺭﺷﺢ ﻟﻠﻬﻭﺍء‪٥۹ .................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ‪٥۹ ......................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻓﻳﻠﻡ ‪٤۳ .........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺣﻔﻅ ﺻﻭﺭ ‪٤۳ ......................................................................... RAW‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪٤٤ ..............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ‪٤٥ ...............................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻓﻳﻠﻡ ‪٤٥ .........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﻣﻳﺯﺍﺕ ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ‪٤۳ ...................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ‪٥۷ ..............................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺯﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺋﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻼﺋﻣﺔ‪٤۰ ...................................................................‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ‪۳۸ ...............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪۳۸ ........................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺭﻣﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩ‪۳۹ ...................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪٤۰ ...............................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﻓﻧﻳﺔ ‪٥۳ .........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﻋﻳﻥ ﺳﻣﻛﺔ )ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﻋﻳﻥ ﺳﻣﻛﺔ( ‪٥٤ ......................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺗﺑﺩﻭ ﻛﺭﺳﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺯﻳﺗﻳﺔ )ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻥ ﺍﻟﺟﻣﻳﻝ( ‪٥٤ ....................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺗﺑﺩﻭ ﻛﻠﻭﺣﺔ ﻣﺎﺋﻳﺔ )ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﻣﺎﺋﻳﺔ(‪٥٤ ..........................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺗﺑﺩﻭ ﻛﻧﻣﻭﺫﺝ ﻣﺻﻐﺭ )ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﻣﺻﻐﺭ( ‪٥٥ ...........................................‬‬
‫ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻭﻣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺩﺭﺓ )ﻟﻣﻘﺎﻁﻊ ﻣﺩﺗﻬﺎ ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ( ‪٥٥ ......................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺳﻳﻁﺔ )ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺳﻳﻁﺔ( ‪٥٦ .........................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺑﺅﺭﻱ ﺳﻠﺱ ‪٥٦ ..................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻟﻭﻥ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ )ﺃﺑﻳﺽ‪/‬ﺃﺳﻭﺩ ﻣﺣﺑﺏ(‪٥۷ .........................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪) AE‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ]‪٦۰ ..................................................... ([P‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪/ Auto‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪C‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ‪٦٥ ...........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺹ‪٦٥ ..................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﻳﺩﻭﻳًﺎ ‪٦٦ ..............................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻅﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺿﻠﺔ )ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ(‪٦۷ ......................................................‬‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪٦۸ .........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺣﻔﻅ ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺿﻠﺔ‪٦۹ ................................................................‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﻗﻳﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ )ﻧﻣﻁ ]‪۸۳ ..................................................... ([Av‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺑﺅﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪٦۹ ..............................................................‬‬
‫‪ AF‬ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ‪٦۹ ............................................................................‬‬
‫‪+‬ﺗﺗﺑﻊ ‪۷۰ .....................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺃﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﻟﻠﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ )‪ AF‬ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻣﺱ( ‪۷۱ ...................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻗﻔﻝ ‪۷۱ .................................................................... AF‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ‪۷۲ .................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪۷۳ .............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺑﺩﻗﺔ ‪۷۳ ..............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻳﺩﻭﻱ ‪۷٤ ...............................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ ﺑﺳﻬﻭﻟﺔ )ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺣﻭﺍﻑ ‪۷٤ .............................. (MF‬‬
‫ﻣﺭﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﻋﻣﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﺎﻝ ‪۸۳ ...........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺳﺭﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ ﻭﻗﻳﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ )ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ]‪۸٤ ............................... ([M‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﻁﻭﻳﻝ‪۸٥ .............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺇﺧﺭﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪۸٥ .........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺳﺭﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ ﻭﻗﻳﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ‪۸٦ .................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﻋﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪۸۷ ..........................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ‪۸۷ ...................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ‪۸۷ ..............................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻁﻭﺭﺓ‪۸۸ ...............................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﻭﺍﻷﻗﺭﺍﺹ ‪۸۹ ...................................................‬‬
‫ﺣﻔﻅ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ )ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ]‪۹۰ .......................................................... ([C‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺣﻔﻅﻬﺎ ‪۹۰ ...............................................................‬‬
‫ﺣﻔﻅ ﻋﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺷﺎﺋﻌﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ )ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺗﻲ(‪۹۱ ......................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪۷٥ ........................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪۷٥ ...............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪۷٥ ........................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪۷٥ ........................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺯﺍﻣﻥ ﺑﻁﺊ‪۷٥ ..................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ‪۷٥ ........................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪۷٦ ..................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻗﻔﻝ ‪۷٦ .................................................................... FE‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺗﻭﻗﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪۷۷ ............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻗﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪۷۷ ......................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪۷۷ ...................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﻣﻁ ‪۷۸ ......................................................................... IS‬‬
‫ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺑﺎﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺣﺟﻡ ﺫﺍﺗﻪ ﺍﻟﻅﺎﻫﺭ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ‪۷۸ ..........................‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ Tv‬ﻭ‪ Av‬ﻭ‪ M‬ﻭ‪۸۲ ..................................................... C‬‬
‫ﺳﺭﻋﺎﺕ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ )ﻧﻣﻁ ]‪۸۲ ........................................................ ([Tv‬‬
‫ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪٦۹ .....................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ‪۷۸ ...............................................................................‬‬
‫‪۷‬‬
‫ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻓﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪/‬ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻻﻧﺣﺭﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻧﻲ‪۷۹ .................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻭﻳﺵ‪۸۰ ...................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺗﺧﻔﻳﺽ ﺿﻭﺿﺎء ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩﺓ ‪۸۰ .........................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻭﻳﺵ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺳﺭﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺧﻔﺿﺔ ‪۸۱ ...............................................‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ‪۹۳ ......................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ‪۹۳ .......................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺳﻳﺔ ‪۹٤ .........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ‪۹٥ ............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ ‪۹٥ .........................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﺫﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﺭﺗﻔﻌﺔ )ﻷﺟﺯﺍء ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﻁﻌﺔ( ‪۹٦ .............................‬‬
‫ﺭﺳﻡ ﺗﻭﺿﻳﺣﻲ ﻟﻠﺳﻁﻭﻉ ‪۹٦ ....................................................................‬‬
‫ﺭﺳﻡ ﺗﻭﺿﻳﺣﻲ ﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ ‪۹٦ ..............................................................RGB‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺻﻳﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺇﻧﺷﺎﺅﻫﺎ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ )ﻣﻠﺧﺻﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ(‪۹٦ .....‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪/ Auto‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪C‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪۹۷ ......................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﻌﺭﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻭﺗﺭﺷﻳﺣﻬﺎ ‪۹۷ ...............................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻧﻘﻝ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻓﻬﺭﺱ‪۹۷ ........................................................‬‬
‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺳﻳﺔ ‪۹۸ .....................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﺟﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ ‪۹۸ .......................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﻟﻠﺗﻧﻘﻝ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪۹۹ ...................................................‬‬
‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺳﻳﺔ ‪۱۰۰ ...................................................................‬‬
‫ﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪۱۰۰ ....................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ‪۱۰۰ ..................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺳﻳﺔ ‪۱۰۱ ...................................................................‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﻋﺭﻭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﺍﺋﺢ ‪۱۰۱ .....................................................................‬‬
‫ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪۱۰۲ ...............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪۱۰۲ ................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻧﻔﺭﺩ ‪۱۰۳ ..............................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻣﺩﻯ‪۱۰۳ ................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺩﻓﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ‪۱۰٤ ............................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺩﻓﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ‪۱۰٤ ......................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪۱۰٥ ................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺳﺢ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩﺓ ﺩﻓﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ‪۱۰٥ ...............................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ‪۱۰٥ ......................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻧﻔﺭﺩ ‪۱۰٥ ..............................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻣﺩﻯ‪۱۰٦ ................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺩﻓﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ‪۱۰٦ ............................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪۱۰۷ ...............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪۱۰۷ ................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪۱۰۸ ..................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻧﻳﻔﺎﺕ‪۱۰۸ ...........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪۱۰۸ ................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‪۱۰۹ .......................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪۱۰۹ ............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪۱۱۰ ............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻬﺫﻳﺏ‪۱۱۰ ..........................................................................................‬‬
‫‪۸‬‬
‫ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺷﺢ‪۱۱۱ .......................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺭﺍء‪۱۱۲ ........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪۱۱۳ ...............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺃﺣﺟﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪۱۱٤ ...........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﻣﻠﺧﺹ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ‪۱۱٤ ........................................................................‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪۱۱٥ ..........................................................Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻣﻳﺯﺍﺕ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ ‪۱۱٥ ....................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﻳﺭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ ‪۱۱٦ ...........................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ ﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻕ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻘﻧﻳﺔ ‪۱۱٦ .................................... NFC‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﻋﺑﺭ ‪ NFC‬ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪۱۱٦ ..............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﻋﺑﺭ ‪ NFC‬ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ‪۱۱۷ ...........................‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻫﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪۱۱۸ .................................................. Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ‪۱۱۹ .................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﻳﺩ ﺗﻭﺍﻓﻕ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ‪۱۲۰ ...............................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪۱۲۰ ............................................... WPS‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﺭﺟﺔ ‪۱۲۱ ........................................................‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ ‪۱۲۲ .....................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﻭﻳﺏ ﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ ‪۱۲۲ ....................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ‪۱۲۲ .........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻓﻲ ‪۱۲۳ ...................................CANON iMAGE GATEWAY‬‬
‫ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ ‪۱۲٤ ...........................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﻣﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ‪۱۲٥ ............................................................‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﺷﻐﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺳﺎﺋﻁ ‪۱۲٦ .................................................‬‬
‫ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻻﺳﻠﻛﻳًﺎ ﻣﻥ ﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻣﺗﺻﻠﺔ‪۱۲۷ .................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪۱۲۹ ..........................................................‬‬
‫ﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ‪۱۳۰ ....................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻋﺩﺓ ﺻﻭﺭ ‪۱۳۰ .............................................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ‪۱۳۰ ..............................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻋﺩﺩ ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﻛﺳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ )ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ( ‪۱۳۱ ........................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﻌﻠﻳﻘﺎﺕ ‪۱۳۱ ................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ )ﻣﺯﺍﻣﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ( ‪۱۳۱ ..................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺟﻬﻳﺯﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺩﺋﻳﺔ‪۱۳۱ ............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺟﻬﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ‪۱۳۱ ............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺟﻬﻳﺯ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪۱۳۲ ....................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪۱۳۲ .................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻋﻥ ﺑُﻌﺩ‪۱۳۳ ...........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﺳﺣﻬﺎ ‪۱۳٤ .......................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪/ Auto‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ‪۱۳٤ ....................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻻﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻌﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﺟﻬﺎﺯ‪۱۳٤ .............................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺳﺢ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ‪۱۳٥ ..................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻟﻣﺷﺎﺭﻛﺗﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﺍﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻳﺔ‪۱۳٥ ..............................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻳﺔ‪۱۳٦ ...................................‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪C‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۹‬‬
‫ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ‪۱٤۳ ....................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﻳﺩﻭﻱ ‪۱٤۳ ...........................................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺭﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺷﻌﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺷﻬﺎﺩﺍﺕ‪۱٤٤ ...................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻘﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻊ ﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ‪۱٤٤ ..........................................‬‬
‫ﺣﺫﻑ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻘﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻊ ‪۱٤٤ .............................................................‬‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‪۱٤٥ .....................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻳﺔ ‪۱٤٥ ...............................................................‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪۱۳۷ ....................................................................‬‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‪۱۳۷ ...........................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ‪۱۳۷ ................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺭﻗﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ ‪۱۳۷ ...................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ‪۱۳۸ .........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺧﻔﺽ ‪۱۳۸ ..........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺗﻧﺳﻳﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﺩﻳﻭ ‪۱۳۹ .........................................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻹﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻲ‪۱۳۹ ..................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻹﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻲ ‪۱۳۹ ........................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻗﺗﺻﺎﺩﻱ ‪۱۳۹ ..................................................................‬‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺗﻭﻓﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪۱٤۰ ............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪۱٤۰ .................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻭﻗﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻣﻲ ‪۱٤۱ ...............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪۱٤۱ ................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‪۱٤۱ ....................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻛﺗﻡ ﺻﻭﺕ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ‪۱٤۲ ..........................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﻔﺎء ﺍﻟﻧﺻﺎﺋﺢ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻠﻣﻳﺣﺎﺕ ‪۱٤۲ ...................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺳﻳﺔ ‪۱٤۲ ...............................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪۱٤۲ .....................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪۱٤۲ ...........................................................‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ ‪۱٤٦ ........................................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺧﻁﻁ ﺍﻟﻧﻅﺎﻡ‪۱٤۷ ...............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪۱٤۸ ........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ‪۱٤۸ .........................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﻭﻓﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪۱٤۸ ..........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪۱٤۹ .........................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪۱٤۹ .................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ‪۱٥۰ .......................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪۱٥۰ ..............................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ‪۱٥۰ ..................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺯﻭﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺯﻟﻳﺔ ‪۱٥۱ ............................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑُﻌﺩ‪۱٥۲ .....................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ‪۱٥۲ ......................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﻛﺗﺷﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻬﺩ ﺍﻹﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻲ )ﻳﺑﺎﻉ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻼً(‪۱٥۳ ........................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ )ﻳُﺑﺎﻉ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻼً( ‪۱٥٤ ......................................................‬‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪۱٥٥ ..........................................................‬‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ﻟﻠﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ‪۱٥٦ ...........................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ‪۱٥۷ ...................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﻳﻛﺭﻭﻓﻭﻧﺎﺕ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻳﺔ‪۱٥۷ ................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ ‪۱٥۸ ............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ ‪۱٥۸ ........................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ ‪۱٥۸ ....................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﺑﻳﺋﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪۱٥۸ ..............................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ ‪۱٥۸ .................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ‪۱٥۹ ............................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪/ Auto‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪C‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ‪۱٦۰ ..............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﻬﻠﺔ ‪۱٦۰ ................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪۱٦۱ ........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻬﺫﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪۱٦۲ ...............................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺧﻁﻳﻁ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪۱٦۲ ..............................................‬‬
‫ﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺧﻁﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ‪۱٦۳ .................................................................‬‬
‫ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﻳﺔ ‪۱٦۳ ......................................................................‬‬
‫ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪۱٦۳ ..........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪۱٦۳ ....................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ )‪۱٦٤ ...............................................(DPOF‬‬
‫ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪۱٦٤ ....................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺭﺩﻳﺔ ‪۱٦٥ .............................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﻣﺩﻯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ‪۱٦٥ ....................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪۱٦٥ ....................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺳﺢ ﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﻥ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ‪۱٦٥ ......................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻟﺑﻭﻡ ﺻﻭﺭ‪۱٦٦ ...............................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ‪۱٦٦ ......................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻓﺭﺩﻱ‪۱٦٦ ...............................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻟﺑﻭﻡ ﺻﻭﺭ‪۱٦٦ ....................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻟﺑﻭﻡ ﺻﻭﺭ‪۱٦۷ ......................................................‬‬
‫‪ ١٠‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ ‪۱٦۸ ..........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﻛﺷﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﻁﺎء ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ‪۱٦۸ .............................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺭﺳﺎﺋﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪۱۷۲ ..........................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪۱۷٤ ........................................................‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ‪۱۷٤ .................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺷﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪۱۷٤ ....................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ‪۱۷٥ ........................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ‪۱۷٥ ....................................................................... ۱‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ‪۱۷٥ ....................................................................... ۲‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ‪۱۷٥ ....................................................................... ۳‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ‪۱۷٥ ....................................................................... ٤‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ‪۱۷٦ ....................................................................... ٥‬‬
‫‪۱۰‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ‪۱۷٦ ....................................................................... ٦‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﺧﺹ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪۱۷٦ ................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﻭﺟﺩﺍﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ‪۱۷۷ ...................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻝ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ‪۱۷۷ .......................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻳﻌﺔ‪۱۷۹ ............................................................................‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ‪۱۸۱ .......................................................................‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ‪۱۸٦ ............................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺳﺭﻳﻊ ﺑـ ‪۱۸۷ .......................................................................INFO.‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ”ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ“ ‪۱۸۷ .......................................................................‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ”ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺗﻲ“ ‪۱۸۸ ......................................................................‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ”ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ“ ‪۱۸۸ ......................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻳﻌﺔ ﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ‪۱۸۸ ............................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺎﻣﻝ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪۱۸۹ .............................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ‪۱۹۰ .................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻉ‪۱۹۰ .......................................................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ‪۱۹۰ ..........................................................................‬‬
‫ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‪۱۹۰ ..............................................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪۱۹۱ ............................................................‬‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪۱۹۱ ........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ‪۱۹۱ ................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ‪۱۹۲ ......................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪۱۹۲ .....................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ‪۱۹۲ ....................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ‪۱۹۲ ......................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ‪۱۹۲ ..................................................................‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪۱۹۳ .............................................................................. LCD‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ‪۱۹۳ ....................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺎﻟﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺣﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭ‪۱۹۳ ..................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭﺓ‪۱۹٤ ..........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ‪۱۹٤ ......................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ‪۱۹٤ ....................................................................................‬‬
‫‪۱۹٤ .................................................................................... Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪/ Auto‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪C‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۱۱‬‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪۱۹٤ ............................................................................‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﻭﻓﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪۱۹٥ ......................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﻭﺯﻥ ‪۱۹٥ ............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺑﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ‪۱۹٥ ...............................................................................‬‬
‫ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﻟﻛﻝ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ‪۱۹٥ ...........................................................‬‬
‫ﻣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻟﻛﻝ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‪۱۹٦ ............................................................‬‬
‫ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ ‪۱۹٦ ...............................................................‬‬
‫ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪۱۹٦ ...............................................................LP-E17‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻁﺭﺍﺯ ‪۱۹۷ ........................................LC-E17/LC-E17E‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ ‪۱۹۸ .....................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﺎﺕ ‪) Wi-Fi‬ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ LAN‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ(‪۲۰۰ ..............................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﺎﺕ ﺗﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ‪۲۰۰ .........................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ‪۲۰۰ .............................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺟﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺭﺧﻳﺹ ‪۲۰۱ ...........................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﻼء ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺅﻭﻟﻳﺔ ‪۲۰۱ ..........................................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺋﻌﺔ‬
‫● ﻣﺣﻭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫‪۱۰٥ = -‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫● ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺣﺩﺩﻫﺎ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ )ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ ،Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ(‬
‫‪۳۷ = ،۳٥ = -‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪/ Auto‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫● ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﻥ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﻙ )ﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﺇﺑﺩﺍﻋﻳﺔ(‬
‫‪٤۸ = -‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫● ﺗﺑﻬﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺣﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺿﺣﺔ )ﻧﻣﻁ ‪(Av‬‬
‫‪۸۳ = -‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫● ﺗﺟﻣﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﻛﺔ ﻭﺗﺑﻬﻳﺗﻬﺎ )ﻧﻣﻁ ‪(Tv‬‬
‫‪۸۲ = -‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪C‬‬
‫● ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ )ﻣﺭﺷﺣﺎﺕ ﺇﺑﺩﺍﻋﻳﺔ(‬
‫‪٥۲ = -‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫● ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﺗﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ )ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ(‬
‫‪٤۲ = -‬‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫● ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻣﺎﻛﻥ ﻣﺣﻅﻭﺭ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ(‬
‫‪۳٦ = -‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫● ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺍﺟﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ )ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ(‬
‫‪٤۰ = -‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫● ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ )ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ(‬
‫ = ‪۹۳‬‬‫● ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )ﻋﺭﺽ ﺷﺭﺍﺋﺢ(‬
‫ = ‪۱۰۱‬‬‫● ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ‬
‫ = ‪۱٥۰‬‬‫● ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‬
‫ = ‪۱٥۸‬‬‫● ﺍﺳﺗﻌﺭﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺔ‬
‫‪۹۷ = -‬‬
‫‪۱۲‬‬
‫ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪/‬ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫● ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ = ‪٥۷ = ،۳٥‬‬‫● ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ )ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ(‬
‫ = ‪۹۳‬‬‫ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫● ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ = ‪۱٦۰‬‬‫ﺍﻟﺣﻔﻅ‬
‫● ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻛﺑﻝ‬
‫ = ‪۱٥۹‬‬‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫● ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ‬
‫ = ‪۱۱٦‬‬‫● ﻣﺷﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻋﺑﺭ ﺍﻹﻧﺗﺭﻧﺕ‬
‫ = ‪۱۲۲‬‬‫● ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‬
‫‪۱۳۱ = -‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺳﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪/ Auto‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪C‬‬
‫● ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﻗﺭﺍءﺓ ﺍﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺳﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﺣﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﺩﺍﺋﻣًﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﺑﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺻﺣﻳﺣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺗﻬﺩﻑ ﺍﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺳﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ ﻫﻧﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺗﻙ ﻭﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﺷﺧﺎﺹ ﺍﻵﺧﺭﻳﻥ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﺽ‬
‫ﻟﻺﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺇﺣﺩﺍﺙ ﺗﻠﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻣﺗﻠﻛﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﻣﻥ ﻣﺭﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺍﻷﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻣﻧﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻱ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﻠﺣﻕ ﻳﺑﺎﻉ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻼً ﻭﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﺫﻳﺭ‬
‫ﻳُﺷﻳﺭ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻣﻛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﻹﺻﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺧﻁﻳﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻭﻓﺎﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﺗﻘﻡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻣﺳﺎﻓﺔ ﻗﺭﻳﺑﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻋﻳﻥ ﺍﻷﺷﺧﺎﺹ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻟﺣﺎﻕ ﺃﺫﻯ ﺑﺣﺎﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﺻﺭ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺧﺎﺹ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻳﻙ ﺍﻻﺑﺗﻌﺎﺩ ﻣﺳﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﺗﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻝ‬
‫ﺑﻌﻳ ًﺩﺍ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻷﻁﻔﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻐﺎﺭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﻌﻳ ًﺩﺍ ﻋﻥ ﻣﺗﻧﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﻁﻔﺎﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﺻﻐﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﻟﻑ ﺍﻟﺭﺑﺎﻁ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺭﻗﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﻔﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺧﺗﻧﺎﻗﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﻣﺯﻭ ًﺩﺍ ﺑﺳﻠﻙ ﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﻠﺗﻑ ﺣﻭﻝ ﻋﻧﻕ ﺍﻟﻁﻔﻝ‪ ،‬ﻭﺭﺑﻣﺎ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺧﺗﻧﺎﻗﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﻳﻣﺛﻝ ﻏﻁﺎء ﻗﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺧﻁﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻐﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺑﺗﻼﻋﻪ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺑﺗﻼﻋﻪ‪ ،‬ﻳﺟﺏ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻁﺑﻳﺏ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫● ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻣﺻﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺻﻰ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻓﻘﻁ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫● ﻻ ﺗﻘﻡ ﺑﺗﻔﻛﻳﻙ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻳﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺭﻳﺿﻪ ﻟﻠﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫● ﻻ ﺗﻧﺯﻉ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺻﻕ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺯﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﺫﻟﻙ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺗﺟﻧﺏ ﺇﺳﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺭﻳﺿﻪ ﻟﺻﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﻗﻭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﺗﻠﻣﺱ ﺍﻷﺟﺯﺍء ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻛﺳﺭﻩ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺑﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺛﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺳﻘﻭﻁﻪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﻋﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺻﺩﻭﺭ ﺩﺧﺎﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺭﺍﺋﺣﺔ ﻏﺭﻳﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻳﻌﻣﻝ ﺑﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﻏﻳﺭ‬
‫ﻁﺑﻳﻌﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻣﺫﻳﺑﺎﺕ ﻋﺿﻭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺛﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺣﻭﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺑﻧﺯﻳﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﻧﺭ ﻟﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺗﺟﻧﺏ ﻣﻼﻣﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﻟﻠﺳﻭﺍﺋﻝ ﻭﻻ ﺗﺳﻣﺢ ﺑﻣﺭﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺳﻭﺍﺋﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻐﺭﻳﺑﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱۳‬‬
‫ﻗﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺻﺩﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺭﻳﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺑﻠﻝ ﻟﻠﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﺭﻭﺭ ﺳﻭﺍﺋﻝ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﻏﺭﻳﺑﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻪ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻡ ﺑﻔﺻﻠﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﺗﻧﻅﺭ ﺑﺎﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﻣﺻﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺷﺩﻳﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻣﺛﻝ ﺿﻭء ﺍﻟﺷﻣﺱ ﻓﻲ ﻳﻭﻡ ﺻﺎ ٍ‬
‫ﻑ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺻﺩﺭ ﺿﻭء‬
‫ﺻﻧﺎﻋﻲ ﺫﻱ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺷﺩﻳﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻅﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ )ﻳﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻣﻛﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺗﻣﺗﻊ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻟﺣﺎﻕ ﺃﺫﻯ ﺑﺣﺎﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﺻﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﻣﺯﻭ ًﺩﺍ ﺑﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﻓﻼ ﺗﺗﺭﻙ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﺯﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻣﻌﺭﺿﺔ‬
‫ﻷﺷﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺷﻣﺱ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻏﻁﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻣﺭﻛﺑًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﺷﻭﺏ ﺣﺭﻳﻕ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﺗﻠﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﻋﻭﺍﺻﻑ ﺭﻋﺩﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻠﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎء‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺻﺩﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺭﻳﻕ‪ .‬ﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﻋﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺭ ﻭﺍﺑﺗﻌﺩ ﻋﻧﻪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺻﻰ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻓﻘﻁ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﺗﺿﻊ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺭﺏ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻟﺳﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻬﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺷﻭﻓﺔ ﻭﻻ ﺗﺿﻌﻬﺎ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻧﻔﺟﺎﺭ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺗﺳﺭﺏ ﺑﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻥ ﺛ ّﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﻟﺻﺩﻣﺔ‬
‫ﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻧﺷﻭﺏ ﺣﺭﻳﻕ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﻼﻣﺳﺔ ﺇﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻟﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﻳﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺟﻠﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﻼﺑﺱ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﻏﺳﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﻣﺎء ﻏﺯﻳﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﻣﺯﻭ ًﺩﺍ ﺑﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻳﺟﺏ ﻣﺭﺍﻋﺎﺓ ﺍﻻﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺱ ﺑﺻﻔﺔ ﺩﻭﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻗﻁﻌﺔ ﻗﻣﺎﺵ ﺟﺎﻓﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻷﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﻭﺳﺎﺥ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺟﻣﻌﺔ‬‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺱ ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺟﺯء ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻣﻥ ﻣﺄﺧﺫ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻳﻁﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ ﻻ ﺗﻘﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺱ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺗﻪ ﺑﺄﻳ ٍﺩ ﻣﺑﺗﻠﺔ‪.‬‬‫ ﻻ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺗﺟﺎﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﺳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺩﱠﺭﺓ ﻟﻣﺄﺧﺫ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎﺋﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻻ‬‫ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺱ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺄﺧﺫ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎﺋﻲ ﺗﻣﺎﻣًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ ﻻ ﺗﺳﻣﺢ ﺑﺗﺭﺍﻛﻡ ﺍﻷﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺣﺗﻛﺎﻙ ﺍﻷﺟﺳﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺩﻧﻳﺔ )ﻣﺛﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺎﺑﻙ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ( ﺑﺎﻷﻁﺭﺍﻑ ﺃﻭ‬‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺱ‪.‬‬
‫ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﻣﺯﻭ ًﺩﺍ ﺑﺳﻠﻙ ﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻼ ﺗﻘﻁﻌﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺗﻠﻔﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺩﻟﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺿﻊ ﺃﺷﻳﺎ ًء ﺛﻘﻳﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻳﻪ‪.‬‬‫ﻗﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺻﺩﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺭﻳﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪/ Auto‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪C‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫● ﺃﻭﻗﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺣﻅﺭ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺩ ﺗﺗﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﻭﻣﻐﻧﺎﻁﻳﺳﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﻊ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‪ .‬ﻓﻌﻠﻳﻙ ﺗﻭﺧﻲ ﺍﻟﺣﺫﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺣﻅﺭ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺛﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺋﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﻓﻕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﺗﺗﺭﻙ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﻼﻣﺳﺔ ﻟﻠﺟﻠﺩ ﻟﻔﺗﺭﺍﺕ ﺯﻣﻧﻳﺔ ﻁﻭﻳﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺑﺣﺭﻭﻕ ﺑﺎﺭﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﻲ ﻋﺑﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻥ ﺍﺣﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺟﻠﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻘﺭﺣﻪ‪ ،‬ﺣﺗﻰ ﻭﺇﻥ ﻟﻡ ﺗﻛﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺳﺎﺧﻧﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺣﺎﻣﻼً ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻧﺕ ﺗﻌﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻥ ﺿﻌﻑ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﻣﻭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺣﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﺷﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻪ‬
‫ﻳُﺷﻳﺭ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻣﻛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﻟﻺﺻﺎﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﺣﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺭﺑﺎﻁ‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﺭﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﺭﺗﻁﺎﻣﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺭﻳﺿﻪ ﻟﺻﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻗﻭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺳﻘﻭﻁﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺟﺳﺎﻡ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺣﺭﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﺭﺗﻁﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ ﺑﻘﻭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺣﺭﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﺻﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﻗﻭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻧﺗﻳﺟﺔ ﻟﻸﺟﺯﺍء ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺳﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻠﻛﺳﺭ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﺗﺣﺩﺙ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺔ‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﺭﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺗﻐﻁﻳﺗﻪ ﺑﺄﺻﺎﺑﻌﻙ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻼﺑﺳﻙ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺣﺭﻳﻕ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺗﺟﻧﺏ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺿﻌﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺧﺯﻳﻧﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﺿﺔ ﻷﺷﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺷﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭﺓ‬‫ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﺿﺔ ﻟﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺗﺗﻌﺩﻯ ‪ ٤۰‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺋﻭﻳﺔ‬‫ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﺭﻁﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺳﺧﺔ‬‫ﻗﺩ ﺗﺳﺑﺏ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺗﺳﺭﺏ ﻟﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺗﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻧﻔﺟﺎﺭﻫﺎ؛‬
‫ﻣﻣﺎ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺻﺩﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻧﺷﻭﺏ ﺣﺭﻳﻕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺑﺣﺭﻭﻕ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺩ ﻳﻧﺗﺞ ﻋﻥ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻠﻑ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺻﺩﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻧﺷﻭﺏ ﺣﺭﻳﻕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺑﺣﺭﻭﻕ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﺩ ﺗﺳﺑﺏ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻘﺎﻝ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﺍﺋﺢ ﺍﻟﺷﻌﻭﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻳﻕ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻋﺭﺿﻬﺎ ﻟﻔﺗﺭﺍﺕ ﻁﻭﻳﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱٤‬‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺭﺷﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺷﺢ )ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ(‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺭﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ ﺑﺈﺣﻛﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻔﻛﻙ ﻣﻠﺣﻕ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻭﺳﻘﻭﻁﻪ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻧﻛﺳﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﺩ ﺗﺅﺩﻱ ﻗﻁﻊ ﺍﻟﺯﺟﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺑﺟﺭﻭﺡ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ ﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻭﺧﻔﺿﻪ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺇﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺃﺻﺎﺑﻌﻙ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺧﻔﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺗﻙ ﺑﺟﺭﻭﺡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻪ‬
‫ﻳُﺷﻳﺭ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻣﻛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺗﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻣﺗﻠﻛﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﺗﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺻﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺷﺩﻳﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻣﺛﻝ ﺿﻭء ﺍﻟﺷﻣﺱ ﻓﻲ ﻳﻭﻡ ﺻﺎ ٍ‬
‫ﻑ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺻﺩﺭ ﺿﻭء‬
‫ﺻﻧﺎﻋﻲ ﺫﻱ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺷﺩﻳﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻑ ﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﻭﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﻁﺊ ﺭﻣﻠﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻭﻗﻊ ﻣﻌﺭﺽ ﻟﻠﺭﻳﺎﺡ‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﺭﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺳﻣﺎﺡ‬
‫ﺑﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ ﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻭﺧﻔﺿﻪ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﺩﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻷﺳﻔﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻔﺗﺣﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﻭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﻗﺻﻭﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﻣﺳﺢ ﺃﻱ ﺃﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻏﺑﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﻏﺭﻳﺑﺔ ﻣﻠﺗﺻﻘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻗﻁﻌﺔ ﻗﻁﻥ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻣﺎﺵ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺩ ﺗﺗﺳﺑﺏ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻧﺑﻌﺙ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺑﺧﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻐﺭﻳﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﻁﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻭﺗﺧﺯﻳﻧﻬﺎ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﺳﺑﺏ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺗﺳﺭﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺧﻠﺹ ﻣﻥ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻐﻁﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﻁﺭﺍﻑ ﺑﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﻋﺎﺯﻟﺔ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺍﺣﺗﻛﺎﻛﻬﺎ ﺑﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﻣﻌﺩﻧﻳﺔ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺣﺭﻳﻕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻧﻔﺟﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﻓﺻﻝ ﺃﻱ ﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﻌﻣﺎﻟﻪ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ‬
‫ﺑﻙ ﻳﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻋﺩﺓ ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻓﻼ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﺷﺣﻥ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ ﻣﻌًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻻ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺟﺩﻳﺩﺓ ﻭﻗﺩﻳﻣﺔ ﻣﻌًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ‪ ،‬ﻓﻼ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﺷﺣﻥ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ ﻣﻌًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻻ‬
‫ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺟﺩﻳﺩﺓ ﻭﻗﺩﻳﻣﺔ ﻣﻌًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪/ Auto‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪C‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۱٥‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﺗﺗﺭﻙ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺭﺏ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻳﻭﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻟﻳﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﻗﺿﻡ ﺍﻟﺣﻳﻭﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﻟﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺗﺳﺭﺏ ﻟﻠﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺗﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ‬
‫ﺍﻧﻔﺟﺎﺭ ﻣﻣﺎ ﻳﻧﺗﺞ ﻋﻧﻪ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺗﻠﻑ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺭﻳﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﻙ ﻳﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻋﺩﺓ ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻓﻼ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﺷﺣﻥ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻌًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻻ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺟﺩﻳﺩﺓ ﻭﻗﺩﻳﻣﺔ ﻣﻌًﺎ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﻭﺟﺩ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻓﺎﻥ ‪+‬‬
‫ﻭ– ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻌﻛﻭﺱ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﻗﺻﻭﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﺗﺟﻠﺱ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻳﺏ ﺳﺭﻭﺍﻟﻙ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﻗﺻﻭﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻔﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺣﻘﻳﺑﺗﻙ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﻋﺩﻡ ﻣﻼﻣﺳﺔ ﺃﺷﻳﺎء ﺻﻠﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻡ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺑﺈﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫)ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﺗﻭﺍﺟﻪ ﺟﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ( ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﻣﺯﻭ ًﺩﺍ ﺑﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺇﻏﻼﻗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﺗﻘﻡ ﺑﺈﺭﻓﺎﻕ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺃﺷﻳﺎء ﺻﻠﺑﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﻗﺻﻭﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻔﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺟﻬﻳﺯﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺩﺋﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪/ Auto‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﻌﺩ ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺭﺑﺎﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺭﺑﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻣﻥ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻣﻭﺿﺢ‪.‬‬
‫˺‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺟﻬﻳﺯﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺩﺋﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫˻‬
‫● ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﺎﻧﺏ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻵﺧﺭ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺭﺑﺎﻁ ﺑﺎﻟﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺫﺍﺗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫˽‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫˼‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪C‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺷﺣﻥ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﺷﺣﻥ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻣﻥ‪ .‬ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺷﺣﻥ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺑﺩﺋﻳًﺎ‪،‬‬
‫ﺣﻳﺙ ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺑﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺷﺣﻭﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء ﻣﻥ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﻣﺣﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺗﻳﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺗﻳﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺷﺎﺣﻥ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﻗﻡ‬
‫ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺩﻓﻌﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﺩﺍﺧﻝ )‪ (۱‬ﻭﻷﺳﻔﻝ )‪.(۲‬‬
‫˺‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫˻‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫˻‬
‫˺‬
‫‪LC-E17‬‬
‫‪۱٦‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺷﺣﻥ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ‪ :LC-E17‬ﺍﺳﺣﺏ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺱ )‪ ،(۱‬ﺛﻡ ﺻِ ﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﺑﻣﺄﺧﺫ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ )‪.(۲‬‬
‫● ‪ :LC-E17E‬ﺻِ ﻝ ﺳﻠﻙ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺷﺎﺣﻥ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺻِ ﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻑ ﺍﻵﺧﺭ ﺑﻣﺄﺧﺫ ﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫‪LC-E17E‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪/ Auto‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫● ﻳﺗﺣﻭﻝ ﻟﻭﻥ ﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ ﻭﻳﺑﺩﺃ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ‪.‬‬
‫●‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻛﺗﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ‪ ،‬ﺗﺗﺣﻭﻝ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺧﺿﺭ‪.‬‬
‫●‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫˺‬
‫●‬
‫ﺃﺯﻝ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫●‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺩ ﻓﺻﻝ ﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﺯﻝ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺩﻓﻌﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺩﺍﺧﻝ )‪ (۱‬ﻭﻷﻋﻠﻰ )‪.(۲‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺣﻭﻝ ﻣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻁﺭﺍﺯ ‪“LC-E17/LC-E17E‬‬
‫)= ‪ .(۱۹۷‬ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺣﻭﻝ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻣﻛﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﻭﻓﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ“ )= ‪.(۱۹٥‬‬
‫ﺗﻔﻘﺩ ﺣﺯﻡ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺣﻭﻧﺔ ﺷﺣﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺩﺭﻳﺞ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻟﺫﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﺷﺣﻥ‬
‫ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻳﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻓﻳﻪ )ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻳﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻕ ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ ًﺓ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻛﺗﺫﻛﻳﺭ ﻣﺭﺋﻲ ﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻏﻁﺎء ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺣﻭﻧﺔ ﻭﺗﺧﺗﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺣﻭﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻣﺗﺭﺩﺩ ﻳﺗﺭﺍﻭﺡ ﺟﻬﺩﻩ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﻲ ﻣﻥ ‪ ۱۰۰‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ۲٤۰‬ﻓﻭﻟﺕ‬
‫)‪ ٦۰/٥۰‬ﻫﺭﺗﺯ(‪ .‬ﻭﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﻣﻧﺎﻓﺫ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻣﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺗﻠﻑ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺃﺣﺩ ﻣﺣﻭﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻭﺍﻕ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻡ ﻣﻁﻠ ًﻘﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﺣﻭﻝ ﻛﻬﺭﺑﻲ ﻣﺻﻣﻡ ﻟﻠﺳﻔﺭ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻑ‬
‫ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫˻‬
‫ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪C‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﺛﻭﺍﻥ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﻣﻥ ﻣﺄﺧﺫ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻠﻣﺱ ﻗﺎﺑﺱ ﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ‪٥‬‬
‫ٍ‬
‫ﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺣﺎﻓﻅﺔ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻓﺿﻝ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻡ ﺑﺷﺣﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻷﻛﺛﺭ ﻣﻥ‬
‫‪ ۲٤‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﺷﻭﺍﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺳﻠﻙ ﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺳﻠﻙ ﺑﺄﺟﺳﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﻡ ﺑﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﻋﻁﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻔﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺷﻲء ﻏﻳﺭ ﻁﺑﻳﻌﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺋﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ ﻭﻳﻭﻣﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻓﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﻣﻥ ﻣﺄﺧﺫ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺃﺯﻝ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺛﻡ ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻟﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻧﺗﻅﺭ ﺑﺭﻫﺔ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻠﻪ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﺑﻣﺄﺧﺫ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻣﻧﺔ ﻭﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ) ُﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻠﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺣﻅ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺟﺩﻳﺩﺓ )ﺃﻭ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺗﻣﺕ ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺗﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺁﺧﺭ(‪ ،‬ﻳﻧﺑﻐﻲ ﻋﻠﻳﻙ ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ )= ‪.(۱۳۸‬‬
‫˻‬
‫˺‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫˺‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫˻‬
‫‪۱۷‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺗﺢ ﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء‪.‬‬
‫● ﺣﺭّ ﻙ ﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء )‪ ،(۱‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻓﺗﺣﻪ )‪.(۲‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻹﻣﺳﺎﻙ ﺑﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﻊ ﺗﻭﺟﻳﻪ ﺍﻟﻧﻬﺎﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻓﻳﺔ )‪ (۱‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻣﻭﺿﺢ‪ ،‬ﺣﺭّ ﻙ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻷﺳﻔﻝ )‪ ،(۲‬ﺛﻡ ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺑﻬﺎ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺗﺳﺗﻘﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻭﺿﻌﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻣﺻﺩﺭ ًﺓ ﺻﻭﺕ ﻧﻘﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻭﺟﻳﻬﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺟﺎﻩ‬
‫ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﺣﻳﺢ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻥ ﺗﺗﻣﻛﻥ ﻣﻥ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﺣﻳﺢ‪ .‬ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﺩﺍﺋﻣًﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺗﻭﺟﻳﻪ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻧﺣﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﻭﻗﻔﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺑﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫˺‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻭﺟﻳﻪ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺻﻕ )‪ (۲‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ‬
‫ﻣﻭﺿﺢ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺗﺳﺗﻘﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻛﺎﻧﻬﺎ ﻣﺻﺩﺭ ًﺓ ﺻﻭﺕ ﻧﻘﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫˻‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫● ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺗﻭﺟﻳﻪ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﻋﻧﺩ‬
‫ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺑﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺟﺎﻩ‬
‫ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺗﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪/ Auto‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫˺‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪C‬‬
‫˻‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺃﻏﻠﻕ ﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺧﻔﺽ ﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء )‪ ،(۱‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻳﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻝ ﻋﻧﺩ‬
‫ﺇﺯﺍﺣﺗﻪ‪ ،‬ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﺳﺗﻘﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﻣﺻﺩﺭً ﺍ ﺻﻭﺕ‬
‫ﻧﻘﺭﺓ )‪.(۲‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫● ﺍﻧﻅﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻟﻣﻌﺎﻳﻧﺔ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﻭﻁﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻠﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﻳﺔ )= ‪.(۲۳‬‬
‫ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫● ﺍﺩﻓﻊ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺗﺳﻣﻊ ﺻﻭﺕ ﻧﻘﺭﺓ‪،‬‬
‫ﺛﻡ ﺣﺭﺭﻫﺎ ﺑﺑﻁء‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺯﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻠﺳﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺗﺎﺑﺔ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﺳﺎﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺭّ ﻙ ﺍﻟﻠﺳﺎﻥ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﺗﺢ )‪.(۱‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﻟﺳﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺗﺎﺑﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‪،‬‬
‫ﺛﻡ ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺑﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺯﻝ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺳﺗﺑﺭﺯ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﻳﻳﻥ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﺣﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ[‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ .‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺣﺩﺩﻫﺎ ﺑﻬﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺧﺻﺎﺋﺹ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻗﻳﺎﻣﻙ ﺑﺈﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪.ON/OFF‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ[‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ]‬
‫ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪.‬‬
‫[]‬
‫[ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ]‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻬﺎء‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺯﻝ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﻓﺗﺢ ﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺳﻬﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫● ﺳﺗﺑﺭﺯ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺯﻣﻧﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻠﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺯﻣﻧﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻠﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱۸‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﻛﻣﻝ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻬﺎء‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺩ ﻅﻬﻭﺭ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﻟﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺫﻟﻙ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪.ON/OFF‬‬
‫● ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﺗﻘﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺯﻣﻧﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻠﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ[‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻛﻝ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ .‬ﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﺣﻳﺣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪/ Auto‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۱۹‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫● ﻟﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﻗﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻳﻔﻲ )ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ(‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ] [ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ،۲‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ] [‪.‬‬
‫[‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ‬
‫[ ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪.[ 2‬‬
‫]‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ] [‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪C‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ،۲‬ﺛﻡ ﻟﻣﺱ ] [] [ ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﻡ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ]‬
‫[‪ .‬ﻭﺑﺎﻟﻣﺛﻝ‪ ،‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﻣﻧﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ،۳‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺯﻣﻧﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]‬
‫[ ﻟﻠﺗﺄﻛﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻏﻳّﺭ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۲‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺳﻡ ”ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ“‬
‫)= ‪ (۱۸‬ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[ ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺗﺗﻣﺗﻊ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻭﻗﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ )ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﻳﺔ(‪ .‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻻﺣﺗﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﺈﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ‪ ۳‬ﺃﺳﺎﺑﻳﻊ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ ﻣﻥ ﻟﺣﻅﺔ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﺷﺣﻥ ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺧﻼﻝ ‪ ٤‬ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺷﺣﻭﻧﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﻣﺣﻭﻝ ‪) AC‬ﻳُﺑﺎﻉ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻝ( ﻣﻊ ﻭﺻﻠﺔ ﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ ) ُﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ‬
‫ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻝ‪ ،(۱٤۸ = ،‬ﺣﺗﻰ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﻧﻔﺎﺩ ﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ[ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﺣﻳﺣﻳﻥ‪ ،‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻣﻭﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ“ )= ‪.(۱۸‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪/ Auto‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻋﺩﺳﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‬
‫ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻋﺩﺳﺎﺕ ‪ .EF-M‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻋﺩﺳﺎﺕ ‪ EF‬ﻭ‪ (۲۱ =) EF-S‬ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ‪.EF-EOS M‬‬
‫ﻏﻳّﺭ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﺯﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺩﺧﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫˺‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫˻‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪C‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ] [] [] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ‬
‫] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻟﻐﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺩ ﺫﻟﻙ‪.‬‬
‫˺‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫˺‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪.[ 2‬‬
‫[ ﻭﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻣﺱ ﻟﻐﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۳‬ﺛﻡ ﻟﻣﺳﻬﺎ ﻣﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪۲۰‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺃﺯﻝ ﻏﻁﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ‪.‬‬
‫˻‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫[ ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﺭ ّﻛﺏ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﻣﺣﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ )ﺍﻟﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺿﺎء( ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺑﻌﺿﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺟﺎﻫﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﺣﺔ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺗﺳﻣﻊ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﺳﺗﻘﺭﺍﺭﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻣﻛﺎﻧﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺃﺯﻝ ﺍﻷﻏﻁﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺃﺯﻝ ﻏﻁﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻭﻏﻁﺎء ﺍﻟﺟﺳﻡ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭﻫﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺟﺎﻫﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﺣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﻌﺩ ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﻣﺣﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﻣﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ‬
‫ﺗﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺑﺎﺗﺟﺎﻩ ] [ ﺑﻳﻧﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺈﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺑﻣﻘﺩﺍﺭ ﺑﺳﻳﻁ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﺢ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺣﺭﺭ‬
‫ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺳﺗﻣﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺗﺳﻣﻊ ﺻﻭﺕ‬
‫ﻧﻘﺭﺓ ﺗﺷﻳﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺟﺎﻫﺯﺓ ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﺗﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺗﺭﺍﺟﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺑﺎﺗﺟﺎﻩ ] [ ﺑﻳﻧﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺈﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ‪ .‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﻣﺣﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺣﺭﺭ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫● ﻟﻠﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺑﺄﺻﺎﺑﻌﻙ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫● ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻧﺕ ﺗﺭﻏﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻡ ﺑﺫﻟﻙ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺿﺑﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ‪ .‬ﻗﺩ ﺗﺅﺩﻱ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺩ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻧﺣﺭﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ‬
‫ﺑﻣﻘﺩﺍﺭ ﺑﺳﻳﻁ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪/ Auto‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫● ﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﺑﻕ ﻏﻁﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪C‬‬
‫ﻓﺻﻝ ﻋﺩﺳﺔ‬
‫● ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫˻‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۲۱‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ )‪ (۱‬ﺑﻳﻧﻣﺎ‬
‫ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺈﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﺢ )‪.(۲‬‬
‫˺‬
‫˼‬
‫● ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺗﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﻛﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺗﻬﺎ ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﺢ )‪.(۳‬‬
‫● ﺭ ّﻛﺏ ﻏﻁﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺗﺭﺑﺔ‬
‫ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻓﻌﻝ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻛﺎﻥ ﻳﺣﺗﻭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻗﻝ ﻗﺩﺭ ﻣﻣﻛﻥ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻷﺗﺭﺑﺔ‪.‬‬‫ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻋﺩﺳﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﺭﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻏﻁﺎء ﺍﻟﺟﺳﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬‫‪ -‬ﺃﺯﻝ ﺍﻷﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻏﻁﺎء ﺍﻟﺟﺳﻡ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺑﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻧﻅﺭً ﺍ ﻷﻥ ﺣﺟﻡ ﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺃﺻﻐﺭ ﻣﻥ ﻓﻳﻠﻡ ‪ ۳٥‬ﻣﻡ‪ ،‬ﻓﻳﺑﺩﻭ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺑُﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻳﺯﻳﺩ‬
‫ﺑﻣﻘﺩﺍﺭ ‪ ۱٫٦‬ﺿﻌ ًﻔﺎ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‪ .‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺑﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺛﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺑُﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ ﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ‪ ٤٥-۱٥‬ﻣﻡ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ ﻣﻛﺎﻓﺊ‬
‫ﻟﺑُﻌﺩ ﺑﺅﺭﻱ ‪ ۷۲-۲٤‬ﻣﻡ ﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ‪ ۳٥‬ﻣﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﻟﺔ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻧﺯﻳﻝ ﺃﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪http://www.canon.com/icpd/‬‬
‫ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻋﺩﺳﺎﺕ ‪ EF‬ﻭ‪EF-S‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻋﺩﺳﺎﺕ ‪ EF‬ﻭ‪ EF-S‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ‪.EF-EOS M‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺯﻝ ﺍﻷﻏﻁﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺃﺯﻝ ﺍﻷﻏﻁﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۲‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺳﻡ‬
‫”ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻋﺩﺳﺔ“ )= ‪.(۲۰‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻋﺩﺳﺔ ‪ ،EF‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﻣﺣﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺋﺭ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺭﺍء( ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺗﺳﺗﻘﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻛﺎﻧﻬﺎ ﻣﺻﺩﺭ ًﺓ ﺻﻭﺕ ﻧﻘﺭﺓ‪،‬‬
‫ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻣﻭﺿﺢ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻬﻡ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻋﺩﺳﺔ ‪ ،EF-S‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﻣﺣﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ )ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺿﺎء( ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺗﺳﺗﻘﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻛﺎﻧﻬﺎ ﻣﺻﺩﺭ ًﺓ‬
‫ﺻﻭﺕ ﻧﻘﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻣﻭﺿﺢ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻬﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫ﺭ ّﻛﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﻣﺣﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ )ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺋﺭ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺿﺎء(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﻭﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ .‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﺣﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﺢ ﺑﺎﻟﺳﻬﻡ‪ ،‬ﺣﺗﻰ ﺗﺳﺗﻘﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻛﺎﻧﻬﺎ ﻣﺻﺩﺭ ًﺓ‬
‫ﺻﻭﺕ ﻧﻘﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪/ Auto‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫●‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫●‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪C‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻋﺩﺳﺔ ﺃﺛﻘﻝ ﻭﺯ ًﻧﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺗﺩﻋﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺎﺕ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺣﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺋﺎﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻁﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﻟﻣﺳﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺣﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻗﺻﻰ ﻟﻣﻌﺩﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺩﻭﺭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺟﺯء ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ )ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ( ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻻ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺟﺯء ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺑﻕ ﻟﻠﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺯﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﺈﻣﻛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺏ ﻓﺎﺋﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﻌﺩﺳﺔ ‪.EF35–80mm f/4–5.6 PZ‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫● ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ‬
‫)ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻣﺭﻛﺑﺔ( ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻣﻭﺿﺢ ﺑﺎﻟﺳﻬﻡ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﻛﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻓﺻﻠﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻛﺱ ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﻳﻧﻣﺎ ﺗﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻷﺳﻔﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻔﺻﻝ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺗﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﻛﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻓﺻﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺭ ّﻛﺏ ﻏﻁﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺻﻭﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪۲۲‬‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻋﺩﺳﺔ ‪ EF‬ﻣﻊ ﻗﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ )ﻣﺛﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺯﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﺈﻣﻛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺏ ﻓﺎﺋﻘﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺻِ ﻝ ﻣﻘﺑﺱ ﻗﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ ًﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺻﻝ ﻋﺩﺳﺔ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻗﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻓﻕ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺑﺱ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺭ ّﻛﺏ ﻗﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻗﺭﺹ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﻟﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻛﺎﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﺈﺣﻛﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺭ ّﻛﺏ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺑﺱ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﻘﺎﻋﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫● ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﺯﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺣﺭﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﺑﺳﻳﻁﺔ‬
‫)ﺍﻻﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ( ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺣﺩﺙ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻠﻌﻠﻡ‪ ،‬ﺗﺣﺗﻭﻱ ﺃﺳﻣﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺯﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻘﻁﻊ ”‪.“IS‬‬
‫● ﺣﺭّ ﻙ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﻣﺛﺑﺕ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ]‪.[ON‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ Auto‬ﻟﻠﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻧﻅﺭ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ ﺫﻛﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺟﺭﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺝ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪/ Auto‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﺛﻡ ﻋﺭﺿﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺗﻭﻓﻳﺭ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻛﺎﻣﻝ ﻟﻺﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣُﺛﻠﻰ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩ ﻣﻌﻳﻧﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻳﻙ ﺳﻭﻯ ﺗﺭﻙ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺗﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻣﺳﺎﻙ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪.ON/OFF‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻭﺍﺿﺣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻣﺳﻙ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺛﺑﺎﺕ ﻟﺗﻘﻠﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺩﺧﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻗﺭﺹ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺭﻣﺯ ﻣﺷﻬﺩ )‪ (۱‬ﻓﻲ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻳﺳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪C‬‬
‫˼‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫˻‬
‫˺‬
‫● ﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺟﺎﻧﺏ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻭﻱ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ )‪(۲‬‬
‫ﻭﻁﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ )‪ (۳‬ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻠﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺗﺷﻳﺭ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺃﻭﺟﻪ ﻣﻠﺗﻘﻁﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺃﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪ ،‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻧﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﺃﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫)‪(۱‬‬
‫ﻟﻑ ﻳﺩﻙ ﺍﻟﻳﻣﻧﻰ ﺣﻭﻝ ﻣﻘﺑﺽ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺛﺑﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫)‪(۲‬‬
‫ﺃﻣﺳﻙ ﺍﻟﺟﺯء ﺍﻟﺳﻔﻠﻲ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺑﻳﺩﻙ ﺍﻟﻳﺳﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫)‪(۳‬‬
‫)‪(٤‬‬
‫)‪(٥‬‬
‫ﺿﻊ ﺇﺻﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺳﺑﺎﺑﺔ ﺑﻳﺩﻙ ﺍﻟﻳﻣﻧﻰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺑﺭﻓﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺩﻓﻊ ﺫﺭﺍﻋﻳﻙ ﻭﻣﺭﻓﻘﻳﻙ ﺑﺭﻓﻕ ﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﻣﻘﺩﻣﺔ ﺟﺳﺩﻙ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺣﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻌﻳﺔ ﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‪ ،‬ﺿﻊ ﺇﺣﺩﻯ ﻗﺩﻣﻳﻙ ﺃﻣﺎﻡ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ ﻗﻠﻳﻼً‪.‬‬
‫˻‬
‫‪۲۳‬‬
‫˺‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﺫﺭ ﺗﻐﻁﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﻛﺭﻭﻓﻭﻧﺎﺕ )‪.(۱‬‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺗﻣﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﻗﺩ ﻳﺿﻲء ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ )‪ (۲‬ﻟﺗﺣﺳﻳﻥ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪ .‬ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﻋﺩﻡ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺃﻱ ﻋﺎﺋﻕ ﺃﻣﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺗﺩﻋﻡ ﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﻓﺄﺩﺭ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣًﺎ ﺃﺻﺎﺑﻌﻙ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫‪ (۱‬ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻝ ﻗﻠﻳﻼً‪ .‬ﺗﺻﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻪ ﻣﺭﺗﻳﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ‬
‫ﺇﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪ AF‬ﻟﻺﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫‪ (۱‬ﺍﺑﺩﺃ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻟﺑﺩء ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‪ .‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ]‪Rec‬‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﺎﻧﺏ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻘﺿﻲ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺃﺷﺭﻁﺔ ﺳﻭﺩﺍء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻓﺗﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺳﻔﻠﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﺷﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺷﺭﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﻭﺩﺍء ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪/ Auto‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫● ﺗﺷﻳﺭ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺃﻭﺟﻪ ﻣﻠﺗﻘﻁﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫● ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺑﺩء ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺇﺻﺑﻌﻙ ﻋﻥ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ (۲‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪C‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۲٤‬‬
‫[‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﻣﻳﺽ ]![ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺣﺭﻳﻙ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ‬
‫] [ ﻟﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ .‬ﻭﺳﻳﻧﻁﻠﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ‬
‫ﻛﻧﺕ ﺗﻔﺿﻝ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺩﻓﻌﻪ ﺑﺈﺻﺑﻌﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻝ ﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪ (۲‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺧﻔﺿﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻧﻁﻠﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺭﻓﻌﻪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺗﻘﻁﺔ ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺗﻳﻥ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺣﺗﻰ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ‪ AF‬ﺑﻠﻭﻥ ﺑﺭﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ] [ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﺗﺳﺗﻁﻊ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻋﻧﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺃﻱ ﺻﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﺣﺗﻰ ﻭﺇﻥ ﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻋﺩﺳﺔ ﺗﺩﻋﻡ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ”ﻣﺛﺑﺕ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻧﺷﻁ“ )= ‪ ،(۷۸‬ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺃﺟﻝ ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﻣﺎ ﺇﻥ ﻳﺑﺩﺃ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪/ Auto‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺩ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﻭﺻﻭﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻋﺭﺿﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫● ﻳﺑﺩﺃ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻵﻥ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺩﺧﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﻼﻧﺗﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻣﻥ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻝ‬
‫)= ‪ ،(۲۸‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺭﺹ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺻﻭﺭً ﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫● ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ] [ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻛﺱ ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻌﺭﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ‬
‫] [ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪C‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻻﺳﺗﻌﺭﺍﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺑﺩء ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻣﺱ ] [‪ .‬ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺣﺏ ﺇﺻﺑﻌﻙ‬
‫ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺳﻔﻝ ﻋﺑﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫● ﻟﻠﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻗﺻﺎﺻﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ]‬
‫ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ] [ ﻻﺳﺗﻌﺭﺍﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﻠﻌﻭﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﻔﺭﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺭﻣﺯ ]‬
‫ﺍﻧﺗﻘﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.۳‬‬
‫‪۲٥‬‬
‫[‪ .‬ﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪،‬‬
‫[ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻧﺗﻬﺎء‬
‫● ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺁﺧﺭ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] []‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫[‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫[‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪/ Auto‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪C‬‬
‫ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺿﺭﻭﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﻣﺳﺣﻬﺎ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‪ .‬ﻛﻥ ﺣﺫﺭً ﺍ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﻷﻧﻪ‬
‫ﻳﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﺍﺳﺗﺭﺩﺍﺩﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﻣﺳﺣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ]‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺩ ﻋﺭﺽ ]ﻣﺳﺢ؟[‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻣﺳﺢ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻵﻥ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺢ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺇﻟﻐﺎء[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻋﺩﺓ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻟﻣﺳﺣﻬﺎ ﺩﻓﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ )= ‪.(۱۰٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۲٦‬‬
‫[‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻣﺱ ]ﻣﺳﺢ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.۲‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪/ Auto‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺯﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻕ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ ﻟﻼﺳﺗﻣﺗﺎﻉ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﺑﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪ ON/OFF‬ﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻻﺳﺗﻌﺩﺍﺩ ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪ON/OFF‬‬
‫ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺗﻙ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﻋﺭﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪C‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻟﻠﺭﺟﻭﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻣﻁ‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫● ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪.ON/OFF‬‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۲۷‬‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻋﺩﺳﺔ ‪ EF-M‬ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﺗﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺑﺎﺗﺟﺎﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻝ ﻟﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﻣﻘﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺿﻭء ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﺻﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺟﺯء ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻟﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﺗﺻﺩﺭ ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺿﻭﺿﺎء ﺑﺳﻳﻁﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻓﺗﺣﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻏﻼﻗﻬﺎ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻠﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪) .‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺳﻣﺎﻉ ﺻﻭﺕ‬
‫ﺑﺳﻳﻁ‪ (.‬ﺑﻌﺩ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ ]‬
‫[ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ‪ .‬ﻗﺩ ﻻ‬
‫ﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ ]‬
‫[ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﻟﻔﺗﺭﺓ ﺯﻣﻧﻳﺔ ﻭﺟﻳﺯﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﻼﻧﺗﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻣﻥ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻝ‬
‫)= ‪ ،(۲۸‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺭﺹ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪/ Auto‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪C‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻣﻳﺯﺍﺕ ﺗﻭﻓﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ )ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬
‫ﻛﻭﺳﻳﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺣﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺈﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ )ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ( ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺫﺍﺗﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﺩ ﻣﺩﺓ ﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ ﻣﻥ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻧﺷﺎﻁ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻭﻓﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ ﻣﻥ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻧﺷﺎﻁ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﻌﺩ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺑﺣﻭﺍﻟﻲ ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺗﻳﻥ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪ .‬ﻟﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺍﻻﺳﺗﻌﺩﺍﺩ ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﻟﻛﻥ ﻣﻊ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻣﺅﺷﺭ )ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻲ(‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ )= ‪.(۲۸‬‬
‫ﺗﻭﻓﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﺃﻭﻻً ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻝ‬
‫ﻗﻠﻳﻼً‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻳﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻭﺻﻑ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪) .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻗﻠﻳﻼً ﻟﻠﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪(.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪ .‬ﺗﺻﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺻﻭﺕ‬
‫ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻪ ﻣﺭﺗﻳﻥ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺣﻭﻝ ﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺧﻣﺱ ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻕ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ ﻣﻥ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻧﺷﺎﻁ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺯﺓ ”ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ“ ﻭﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻔﺗﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺯﻣﻧﻳﺔ ﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ”ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ“ ﺇﺫﺍ‬
‫ﻛﻧﺕ ﺗﻔﺿﻝ ﺫﻟﻙ )= ‪.(۱٤۰‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﻣﻳﺯﺓ ”ﺗﻭﻓﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ“ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺄﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻋﺑﺭ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫)= ‪ (۱۱٥‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ )= ‪.(۱٥۹‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ‪) .‬ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺟﺯﺋﻲ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪(.‬‬
‫● ﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۲۸‬‬
‫● ﻗﺩ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺻﻭﺩ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﺃﻭﻻً ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪LCD‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻗﺭﺹ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻟﻠﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﻝ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺍﺗﺟﺎﻫﻬﺎ ﻟﻳﻧﺎﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻬﺩ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻠﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫)‪(۱‬‬
‫)‪(٤‬‬
‫ﺇﻣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻸﺳﻔﻝ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪/ Auto‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫)‪(٥‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫)‪(٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫)‪(۱‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ Auto‬ﻟﻠﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻧﻅﺭ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ ﺫﻛﻲ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ )= ‪.(۳۷ = ،۳٥‬‬
‫)‪(۲‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﺇﺑﺩﺍﻋﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﺗﺎﺋﺞ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺑﺔ ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺳﻬﻭﻟﺔ‪ .‬ﻛﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﻧﺗﺎﺋﺞ ﻭﺗﺣﻣﻳﻠﻬﺎ‬
‫)= ‪.(٤۸‬‬
‫)‪(۳‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻬﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺛﻠﻰ ﻟﻠﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ )= ‪.(٥۱‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪C‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫● ﺍﺳﺣﺏ ﺍﻟﺟﺯء ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻭﻱ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻷﺳﻔﻝ ﺗﺟﺎﻫﻙ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺇﻣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻷﺳﻔﻝ ﺑﻣﺎ ﻳﺻﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٤٥‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫)‪(۲‬‬
‫)‪(۳‬‬
‫ﻭ‬
‫)‪(٤‬‬
‫ﻭ‬
‫ﻭ‬
‫ﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ‬
‫ﻻﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺿﻠﺔ ﻟﺩﻳﻙ )= ‪،٦۰‬‬
‫= ‪.(۹۰ = ،۸٤ = ،۸۳ = ،۸۲‬‬
‫)‪(٥‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ )= ‪ .(۸٦ = ،٥۷‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ‬
‫ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻗﺭﺹ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﺑﺑﺳﺎﻁﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫)‪(٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﻣﺭﺷﺣﺎﺕ ﺇﺑﺩﺍﻋﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﻣﺗﻧﻭﻋﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ )= ‪.(٥۲‬‬
‫ﺇﻣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻸﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫● ﺍﺳﺣﺏ ﺍﻟﺟﺎﻧﺏ ﺍﻟﺳﻔﻠﻲ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻸﻣﺎﻡ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺗﺻﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺻﻭﺕ ﻧﻘﺭﺓ )‪ ،(۱‬ﻭﺣﺭّ ﻙ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻷﺳﻔﻝ )‪ ،(۲‬ﺛﻡ ﻗﻡ‬
‫ﺑﺈﺩﺍﺭﺗﻬﺎ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ )‪.(۳‬‬
‫˼‬
‫˻‬
‫˺‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﻗﺭﺹ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻟﻠﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻣﻥ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﺭﻏﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻣﻥ ﻣﻘﺩﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫‪ LCD‬ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺟﺎﻧﺏ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺗﻡ‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﻌﻛﻭﺳﺔ ﻟﻠﻣﺷﻬﺩ )ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺑﻣﻘﺩﺍﺭ‬
‫‪ ۱۸۰‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﺃﺳﻲ(‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻬﺎء ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻷﺳﻔﻝ )‪ ،(۱‬ﺛﻡ ﺣﺭﻛﻬﺎ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺑﻳﻧﻣﺎ ﺗﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺗﺻﺩﺭ ﺻﻭﺕ ﻧﻘﺭﺓ )‪.(۲‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫˺‬
‫˻‬
‫‪۲۹‬‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺇﻣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻣﺎ ﻳﺻﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ۱۸۰‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪/ Auto‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪C‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۳۰‬‬
‫● ﺍﺣﺭﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﺗﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﻓﺗﺢ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺯﻭﺍﻳﺎ ﺃﻛﺑﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﺣﺔ؛ ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻔﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﻧﺗﻘﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ )= ‪ ،(۳۲‬ﻭﺍﺿﺑﻁ ]ﻋﺭﺽ ﻋﻛﺳﻲ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ‬
‫]‪ [ 1‬ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻧﻌﻛﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫[ ﻟﻠﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺑﻳﻥ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﻁ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺑﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪ [ 1‬ﺿﻣﻥ ]ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ[ )= ‪.(۸۷‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻳﻠﻲ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﻣﻧﺧﻔﺿﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﻣﺎ ﻳﺟﻌﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺳﻬﻝ ﻣﺭﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﻛﻳﻔﻳﺔ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﻻ ﻳﺗﻁﺎﺑﻕ ﺳﻁﻭﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻅ ﺃﻥ ﺃﻱ ﺗﺷﻭﻳﺵ ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺣﺭﻙ ﻣﺗﻘﻁﻊ ﻟﻠﻬﺩﻑ ﻟﻥ ﻳﺅﺛﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ“ )= ‪.(۹٥‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻳﻊ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫)ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻳﻊ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﺗﻛﺭﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‬
‫ﻻﺣﻅ ﺃﻥ ﻋﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﻭﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺗﻬﺎ ﺗﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ )= ‪ (۱۷۹‬ﺃﻭ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ )= ‪.(۱۸۸‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪/ Auto‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺱ ﻟﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺃﺣﺩ ﻋﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪C‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ )‪ (۲‬ﻓﻲ ﺃﺳﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫[]‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺩ ﻋﻧﺎﺻﺭ‬
‫˺‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ] [ ﻣﻥ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﺣﺎﻟﻳًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻟﻼﻧﺗﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺭﻣﺯ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۳۱‬‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻳﻊ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻳﻣﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻔﺗﺢ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻅﺎﻫﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻼﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻓﻳﻣﺎ ﺑﻳﻧﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺻﻳﻥ‬
‫[] [ ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫]‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻗﺑﻝ ﻗﻳﺎﻣﻙ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۱‬ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻗﻣﺕ‬
‫ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺗﻪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺃﻳﺔ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﺭﺿﻳﺔ ﻟﻺﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺳﺗﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ )= ‪.(۱٤٥‬‬
‫● ﺣﺩﺩ ] [ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ )‪.(۱‬‬
‫˻‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﻛﻣﻝ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺭﻣﺯ‬
‫[ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻣﺱ ]‬
‫]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ ﻣﻥ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪/ Auto‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪C‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫˻‬
‫˺‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫● ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ‬
‫] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ] [ ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺧﻳﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫[ ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ‬
‫● ﻳﻭﺟﺩ ﻧﻭﻋﺎﻥ ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ‪ :‬ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻅﺎﻡ )‪ (۱‬ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺗﺑﻁﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ] [ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ] [‬
‫ﻭﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ] [‪ ،‬ﻭﻏﻳﺭ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺍﻟﻣﺯﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﻭﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﺭﺩﻳﺔ )‪ (۲‬ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺿﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻅﺎﻡ‪ .‬ﻳُﺷﻳﺭ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺫﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻋﻳﻥ ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ﻣﻌًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﺹ )ﻣﺛﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ "]‪.("[ 1‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺃﺣﺩ ﻋﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ]‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺩ ﻋﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫‪۳۲‬‬
‫[‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺯﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻅﺎﻫﺭﺓ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﺃﻭﻻً ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﻟﻠﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ] [‬
‫ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻋﻧﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﻠﻌﻭﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﻛﻣﻝ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻬﺎء‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﺧﻳﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ]‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺃﺳﻳﺔ ﻟﻼﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ] [‬
‫ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻟﻠﺭﺟﻭﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ‬
‫[ ﻟﻠﻌﻭﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ ﻗﺑﻝ ﻗﻳﺎﻣﻙ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.۱‬‬
‫● ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺃﻳﺔ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﺭﺿﻳﺔ ﻟﻺﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺳﺗﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫)= ‪.(۱٤٥‬‬
‫● ﺗﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﻋﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ )= ‪.(۱۸۸ = – ۱۸۱‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺳﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﻅﺎﻫﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫[ ﻟﻠﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺇﺣﺩﻯ‬
‫● ﻟﻠﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻧﻅﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻧﺗﻘﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﻪ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪/ Auto‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻬﺎء‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻟﻠﺭﺟﻭﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﻋﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻻ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺗﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺃﻭﻻً ﻋﻧﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﻟﻠﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﻌﻭﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﻟﻣﺱ ﻋﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ )ﻣﺛﻝ ﻣﺭﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺧﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻧﺻﻭﺹ( ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ‬
‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻧﺹ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻣﺱ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﻅﺎﻫﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪C‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻣﺗﻊ ﺯﺭﺍ ]‬
‫[ ﻭ]‬
‫[ ﺍﻟﻅﺎﻫﺭﺍﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﻧﻔﺱ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ]‬
‫● ﻟﻠﺧﺭﻭﺝ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻭ]‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﻅﺎﻫﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﺗﺻﺎﻻﺕ ‪.(۱۱٥ =) Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻻﺣﻅ ﺃﻥ ﻁﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻭﻧﻭﻋﻬﺎ ﻳﺧﺗﻠﻔﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﺧﺗﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫˺‬
‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﻭﻑ‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﻭﻑ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﻣﻘﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ )‪ (۱‬ﺑﺎﺧﺗﻼﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﺭﻳﻙ ﺍﻟﻣﺅﺷﺭ‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]‬
‫[]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻓﻭﺍﺻﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﻁﺭ‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ] [ ﻟﻠﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺭﻣﻭﺯ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ] [ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺃﺣﺭﻑ ﻛﺑﻳﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺗﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﺧﺗﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺫﻑ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﻭﻑ‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]‬
‫[ ﻟﺣﺫﻑ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﻑ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﻳﺩ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻭﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]‬
‫‪۳۳‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ] [] [] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ] [ ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﻭﻑ ﻭﺍﻟﺭﻣﻭﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﻟﻺﺩﺧﺎﻝ‪ .‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ]‬
‫[ ﻟﻼﻧﺗﻘﺎﻝ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﻭﻑ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[ ﻟﻠﻌﻭﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺅﺷﺭ‬
‫ﻳﺿﻲء ﺍﻟﻣﺅﺷﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺟﺯء ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻲ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ )= ‪ (۳‬ﺃﻭ ﻳﻭﻣﺽ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪/ Auto‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪C‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۳٤‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺅﺷﺭ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﺗﺻﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ )= ‪ (۱٥۹‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ )= ‪،۲۸‬‬
‫= ‪(۱٤۰ = ،۱۳۹‬‬
‫ﺃﺧﺿﺭ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻣﺽ‬
‫ﺑﺩء ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‪/‬ﻗﺭﺍءﺓ‪/‬ﻧﻘﻝ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﻁﻭﻳﻠﺔ )= ‪ ،(۸٤ = ،۸۲‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﺗﺻﻠﺔ‪/‬ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺎﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻋﺑﺭ‬
‫ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﻭﻣﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺅﺷﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﺿﺭ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻡ ﻣﻁﻠ ًﻘﺎ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻓﺗﺢ ﻏﻁﺎء‬
‫ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻫﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﻛﻬﺎ؛ ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪/ Auto‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪C‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ / Auto‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﻣﻼﺋﻡ ﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺳﻬﻠﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺃﻛﺑﺭ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺣﺩﺩﻫﺎ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻟﺗﻭﻓﻳﺭ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻛﺎﻣﻝ ﻟﻺﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣُﺛﻠﻰ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩ ﻣﻌﻳﻧﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻳﻙ ﺳﻭﻯ ﺗﺭﻙ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺗﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ )ﻣﻧﻅﺭ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ ﺫﻛﻲ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪.ON/OFF‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺩﺧﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻗﺭﺹ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺭﻣﺯ ﻣﺷﻬﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻳﺳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ )= ‪.(۳۹‬‬
‫● ﺗﺷﻳﺭ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺃﻱ ﻭﺟﻭﻩ ﻭﺃﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﻳﺗﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻓﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻧﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺗﺩﻋﻡ ﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﻓﺄﺩﺭ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣًﺎ ﺃﺻﺎﺑﻌﻙ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪۳٥‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫‪ (۱‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪ .‬ﺗﺻﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺻﻭﺕ‬
‫ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻪ ﻣﺭﺗﻳﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺇﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪AF‬‬
‫ﻟﻺﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫‪ (۱‬ﺍﺑﺩﺃ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ .‬ﻳﺑﺩﺃ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ‬
‫]‪ [ Rec‬ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻘﺿﻲ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺗﺷﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺷﺭﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﻭﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺣﻭﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺳﻔﻠﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺟﺯﺍء ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ‬
‫ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪/ Auto‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫● ﺗﺷﻳﺭ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺃﻭﺟﻪ ﻣﻠﺗﻘﻁﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫● ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺑﺩء ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺇﺻﺑﻌﻙ ﻋﻥ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪ (۲‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﺯﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪C‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۳٦‬‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﻣﻳﺽ ]![ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺣﺭﻳﻙ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ‬
‫] [ ﻟﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ .‬ﻭﺳﻳﻧﻁﻠﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ‬
‫ﻛﻧﺕ ﺗﻔﺿﻝ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺩﻓﻌﻪ ﺑﺈﺻﺑﻌﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻝ ﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪ (۲‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺧﻔﺿﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻧﻁﻠﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺭﻓﻌﻪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺗﻘﻁﺔ ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺗﻳﻥ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺣﺗﻰ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‪ ،‬ﻛﺭﺭ ﺍﻹﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.۳‬‬
‫ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻻﺣﻅ ﺃﻥ ﺻﻭﺕ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻠﻪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻭﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ (۳‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻣﺗﻼء ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫●‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪/ Auto‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪C‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۳۷‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻓﻳﻠﻡ ﻗﺻﻳﺭ ﻷﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﻳﺎﻡ ﻓﻘﻁ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻣﻘﺎﻁﻊ‬
‫ﺛﻭﺍﻥ ﻗﺑﻝ ﻛﻝ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﻌﺩﺋ ٍﺫ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺩﻣﺟﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻠﺧﺹ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩ ﻣﺩﺗﻬﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺗﻳﻥ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪٤‬‬
‫ٍ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺩﺧﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ]‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۲‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺳﻡ ”ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ )ﻣﻧﻅﺭ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ ﺫﻛﻲ(“‬
‫)= ‪ ،(۳٥‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺗﻳﻥ ‪ ۳‬ﻭ‪ ٤‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺳﻡ ”ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ )ﻣﻧﻅﺭ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ‬
‫ﺫﻛﻲ(“ )= ‪ (۳٥‬ﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺯﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﻣﻠﺧﺻﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺭﺍﺋﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ‬
‫ﺑﺗﻭﺟﻳﻪ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻧﺣﻭ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ﺃﺭﺑﻊ‬
‫ﺛﻭﺍﻥ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫ٍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ٤‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺳﻡ ”ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ )ﻣﻧﻅﺭ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ ﺫﻛﻲ(“‬
‫)= ‪ (۳٦‬ﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻛﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ﻭﻣﻠﺧﺻﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ .‬ﻳُﺷﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﻁﻊ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﻧﺗﻬﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ‪ ،‬ﺟﺯءًﺍ ﻭﺍﺣ ًﺩﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻠﺧﺹ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‪.‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻷﻥ ﻣﻠﺧﺻﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻠﻬﺎ‬
‫● ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻋﻣﺭ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺃﻗﺻﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ]‬
‫ﻟﻛﻝ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﺩ ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻣﻠﺧﺹ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ ًﺓ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ]‬
‫[ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﻁﺭﻕ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺻﻭﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻻﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺣﺩﺙ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻠﺧﺹ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫[ )ﻓﻲ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫[ )ﻓﻲ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ‪ (NTSC‬ﺃﻭ ]‬
‫ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻣﻠﺧﺹ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻫﻲ ]‬
‫‪ .(PAL‬ﻳﻌﺗﻣﺩ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﺩﻳﻭ )= ‪.(۱۳۹‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺻﻭﺍﺕ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺣﻔﻅ ﻣﻠﺧﺻﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻛﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻳﻭﻡ ﺫﺍﺗﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺣﺟﻡ ﻣﻠﻑ ﻣﻠﺧﺹ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٤‬ﺟﻳﺟﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺕ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﺟﻣﺎﻟﻲ ﻭﻗﺕ‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ۱۳‬ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ ﻭ‪ ۲۰‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ ﻣﻠﺧﺹ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻣﺣﻣﻲ )= ‪.(۱۰۲‬‬‫ ﺗﺗﻐﻳﺭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﻗﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻳﻔﻲ )= ‪ (۱۸‬ﺃﻭ ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﺩﻳﻭ )= ‪ (۱۳۹‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ‬‫ﺍﻟﺯﻣﻧﻳﺔ )= ‪ (۱٤۱‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻘﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻊ )= ‪.(۱٤٤‬‬
‫ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺇﻧﺷﺎء ﻣﺟﻠﺩ ﺟﺩﻳﺩ )= ‪.(۱۳۷‬‬‫ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺃﺻﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺳﺣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻧﺕ ﺗﻔﺿﻝ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻣﻠﺧﺻﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻣﺳﺑ ًﻘﺎ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ‬
‫‪ < (۳۲ =) MENU‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪] < [ 4‬ﻧﻭﻉ ﻣﻠﺧﺹ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ[ < ]ﺑﻼ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ[‬
‫)= ‪.(۳۲‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺟﺯﺍء ﺍﻟﻔﺭﺩﻳﺔ )= ‪.(۱۱٤‬‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻣﻠﺧﺹ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﻌﺭﺽ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ] [ ﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻣﻠﺧﺹ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﻡ ﺇﻧﺷﺎﺅﻩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻳﻭﻡ ﻧﻔﺳﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ‬
‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻣﻠﺧﺹ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﺩ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻠﻪ )= ‪.(۹٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻟﻥ‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﺗﺻﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﺻﻭﺍ ًﺗﺎ ﺑﻌﺩﻫﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﺃﺻﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ‬
‫]‬
‫[ ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺻﻔﻳﺭ[ ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪ ،[ 3‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ]‪[o][p‬‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫●‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪/ Auto‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫●‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫●‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪C‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫●‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ‪ AF‬ﺑﻠﻭﻥ ﺑﺭﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ] [ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﺗﺳﺗﻁﻊ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻋﻧﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺃﻱ ﺻﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﺣﺗﻰ ﻭﺇﻥ ﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﺃﻱ ﺃﺷﺧﺎﺹ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻫﺩﺍﻑ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﻣﻌﺗﻣًﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺩﻡ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ‬
‫ﺗﺑﺎﻳﻥ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺷﺩﻳﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﻳﺳﺗﻐﺭﻕ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ ﻭﻗ ًﺗﺎ ﺃﻁﻭﻝ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺭﺑﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﺿﺑﻁﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻘﻭﻡ ﺭﻣﺯ ] [ ﻭﺍﻣﺽ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺣﺫﻳﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺍﺣﺗﻣﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﺗﺷﻭﻳﺵ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺳﺑﺏ ﺍﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺗﺧﺫ ﺗﺩﺍﺑﻳﺭ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻟﻠﺣﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺛﺎﺑﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺩﺍﻛﻧﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺭﻏﻡ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻧﻁﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻡ ﺑﺎﻻﻗﺗﺭﺍﺏ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺣﻭﻝ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ“ )= ‪.(۱۹٦‬‬
‫ﻟﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺭﺍء ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﻳﺿﻲء ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ‬
‫ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺧﻔﺿﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻧﻁﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﻳﺣﺩﺙ ﺗﻅﻠﻳﻝ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺭﻣﺯ ] [ ﻭﺍﻣﺽ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻣﺣﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﻟﻳﺷﻳﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﺗﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻬﺎء ﻣﻥ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺷﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺋﻧﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻌﺩﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﻟﺫﺍ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ ﻭﺍﻧﺗﻅﺭ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭﻩ ﻭﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻳﻪ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺭﻏﻡ ﻣﻥ ﺇﻣﻛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻗﺑﻝ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﺗﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻭﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﻭﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۳۸‬‬
‫● ﻳﺣﺩﺙ ﺗﻅﻠﻳﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭﺓ ﻭﻗﺑﻝ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻔﻭﻅﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻣﺩﺓ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ )= ‪.(٤۷‬‬
‫● ﻗﺩ ﺗﺭﺗﻔﻊ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺟﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﺗﻛﺭﺭ ﻟﻔﺗﺭﺓ ﻣﻣﺗﺩﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻟﻛﻥ ﻻ ﻳﺷﻳﺭ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺃﺻﺎﺑﻌﻙ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﻛﺭﻭﻓﻭﻥ )‪ (۱‬ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ .‬ﻗﺩ ﻳﻣﻧﻊ ﺣﺟﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﻛﺭﻭﻓﻭﻥ‬
‫ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﺳﺑﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺧﻔﺕ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫˺‬
‫● ﺗﺟﻧﺏ ﻟﻣﺱ ﺃﻱ ﻋﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺧﻼﻑ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﻋﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺱ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ .‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺻﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ .‬ﻳﻭﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻋﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺱ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺻﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻋﻥ‬
‫ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﻳﻛﺭﻭﻓﻭﻥ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ )ﻳُﺑﺎﻉ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻝ( )= ‪.(۱٥۷‬‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺗﺩﻋﻡ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ”ﻣﺛﺑﺕ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻧﺷﻁ“ )= ‪ ،(۷۸‬ﺗﺗﻐﻳﺭ ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﻋﺭﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺑﺩء ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻟﻠﺳﻣﺎﺡ ﺑﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ‬
‫ﻣﻠﺣﻭﻅ‪ .‬ﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺑﺎﻟﺣﺟﻡ ﺫﺍﺗﻪ ﺍﻟﻅﺎﻫﺭ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫)= ‪.(۷۸‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫●‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫●‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪/ Auto‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﺑﺻﻳﻐﺔ ﺍﺳﺗﺭﻳﻭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺩ ﻳﺳﺎﻋﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﻳﻛﺭﻭﻓﻭﻥ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ )ﻳُﺑﺎﻉ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻝ( ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺣﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺃﺻﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻫﺫﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻧﺕ ﻻ ﺗﺭﻏﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻧﺗﻘﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ )= ‪ ،(۳۲‬ﻭﺣﺩﺩ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ‬
‫]‪ [ 5‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ]ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺻﻭﺕ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺗﻘﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ )= ‪ ،(۳۲‬ﻭﺣﺩﺩ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪ ،[ 5‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ]‪[Movie Servo AF‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ[ ﻟﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻓﻳﻠﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻘﺳﻳﻡ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺷﻐﻝ ﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ‪ ٤‬ﺟﻳﺟﺎﺑﺎﻳﺕ‪ ،‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻣﻧﻔﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺩﺓ‬
‫ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﺗﻭﻣﺽ ﻣﺩﺓ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ‪ ۳۰‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺻﻝ ﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٤‬ﺟﻳﺟﺎﺑﺎﻳﺕ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﺗﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺗﺟﺎﻭﺯ ﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ‪ ٤‬ﺟﻳﺟﺎﺑﺎﻳﺕ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﺑﺈﻧﺷﺎء ﻣﻠﻑ ﻓﻳﻠﻡ ﺟﺩﻳﺩ ﻭﻳﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ .‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺳﻣﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﺗﺳﻠﺳﻝ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻳﻠﺯﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻛﻝ ﻓﻳﻠﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻣﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﺷﺧﺎﺹ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫ﺃﺷﺧﺎﺹ‬
‫ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺣﺭﻛﺔ‬
‫ﺳﺎﻁﻌﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻭﻥ ﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ‬
‫ﺭﻣﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﻭﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺣﺗﻭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻣﺎء ﺻﺎﻓﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺃﺯﺭﻕ ﻓﺎﺗﺢ‬
‫ﺳﻣﺎء ﺯﺭﻗﺎء ﻭﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻛﺷﺎﻓﺎﺕ ﺿﻭﺋﻳﺔ‬
‫‪۳۹‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁﻳﻥ ] [ ﻭ] [‪ ،‬ﺗﺗﻡ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺭﻣﺯ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺽ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺗﻡ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻭﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﻭﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﻣﺛﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﻏﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺑﺷﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺣﺭﻛﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ‬
‫ﻗﺭﻳﺏ‬
‫ﺳﺎﻁﻌﺔ‬
‫–‬
‫ﻣﻌﺗﻣﺔ‬
‫–‬
‫ﻣﻌﺗﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ‬
‫–‬
‫ﺃﺯﺭﻕ ﻏﺎﻣﻕ‬
‫ﻟﻭﻥ ﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ‬
‫ﺭﻣﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﻭﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺣﺗﻭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻣﺎء ﺻﺎﻓﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺃﺯﺭﻕ ﻓﺎﺗﺢ‬
‫ﺳﻣﺎء ﺯﺭﻗﺎء ﻭﺇﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻏﺭﻭﺏ ﺍﻟﺷﻣﺱ‬
‫–‬
‫ﻛﺷﺎﻓﺎﺕ ﺿﻭﺋﻳﺔ‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫ﻣﻌﺗﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪C‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺑﺷﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻌﺗﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ‬
‫ﺑﺭﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ‬
‫ﺃﺯﺭﻕ ﻏﺎﻣﻕ‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺭﻣﻭﺯ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ”ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺣﺭﻛﺔ“ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ )= ‪ (٤۰‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ‬
‫] [ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻳﻠﻡ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺭﻣﻭﺯ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﻳﻥ ”ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﺷﺧﺎﺹ“ ﻭ”ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺣﺭﻛﺔ“ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻋﺩﺳﺔ ﻻ ﺗﺗﻣﺗﻊ ﺑﺈﻣﻛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ] [ )= ‪ (٦۰‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺭﻣﺯ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻬﺩ ﻻ ﻳﺗﻁﺎﺑﻕ ﻣﻊ ﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﻗﻊ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪/ Auto‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺯﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺋﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻼﺋﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺇﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺗﻭﺟﻳﻪ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺇﻟﻳﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﺃﺑﻳﺽ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ )ﺃﻭ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺷﺧﺹ( ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻟﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻲ‪ .‬ﻳﺗﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ ﺃﻫﺩﺍ ًﻓﺎ ﻣﺗﺣﺭﻛﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﻟﻠﻣﺣﺎﻓﻅﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺟﻭﺩﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ ﻟﻠﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪ .‬ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﺿﺭ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﺗﺳﺗﻁﻊ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫● ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ] [ )= ‪ (٦۰‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺇﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ‬
‫ﺇﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺇﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺎﺑﻬﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ] [ )= ‪.(۳۱‬‬
‫[ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫● ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺍﻛﺗﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ]ﺑﺩﻝ ‪ AF‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ[ ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪ [ 4‬ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺭﻣﻭﺯ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ”ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺣﺭﻛﺔ“ )= ‪ .(۳۹‬ﻳﺗﻡ‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ]ﺑﺩﻝ ‪ AF‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ[ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ[ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ )= ‪ (٤۰‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺁﺧﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪٤۰‬‬
‫● ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ]‬
‫ﻭﺗﺩﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻣﻁ ‪ AF‬ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻣﺱ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺿﻣﻳﻥ ﻧﻔﺳﻙ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺗﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‪ .‬ﺳﺗﻘﻭﻡ‬
‫ﺛﻭﺍﻥ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﻌﺩ ‪۱۰‬‬
‫ٍ‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ] [‪،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺻﻑ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﻣﺗﺣﺭﻙ‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﺳﻳﺗﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ‪ ،‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﺗﺗﻡ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻭﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ )ﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺍﻟﺩﺧﻭﻝ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﺿﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ‪ AF‬ﺑﻠﻭﻥ ﺑﺭﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ]‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪C‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫[‪،‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‪ :‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ ﻟﻠﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻳﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﻸﻓﻼﻡ‪ :‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫● ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺑﺩء ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﻭﻣﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ ﻭﺗﻘﻭﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺻﻭﺕ ﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫● ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺛﺎﻧﻳﺗﻳﻥ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺭﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻭﻣﻳﺽ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ‪) .‬ﻳﻅﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ ﻣﺿﻳ ًﺋﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻧﻁﻼﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪(.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪/ Auto‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ )ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻣﺱ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫● ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻﺳﺗﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬
‫[ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.۱‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻣﺱ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻣﺱ[‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ[ )= ‪.(۳۲‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺄﺧﻳﺭ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺗﻳﻥ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺳﺗﻘﺭﺓ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻥ ﻳﺅﺛﺭ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪C‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۱‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ“ )= ‪(٤۰‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫● ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺍﻛﺗﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۲‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ“ )= ‪(٤۰‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺑﺩﻻً ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺑﺳﻬﻭﻟﺔ ﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺇﺻﺑﻌﻙ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ .‬ﺳﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﻭﺿﺑﻁ ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪1‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ ﻟﻣﻧﻊ ﺍﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻻﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻣﺱ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ[ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.۱‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪٤۱‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺣﻭﻝ ﻟﻭﻥ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ‪ AF‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻱ ﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺣﺗﻰ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻣﺱ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ‬
‫●‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪/ Auto‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ] [‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﺗﻔﻅ ﺑﺿﻐﻁ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﻋﻥ ﺁﺧﺭﻩ ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ“‬
‫)= ‪.(۱۹۲‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ] [ )= ‪.(۳۱‬‬
‫[ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫● ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺍﻛﺗﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ]‬
‫●‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪٤۲‬‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪C‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺣﺗﻔﻅ ﺑﺿﻐﻁ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﻋﻥ ﺁﺧﺭﻩ ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﺿﻭﺋﻲ ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﻊ‪/‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ )= ‪.(٤۰‬‬
‫ﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻟﻠﺣﻅﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﺑﺎﻁﺄ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻭﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻧﺧﻔﺽ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﺯﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺩ ﻳﺣﺩﺙ ﺗﺄﺧﻳﺭ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ‪ ،‬ﻗﺑﻝ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪ ،‬ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﻭﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺩ ﺗﻧﺧﻔﺽ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻧﻁﻠﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻣﺱ )= ‪ ،(٤۱‬ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﻟﻣﺱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﺗﻐﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﺿﻭﺋﻲ ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ‪ ،‬ﺑﻌﺩ‬
‫ﺃﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻗﻳﻣﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﺩ ﺗﺑﺩﻭ‬
‫ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪ .‬ﻛﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﺗﺑﺩﻭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﺇﻋﺗﺎﻣًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﻗﻳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ )ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ( ﻳﺗﺭﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﻳﻥ ‪ ۱‬ﻭ‪،۹‬‬
‫ﻓﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺑﻘﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻳﻣﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻹﺟﻣﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺑﻘﻳﺔ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ )= ‪ .(۱۷٤‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺑﺈﻣﻛﺎﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ‪ ۱۰‬ﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﺗﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﺩ ﻳﻘﻝ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻣﺷﻬﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺩﻗﺔ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺟﺩﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ ﻛﺩﻟﻳﻝ )ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ‪.(3:2‬‬
‫ﻣﻳﺯﺍﺕ ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺣﺟﻡ ‪ ٤۲۰) A2‬ﻣﻡ ‪ ٥۹٤ x‬ﻣﻡ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪/ Auto‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪C‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺣﺟﻡ ‪ ۲۹۷) A3‬ﻣﻡ ‪ ٤۲۰ x‬ﻣﻡ(‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻓﻳﻠﻡ‬
‫ﺣﺟﻡ ‪ ۲۱۰) A4‬ﻣﻡ ‪ ۲۹۷ x‬ﻣﻡ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺩﻗﺔ )ﺣﺟﻡ( ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣُﺳﺟﻠﺔ ﻭﺟﻭﺩﺗﻬﺎ )ﻣﻌﺩﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ( ﻣﻥ ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﻣﻥ ‪ ۸‬ﺃﻧﻭﺍﻉ‪ .‬ﻛﺫﻟﻙ‪،‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻧﺕ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ ‪ (٤۳ =) RAW‬ﺃﻡ ﻻ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻭﺟﻳﻬﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺣﻭﻝ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﻟﻛﻝ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻼﺋﻡ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﻟﻛﻝ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ“ )= ‪.(۱۹٥‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ] [ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺣﺩﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ )=‪.(۳۱‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺗﻪ ﺣﻳﻧﺋﺫٍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺈﻣﻛﺎﻥ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻧﺳﻳﻘﻳﻥ ‪ JPEG‬ﻭ‪.RAW‬‬
‫ﺻﻭﺭ ‪RAW‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪٤۳‬‬
‫ﺣﻔﻅ ﺻﻭﺭ ‪RAW‬‬
‫● ﻻﺳﺗﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻛﺭﺍﺭ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﻟﻛﻥ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻳﺩ ﺍﻹﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻲ ﻭﺍﻷﻏﺭﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻣﺎﺛﻠﺔ‬
‫ﺻﻭﺭ ‪JPEG‬‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫‪ ۱۳۰ x ۹۰‬ﻣﻡ‪ ۱۸۰ x ۱۳۰ ،‬ﻣﻡ‪ ،‬ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺭﻳﺩﻳﺔ‬
‫● ﻳﺷﻳﺭ ] [ ﻭ] [ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻧﺎﺗﺟﺔ ﻋﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﻌﺩﻻﺕ‬
‫ﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﺗﺑﺎﻳﻧﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺩﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﺗﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳﻭﻓﺭ ] [ ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺃﻓﺿﻝ ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﺃﻣﺎ ]‬
‫ﻓﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺃﻗﻝ ﻗﻠﻳﻼً ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻛﻧﻪ ﻳﺗﻳﺢ ﻟﻙ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺃﻛﺑﺭ ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪ .‬ﻳﻭﻓﺭ ] [ ﻭ] [ ﺻﻭﺭً ﺍ ﺑﺟﻭﺩﺓ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺗﺎﺡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫[‪،‬‬
‫ﺗﺗﻡ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻓﺿﻝ ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻛﻣﺎ‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺿﻐﻁﻬﺎ ﻟﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﻋﻥ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ‪ ،‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺻﻠﻬﺎ؛ ﻭﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺎﻟﺟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﺗﺅﺩﻱ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻓﻘﺩ ﻗﺩﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺑﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ”ﺧﺎﻡ“ )ﻟﻡ ﺗﺗﻡ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺟﺗﻬﺎ( ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﻓﻘﺩ ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﺳﺑﺏ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ .‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﺭﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺟﺏ ﻋﻠﻳﻙ ﺃﻭﻻً ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻣﻥ )‪Digital Photo‬‬
‫‪ (۱٥۸ =) (Professional‬ﻟﺗﺣﻭﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪ JPEG‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫‪ TIFF‬ﻋﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﻊ ﺃﺩﻧﻰ ﻓﻘﺩ ﻟﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫)= ‪.(۳۱‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫● ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻧﺕ ﺗﺭﻏﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ ‪ RAW‬ﻓﻘﻁ‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﺣﺩﺩ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪/ Auto‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ] [ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‬
‫● ﻟﺣﻔﻅ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﺗﻧﺳﻳﻘﻲ ‪ JPEG‬ﻭ‪ ،RAW‬ﺣﺩﺩ ﺟﻭﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺑﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[ ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ] [ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫]‪ .[RAW‬ﻭﻟﻠﺭﺟﻭﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﺯﻝ‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ] [ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ]‪.[RAW‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﻧﻘﻝ ﺻﻭﺭ ‪) RAW‬ﺃﻭ ﺻﻭﺭ ‪ RAW‬ﻭ‪ JPEG‬ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﻌًﺎ( ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺩﺍﺋﻣًﺎ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺹ ”‪.(۱٥۸ =) “EOS Utility‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪1‬‬
‫)= ‪.(۳۲‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ[‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‬
‫● ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ]‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ] [ ﻓﻲ ]‪ .[RAW‬ﻳﺅﺩﻱ‬
‫ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﻔﻅ ﻣﻠﻑ ‪ ،RAW‬ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻠﻑ ‪.JPEG‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ]–[‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺣﻔﻅ ﻣﻠﻑ ‪ JPEG‬ﻓﻘﻁ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ] [‬
‫ﻟﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ]‪ ،[JPEG‬ﻭﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺩﻗﺔ ﻭﻣﻌﺩﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﺣﺳﺑﻣﺎ ﺗﻔﺿﻝ‪ .‬ﺣﺩﺩ ]–[‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺣﻔﻅ ﻣﻠﻑ‬
‫‪ RAW‬ﻓﻘﻁ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻬﺎء‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻟﻠﻌﻭﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪C‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻛﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ]‪ [RAW‬ﻭ]‪ [JPEG‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]–[ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺱ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪٤٤‬‬
‫● ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺩﻗﺔ ﻭﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻼﺋﻡ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﻟﻛﻝ‬
‫ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ“ )= ‪.(۱۹٥‬‬
‫● ﺍﻣﺗﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ ﻟﺻﻭﺭ ‪ JPEG‬ﻫﻭ ‪ .JPG‬ﻭﺍﻣﺗﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ ﻟﺻﻭﺭ ‪ RAW‬ﻫﻭ ‪ .CR2‬ﺗﻛﻭﻥ‬
‫ﺃﺳﻣﺎء ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺻﻭﺭ ‪ JPEG‬ﻭ‪ RAW‬ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ ﻣﻌًﺎ ﻣﺯﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺫﺍﺗﻪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ”ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ“ )= ‪ (۱٥۸‬ﻟﻠﺗﻌﺭﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﺯﻳﺩ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺟﻳﻥ ‪Digital Photo‬‬
‫‪ Professional‬ﻭ‪.EOS Utility‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻓﻳﻠﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭﺓ )ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ( ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ )= ‪.(۳۱‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫[ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫● ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺍﻛﺗﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺙ ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪/ Auto‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ )ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻭﻣﻌﺩﻝ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ(‪ .‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﻌﺩﻝ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ )ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻝ ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ( ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﺩﻳﻭ )= ‪ .(۱۳۹‬ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻭﺟﻳﻬﺎﺕ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻗﺻﻰ ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ﻁﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﻟﻛﻝ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺳﺗﻼﺋﻡ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﻣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻟﻛﻝ‬
‫ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ“ )= ‪.(۱۹٦‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺣﺟﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ[ ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ )= ‪.(۳۱‬‬
‫● ﻻﺳﺗﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻛﺭﺍﺭ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﻟﻛﻥ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺗﻪ ﺣﻳﻧﺋﺫٍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪C‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ُﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻟﻠﻌﺭﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ ﻋﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺩﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﻳﺿﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻣﺎﺛﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺫﺍﺗﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻓﻳﻠﻡ ﻣﻘﺎﺱ ‪ ۳٥‬ﻣﻡ‪ُ ،‬ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺣﺟﻡ‬
‫‪ ۱۸۰ x ۱۳۰‬ﻣﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺣﺟﻡ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺭﻳﺩﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ُﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺣﺟﻡ ‪ ۱۳۰ x ۹۰‬ﻣﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺄﺣﺟﺎﻡ ﺳﻠﺳﻠﺔ ‪.A‬‬
‫ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻣﺭﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪٤٥‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺗﺎﺡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ]‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ )= ‪ (۳۲‬ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ‬
‫]‪ [ 1‬ﻭﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﺩﻳﻭ ﻣﺿﺑﻭﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪[NTSC‬‬
‫ﺟﻭﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻗﺔ‬
‫ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ‬
‫‪1920 x 1080‬‬
‫‪ ۲۹٫۹۷‬ﺇﻁﺎﺭً ﺍ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‬
‫‪1920 x 1080‬‬
‫‪ ۲۳٫۹۸‬ﺇﻁﺎﺭً ﺍ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‬
‫‪1280 x 720‬‬
‫‪ ٥۹٫۹٤‬ﺇﻁﺎﺭً ﺍ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺩﻗﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻳﺔ )‪(HD‬‬
‫‪640 x 480‬‬
‫‪ ۲۹٫۹۷‬ﺇﻁﺎﺭً ﺍ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺩﻗﺔ ﻗﻳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺩﻗﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻳﺔ )‪ (HD‬ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻳﺢ ]‬
‫[ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﻣﻌﺩﻝ‬
‫ﺇﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺳﻳﻧﻣﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫ﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﺩﻳﻭ ﻣﺿﺑﻭﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪[PAL‬‬
‫ﺟﻭﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪1920 x 1080‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫‪1280 x 720‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪/ Auto‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫‪640 x 480‬‬
‫ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫‪ ۲٥٫۰۰‬ﺇﻁﺎﺭً ﺍ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ ٥۰٫۰۰‬ﺇﻁﺎﺭً ﺍ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ ۲٥٫۰۰‬ﺇﻁﺎﺭً ﺍ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻹﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻲ ﻟﻠﻣﺣﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﻧﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺩﻗﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻳﺔ )‪ (HD‬ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺩﻗﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻳﺔ )‪(HD‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻣﺳﺗﻭ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻡ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻑ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻹﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻲ ﻛﺈﺭﺷﺎﺩ ﻟﻠﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ٍ‬
‫ٍ‬
‫ﻭﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻳﺳﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻳﻣﻳﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺩﻗﺔ ﻗﻳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻹﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻲ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻹﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻲ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻋﺩﺓ ﻣﺭﺍﺕ ﻟﻌﺭﺽ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪C‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫[ ﺃﺷﺭﻁﺔ ﺳﻭﺩﺍء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺣﻭﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻳﺳﺭﻯ ﻭﺍﻟﻳﻣﻧﻰ‬
‫[ ﻭ]‬
‫● ﻳﻌﺭﺽ ]‬
‫[ ﻭ]‬
‫[ ﻭ]‬
‫[ ﻭ]‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻌﺭﺽ ]‬
‫[‬
‫ﻭ]‬
‫[ ﺃﺷﺭﻁﺔ ﺳﻭﺩﺍء ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺃﺳﻔﻠﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺗﺷﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺷﺭﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﻭﺩﺍء ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ )= ‪ (۳۲‬ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪ [ 5‬ﻭﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺣﺟﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﺎﺋﻝ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻡ ﺑﺗﺣﺭﻳﻙ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﺗﻐﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺧﻁ ﺍﻷﺣﻣﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﺿﺭ‪.‬‬
‫˺‬
‫˻‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫●‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪٤٦‬‬
‫ﻣﺳﺗﻭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ٍ‬
‫ٍ‬
‫● ﻳﺷﻳﺭ )‪ (۱‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻡ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻑ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺷﻳﺭ )‪(۲‬‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻳﺳﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻳﻣﻳﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻹﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ،۱‬ﺍﻧﺗﻘﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ )= ‪ (۳۲‬ﻭﺣﺩﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ[ ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪.(۸۷ =) [ 1‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻹﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ]‬
‫[ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻓﻳﻠﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺣﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺭﺃﺳﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺙ ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻹﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻲ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻟﻳﺗﻁﺎﺑﻕ‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﻣﻌﺎﻳﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻹﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻲ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺑﺩﺍ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻻ ﻳﺳﺎﻋﺩﻙ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻌﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺔ )= ‪.(۱۳۹‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻣﺩﺓ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪/ Auto‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪C‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ] [ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﻭﻝ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ“ )= ‪.(۳۲‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪1‬‬
‫ﻣﻧﻊ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ ﺗﺧﻔﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺭﺍء‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ[‪.‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ[‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫● ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺧﻔﺽ ﻋﻳﻥ ﺣﻣﺭﺍء[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ )= ‪.(۳۲‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫● ﻻﺳﺗﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻛﺭﺍﺭ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﻟﻛﻥ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪٤۷‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﺟﻌﺔ[‬
‫[ ﺛﻡ ﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻﺳﺗﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻛﺭﺍﺭ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﻟﻛﻥ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]‪ 2‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ[‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ ﺗﺧﻔﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺭﺍء ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﺿﻲء ﻟﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺭﺍء ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﻣﻧﺧﻔﺿﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪3‬‬
‫)= ‪.(۳۲‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫‪ 2‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‪،‬‬
‫‪ 4‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‪،‬‬
‫‪ 8‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺣﻔﻅ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﻣﺣﺩﺩ‪ .‬ﺣﺗﻰ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﻋﺭﺽ ﺇﺣﺩﻯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪/ Auto‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﻛﻔﺎءﺓ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩ ﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺳﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺭﻳﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺿﻠﺔ‬
‫)ﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﺇﺑﺩﺍﻋﻳﺔ(‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ‪ ،‬ﺣﺗﻰ ﻭﺇﻥ ﻟﻡ ﺗﻛﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺍﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﺳﻌﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺗﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺗﻭﺑﺔ ﺑﻠﻐﺔ ﺇﻧﺟﻠﻳﺯﻳﺔ ﺳﻬﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻟﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﻭﺗﻣﻭﺝ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺟﻣﻳﻌﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﺇﺑﺩﺍﻋﻙ‪ .‬ﻛﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺿﻠﺔ ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺣﻣﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺳﻬﻭﻟﺔ ﻻﺣ ًﻘﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺗﻘﻁﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺗﻘﻁﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ] [‪ ،‬ﺗﺳﺗﻁﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﻣﻁ ] [ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﺎﺑﻘﺔ‬
‫[ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﻣﻣﺎ ﻳﺯﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺳﻬﻭﻟﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻹﺑﺩﺍﻋﻲ )] [ ﺃﻭ ]‬
‫[ ﺃﻭ ] [(‪.‬‬
‫]‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪C‬‬
‫ﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺳﻁﻭﻉ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺎﻳﻥ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺗﺷﺑﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪٤۸‬‬
‫ﻟﻭﻥ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫ﻳﺗﻳﺢ ﻟﻙ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺑﺩﻭ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻛﻠﻣﺎ ﺯﺍﺩﺕ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﻣﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﺃﺻﺑﺣﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﻭﺿﻭﺣً ﺎ‪ .‬ﻛﻠﻣﺎ ﺍﻧﺧﻔﺿﺕ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺯﺍﺩ ﻣﻘﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﻭﺝ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻳﺗﻳﺢ ﻟﻙ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﻛﻠﻣﺎ ﺯﺍﺩﺕ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﺻﺑﺣﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﺳﻁﻭﻋًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻳﺢ ﻟﻙ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺎﻳﻥ‪ .‬ﻭﻛﻠﻣﺎ ﺯﺍﺩﺕ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺯﺍﺩ ﻣﻘﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺎﻳﻥ ﺑﻳﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺗﺣﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻐﺎﻣﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻳﺢ ﻟﻙ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﺩﻯ ﺯﻫﺎء ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ‪ .‬ﻭﻛﻠﻣﺎ ﺯﺍﺩﺕ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺯﺍﺩ ﺗﻣﺗﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﺄﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﺯﺍﻫﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﺎﻧﺧﻔﺎﺿﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺗﺻﺑﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺧﺎﻓﺗﺔ ﻭﻧﻘﻳﺔ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺃﻛﺑﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻳﺢ ﻟﻙ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ‪ .‬ﻭﻛﻠﻣﺎ ﺯﺍﺩﺕ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﻡ‪ ،‬ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ‬
‫ﺩﻓ ًﺋﺎ‪ ،‬ﺃﻣﺎ ﺍﻧﺧﻔﺎﺿﻬﺎ؛ ﻓﻳﺟﻌﻝ ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﺗﺑﺩﻭ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﻫﺩﻭءًﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻧﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ”ﻟﻭﻥ‬
‫ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ"‪ ] :‬ﺃﺑﻳﺽ ﻭﺃﺳﻭﺩ[ ﻭ] ﺑﻧﻲ[ ﻭ] ﺃﺯﺭﻕ[ ﻭ] ﺃﺭﺟﻭﺍﻧﻲ[‬
‫ﻭ] ﺃﺧﺿﺭ[‪ .‬ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻋﻠﻰ ] [ ﻻﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﻠﻭﻧﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ‬
‫ﺫﻟﻙ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺁﺧﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﻟﻥ ﻳﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﻥ ]ﺗﺷﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ[ ﻭ]ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪/ Auto‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺩﺧﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻗﺭﺹ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‬
‫ﺣﻔﻅ‪/‬ﺗﺣﻣﻳﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺿﻠﺔ ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺣﻣﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻻﺣ ًﻘﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﺗﻛﺭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ‬
‫] [] [ ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ‬
‫[] [ ﻟﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺻﻳﻥ ]‬
‫)= ‪.(۳۱‬‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺩ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻛﻝ ﺷﻲء‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﻟﻠﺭﺟﻭﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫[‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪C‬‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺿﺑﻁ ]ﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ[‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪٤۹‬‬
‫[ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺽ ﺑﺟﺎﻧﺑﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﻗﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ]‬
‫[‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻟﺗﺣﺭﻳﻙ ]‬
‫ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ]‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﺿﺑﻁﻪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺗﺗﻡ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻛﻥ ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ]ﺍﺣﺗﻔﻅ ﺑﺈﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫[ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫]ﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ[ ﻣﻥ ]‪ [ 4‬ﻟﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ] [ ﺑﺎﻟﺟﺎﻧﺏ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻭﻱ ﺍﻷﻳﻣﻥ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ .‬ﻛﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻟﻣﺱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﺿﺑﻁﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ] [ ﻟﻠﻌﻭﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺗﻳﻥ ‪ ۱‬ﻭ‪ ۲‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺳﻡ ”ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺿﻠﺔ )ﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﺇﺑﺩﺍﻋﻳﺔ(“ )= ‪ (٤۹‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ‬
‫] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺗﻔﺿﻳﻼﺗﻙ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] []‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ‬
‫[] [ ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﻛﺎﻥ ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺻﻳﻥ ]‬
‫[‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺣﻔﻅ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺻﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺳﺕ ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﻣﺣﻔﻭﻅﺔ ﻣﻥ ﻗﺑﻝ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ‬
‫]‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ[‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ‪ ،‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻔﻭﻅﺔ ﻣﻥ ﻗﺑﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫]‬
‫ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻳﺢ ﻟﻙ ﻣﻘﺎﺭﻧﺗﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺟﺩﻳﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺄﻛﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ] [ ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ‬
‫]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻣﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۱‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺳﻡ ”ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺿﻠﺔ )ﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﺇﺑﺩﺍﻋﻳﺔ(“ )= ‪ (٤۹‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] []‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ‬
‫[] [ ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺻﻳﻥ ]‬
‫ﺗﺣﻣﻳﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪/ Auto‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪C‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫[ ﻟﻠﺭﺟﻭﻉ ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻹﺑﺩﺍﻋﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ]‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺣﻣﻳﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺗﻘﻁﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ]‬
‫[ ﻭﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻻﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻙ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۱‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺳﻡ ”ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺿﻠﺔ )ﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﺇﺑﺩﺍﻋﻳﺔ(“ )= ‪ (٤۹‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[ ﻟﻠﺩﺧﻭﻝ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﻠﺗﻘﻁﺔ ﻓﻲ ] [ ﻟﻌﺭﺿﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬
‫[ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫● ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺎﻭﻟﺕ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻗﺭﺹ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺁﺧﺭ ﺑﺧﻼﻑ‬
‫] [‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﻌﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ .‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺭﺹ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ] [ ﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺗﻘﻁﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺁﺧﺭ ﺑﺧﻼﻑ ] [ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ]‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺇﺑﺩﺍﻉ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫[‬
‫)‪ (A‬ﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ‬
‫)‪ (a‬ﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ )= ‪(۸۳‬‬
‫)‪ (B‬ﺳﻁﻭﻉ‬
‫)‪ (b‬ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ )= ‪(٦۱‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﺛﻝ ﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )'‪ (b‬ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )= ‪(۷٦‬‬
‫)‪ (C‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ‬
‫)‪ (c‬ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ )= ‪(٦٥‬‬
‫)‪ (D‬ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺎﻳﻥ‬
‫)‪ (d‬ﺗﺑﺎﻳﻥ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ )= ‪(٦۸‬‬
‫)‪ (E‬ﺗﺷﺑﻊ‬
‫)‪ (F‬ﻟﻭﻥ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫‪٥۰‬‬
‫[‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺗﻧﺗﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫[‬
‫[ ﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻔﻭﻅﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺣﺩﺩ ]–[ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﺃﻱ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺗﻘﻁﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ] [‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫[ ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ ﻧﺎﺣﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﻳﺳﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﺗﻳﺢ ﻟﻙ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (e‬ﺗﺷﺑﻊ ﻟﻭﻥ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ )= ‪(٦۸‬‬
‫)‪ (f‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺷﺢ ﻭﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺩﺭﻳﺞ )= ‪(٦۸‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪/ Auto‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪C‬‬
‫ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺯﻫﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺻﻐﻳﺭﺓ )ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺏ(‬
‫ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻟﻸﺯﻫﺎﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻗﺭﻳﺑﺔ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﺑﺩﻭ‬
‫ﺣﺟﻣﻬﺎ ﻛﺑﻳﺭً ﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ً‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁﺎ ﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺷﻬﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻓﺿﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺩﺧﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ]‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫● ﻟﺟﻌﻝ ﺍﻷﺷﻳﺎء ﺍﻟﺻﻐﻳﺭﺓ ﺗﺑﺩﻭ ﻛﺑﻳﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻋﺩﺳﺔ ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‬
‫) ُﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻝ(‪.‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻗﺭﺹ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‬
‫● ﺍﻓﺣﺹ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺻﻭﻟﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﻌﺭﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻗﺭﺏ ﻣﺳﺎﻓﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‪ .‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻗﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﻟﻣﺳﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ]‬
‫[ )ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ( ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‪.‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ] [ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ )= ‪.(۳۱‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺷﺧﺻﻳﺔ )ﻁﻭﻟﻳﺔ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩ ﻟﻳﻠﻳﺔ ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ‬
‫)ﻣﺷﻬﺩ ﻟﻳﻠﻲ ﺑﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﺣﻣﻭﻟﺔ(‬
‫● ﺍﻟﺗﻘﻁ ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﻟﻸﺷﺧﺎﺹ ﻣﻊ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﺗﻧﻌﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﺑﺷﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﻅﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻳﻌﻳﺔ )ﻋﺭﺿﻳﺔ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫● ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺟﻣﻳﻠﺔ ﻟﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩ ﻟﻳﻠﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺷﺧﺻﻳﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩ‬
‫ﻟﻳﻠﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺣﺗﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺛﺎﺑﺕ‪ ،‬ﻣﺛﻝ ﻭﺿﻌﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ )ﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﻅﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻳﻌﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺗﻁﻠﺏ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﺳﻌﺔ‬
‫ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺑﻌﺎﺩﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻣﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻳﺢ ﻟﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻳﻌﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺳﻣﺎء ﺑﺄﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﺯﺍﻫﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٥۱‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺣﺭﻛﺔ )ﺃﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﺭﻳﺎﺿﻳﺔ(‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻋﺩﺳﺔ ﻳﺣﻣﻝ ﺍﺳﻣﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﻁﻊ ”‪،“STM‬‬
‫ﺗﻭﺍﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﺩﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‪ ،‬ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺛﺎﺑ ًﺗﺎ ﻋﻧﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻧﺷﺎء ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺩﻣﺞ ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﻣﺗﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﻣﻣﺎ ﻳﻘﻠﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﺗﺷﻭﺵ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺑﺣﺟﻡ ﺃﻛﺑﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ] [‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁﻳﻥ ] [ ﻭ] [ ﻗﺩ ﺗﺑﺩﻭ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﻣﺣﺑﺑﺔ ﺑﺳﺑﺏ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ (٦۲ =) ISO‬ﻟﺗﻼﺋﻡ‬
‫ﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺣﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺛﺑﺎﺕ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﻷﻧﻬﺎ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺣﻭ ﻣﺗﻭﺍﺻﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ] [‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﻳﻣﻧﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻭﻳﺵ ﺍﻟﺯﺍﺋﺩ ﺃﻭ ﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻣﻌﻳﻧﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﺗﺎﺋﺞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪/ Auto‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩ ﻟﻳﻠﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﻣﻧﺣﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ‬
‫] [ ﺑﺩﻻً ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ] [ ﻧﺗﺎﺋﺞ ﺃﻓﺿﻝ )= ‪.(۳٥‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺗﻳﻥ ‪ ۱‬ﻭ‪ ۲‬ﻓﻲ ”ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ“ )= ‪ ،(٥۱‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻏﻳّﺭ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ]‬
‫[ ﻟﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫● ﻗﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻧﺗﺎﺝ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﻟﻭﻧﻳﺔ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﻧﺎﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﻸﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺑﺷﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﻳﺎﺳﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪٥۲‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻗﺭﺹ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺑﺩﻭ ﺃﻱ ﻁﺑﻕ ﺯﺍﻫﻳًﺎ ﻭﺛﺭﻳًﺎ ﺑﺎﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺩﺧﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ )= ‪.(۳۱‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺯﺍﻫﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻣﺄﻛﻭﻻﺕ )ﻁﻌﺎﻡ(‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪C‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﻣﺗﻧﻭﻋﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ )ﻣﺭﺷﺣﺎﺕ ﺇﺑﺩﺍﻋﻳﺔ(‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻋﺎﻝ )ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺩﻳﻧﺎﻣﻳﻛﻲ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ(‬
‫ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺗﺑﺎﻳﻥ ٍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪/ Auto‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪C‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﻓﻧﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺛﻼﺙ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﺗﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﺑﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ ﻛﻝ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺩﻣﺞ‬
‫ﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻷﻣﺛﻝ ﻹﻧﺷﺎء ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻟﻬﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺣﺩ ﻣﻥ ﻭﻣﻳﺽ ﺍﻷﺟﺯﺍء‬
‫ﺍﻟﺳﺎﻁﻌﺔ ﻭﻓﻘﺩﺍﻥ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻅﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺣﺩﺙ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺎﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺗﻳﻥ ‪ ۱‬ﻭ‪ ۲‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ“ )ﻣﺭﺷﺣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺇﺑﺩﺍﻋﻳﺔ( )= ‪ ،(٥۲‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺣﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺛﺑﺎﺕ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻗﻳﺎﻣﻙ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ .‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ‬
‫ﺛﻼﺙ ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﻭﺩﻣﺟﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﺩ ﻳﻣﻧﻌﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻭﻳﺵ ﺍﻟﺯﺍﺋﺩ ﺃﻭ ﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻣﻌﻳﻧﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﺗﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪٥۳‬‬
‫● ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ]‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺩ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻧﺔ ﻟﺷﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺗﻳﻥ ‪ ۱‬ﻭ‪ ۲‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ“ )ﻣﺭﺷﺣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺇﺑﺩﺍﻋﻳﺔ( )= ‪ ،(٥۲‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻫﺗﺯﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺷﺩﺓ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺗﺧﺫ‬
‫ﺇﺟﺭﺍءﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻟﻠﻣﺣﺎﻓﻅﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺛﺑﺎﺗﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻳﻧﺑﻐﻲ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻝ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻟﺗﺄﻣﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ )= ‪.(۷۸‬‬
‫● ﻭﺳﺗﺅﺩﻱ ﺃﻱ ﺣﺭﻛﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺷﻭﺵ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺳﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻫﻧﺎﻙ ﺗﺄﺧﻳﺭ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺗﻣﻛﻥ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﻣﻌﺎﻟﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﻭﺩﻣﺟﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻁﺑﻳﻌﻲ‬
‫ﻓﻧﻲ ﻗﻳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﻓﻧﻲ ﺣﻳﻭﻱ‬
‫ﻓﻧﻲ ﺇﻳﺣﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻓﻧﻲ ﻣﺯﺧﺭﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻁﺑﻳﻌﻳﺔ ﻭﻣﺗﻧﺎﺳﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﺟﺯﺍء‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺷﺑﻪ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﺯﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﺗﺑﺎﻳﻥ ﺧﺎﻓﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺷﺑﻪ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺿﻳﺣﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺯﺍﻫﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺷﺑﻪ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺯﻳﺗﻳﺔ ﻭﻣﺯﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﺣﻭﺍﻑ ﺑﺎﺭﺯﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺷﺑﻪ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺩﻳﻣﺔ ﻭﻣﺯﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﺣﻭﺍﻑ ﺑﺎﺭﺯﺓ ﻭﺗﻅﻠﻳﻼﺕ ﺩﺍﻛﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﻋﻳﻥ ﺳﻣﻛﺔ )ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﻋﻳﻥ ﺳﻣﻛﺔ(‬
‫● ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪/ Auto‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪C‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺗﻳﻥ ‪ ۱‬ﻭ‪ ۲‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ“ )ﻣﺭﺷﺣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺇﺑﺩﺍﻋﻳﺔ( )= ‪ ،(٥۲‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺗﺑﺩﻭ ﻛﻠﻭﺣﺔ ﻣﺎﺋﻳﺔ )ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﻣﺎﺋﻳﺔ(‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺃﺣﺩ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ]‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺩ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺗﻳﻥ ‪ ۱‬ﻭ‪ ۲‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ“ )ﻣﺭﺷﺣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺇﺑﺩﺍﻋﻳﺔ( )= ‪ ،(٥۲‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫● ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺟﺭﻳﺑﻳﺔ ﺃﻭﻻً‪ ،‬ﻟﻠﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺣﺻﻭﻟﻙ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﺗﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺃﺣﺩ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ]‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺩ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻧﺔ ﻟﺷﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺗﺑﺩﻭ ﻛﺭﺳﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺯﻳﺗﻳﺔ )ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻥ ﺍﻟﺟﻣﻳﻝ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺇﺑﺭﺍﺯ ﺷﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﺑُﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﻟﻠﻬﺩﻑ ﻟﻠﺗﻣﺗﻊ ﺑﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﺷﺑﻳﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﺭﺳﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺯﻳﺗﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﻓﺎﺗﺢ ﻭﻧﺎﻋﻡ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﺗﺑﺩﻭ ﻛﻠﻭﺣﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺋﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻧﺔ ﻟﺷﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺗﻳﻥ ‪ ۱‬ﻭ‪ ۲‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ“ )ﻣﺭﺷﺣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺇﺑﺩﺍﻋﻳﺔ( )= ‪ ،(٥۲‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪٥٤‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻧﺔ ﻟﺷﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺭﱢ ﻑ ﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻋﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺳﻣﻛﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺃﺣﺩ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺩ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻭﻣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺩﺭﺓ )ﻟﻣﻘﺎﻁﻊ ﻣﺩﺗﻬﺎ ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺗﺑﺩﻭ ﻛﻧﻣﻭﺫﺝ ﻣﺻﻐﺭ )ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﻣﺻﻐﺭ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪/ Auto‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻳﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺈﻧﺷﺎء ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻭﺫﺝ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﻐﺭ‪ ،‬ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺷﻭﻳﺵ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ‬
‫ﻭﺃﺳﻔﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﺗﺑﺩﻭ ﻛﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﺎﺫﺝ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﻐﺭﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻗﺑﻝ‬
‫ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‪ .‬ﺳﻳﺗﺣﺭﻙ ﺍﻷﺷﺧﺎﺹ ﻭﺍﻷﺟﺳﺎﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻬﺩ ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻅ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﺃﺑﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ‪ ،‬ﻣﺷﻳﺭً ﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻻ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﻣﻭﺟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﺍﻻﺣﺗﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ]‬
‫ﻟﺗﺣﺭﻳﻛﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪٥٥‬‬
‫ﺛﻭﺍﻥ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ٍ‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻟﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫[] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ] [‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﻟﺗﺣﻭﻳﻝ ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺭﺃﺳﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.۲‬‬
‫ﻟﺗﺣﺭﻳﻙ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪ .‬ﻭﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺗﺟﺎﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺣﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺭﺃﺳﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺗﻣﺩ ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﺩﻳﻭ )= ‪ (۱۳۹‬ﻭﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫)= ‪.(٤٥‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﺩﻳﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ ،[NTSC‬ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺟﻭﺩﺓ ]‬
‫[ ﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫[ ﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ]‬
‫[ ﻭ]‬
‫ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﺩﻳﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ ،[PAL‬ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺟﻭﺩﺓ ]‬
‫[ ﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫[ ﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ]‬
‫[ ﻭ]‬
‫ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﻸﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ]‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺛﻭﺍﻥ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫ٍ‬
‫● ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺟﺭﻳﺑﻳﺔ ﺃﻭﻻً‪ ،‬ﻟﻠﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺣﺻﻭﻟﻙ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﺗﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺗﻳﻥ ‪ ۱‬ﻭ‪ ۲‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ“ )ﻣﺭﺷﺣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺇﺑﺩﺍﻋﻳﺔ( )= ‪ ،(٥۲‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪C‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻋﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ ۱۲‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋُﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻭﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻟﻠﻌﻭﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﻙ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺱ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺳﺣﺏ ﻋﺑﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺳﻳﻁﺔ )ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺳﻳﻁﺔ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺑﺅﺭﻱ ﺳﻠﺱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻳﺟﻌﻝ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺗﺑﺩﻭ ﻛﺄﻧﻬﺎ ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻟﻌﺑﺔ ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻅﻠﻳﻝ‬
‫)ﺻﻭﺭ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺟﻭﺍﻧﺏ ﺃﻏﻣﻕ ﻭﻣﻣﻭﺟﺔ( ﻭﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﻭﻥ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻧﺔ ﻟﺷﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺗﻳﻥ ‪ ۱‬ﻭ‪ ۲‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ“ )ﻣﺭﺷﺣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺇﺑﺩﺍﻋﻳﺔ( )= ‪ ،(٥۲‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﻭﻥ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ]‬
‫ﺗﺗﻳﺢ ﻟﻙ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻟﻭ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻣﺭﺷﺢ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺑﺅﺭﻱ ﺳﻠﺱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﻛﻣﺎ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺗﻳﻥ ‪ ۱‬ﻭ‪ ۲‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ“ )ﻣﺭﺷﺣﺎﺕ‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺑﺩﺍﻋﻳﺔ( )= ‪ ،(٥۲‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪/ Auto‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺃﺣﺩ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ]‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺩ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻧﺔ ﻟﺷﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪C‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪٥٦‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺗﺑﺩﻭ ﻛﺄﻧﻬﺎ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻟﻌﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﺿﻔﺎء ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﻭﻥ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﺩﻓ ًﺋﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﻥ ]ﻗﻳﺎﺳﻲ[‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺎﺩﺉ‬
‫ﻹﺿﻔﺎء ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﻭﻥ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﻫﺩﻭءًﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﻥ ]ﻗﻳﺎﺳﻲ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺍﻓﺊ‬
‫● ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺟﺭﻳﺑﻳﺔ ﺃﻭﻻً‪ ،‬ﻟﻠﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺣﺻﻭﻟﻙ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﺗﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺟﺭﻳﺑﻳﺔ ﺃﻭﻻً‪ ،‬ﻟﻠﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺣﺻﻭﻟﻙ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﺗﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻟﻭﻥ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ )ﺃﺑﻳﺽ‪/‬ﺃﺳﻭﺩ ﻣﺣﺑﺏ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪/ Auto‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺗﺗﻣﺗﻊ ﺑﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﻟﻭﻥ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺣﺎﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺗﻳﻥ ‪ ۱‬ﻭ‪ ۲‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ“ )ﻣﺭﺷﺣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺇﺑﺩﺍﻋﻳﺔ( )= ‪ ،(٥۲‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺃﺣﺩ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ]‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺩ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻧﺔ ﻟﺷﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪C‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺩﺧﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ]‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻗﺭﺹ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺃﺷﺭﻁﺔ ﺳﻭﺩﺍء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻓﺗﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺳﻔﻠﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﺷﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺷﺭﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﻭﺩﺍء ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ] [ )= ‪.(۳۱‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫[ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﺗﻼﺋﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ )= ‪.(۱۷۷‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻋﺩﺳﺔ ﺗﺩﻋﻡ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ”ﻣﺛﺑﺕ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻧﺷﻁ“ )= ‪ ،(۷۸‬ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ]‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻅﺎﻫﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﺟﻌﻝ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﺃﻛﺑﺭ ﺣﺟﻣًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫[‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪٥۷‬‬
‫[ ﻗﺑﻝ‪/‬ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ ]‬
‫[ ﻭﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺑﺅﺭﻱ‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﺛﺎﺑﺕ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]‬
‫[ ﺍﻟﻅﺎﻫﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺑﻝ‪/‬ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻟﻠﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺑﻳﻥ ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪) .‬ﻳﺿﻲء ] [ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﺟﺎﻧﺏ ﺍﻷﻳﺳﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻭﻱ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ‬
‫]‬
‫[ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﺿﺭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ (.‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ‬
‫ﺫﻟﻙ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺿﺑﻁ ]‪ (۳۹ =) [Movie Servo AF‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ[ ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪[ 5‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺩﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪/ Auto‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻝ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺑﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪) .‬ﻻ ُﺗﺻﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺻﻭﺕ ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻪ‪(.‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫● ﻳﺳﺗﻣﺭ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪C‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫●‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪٥۸‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﻗﺩ ﻻ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻣﻣﻛ ًﻧﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺑﻁﻳﺋﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺳﻣﺎﻉ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ‪ AF‬ﺑﻠﻭﻥ ﺑﺭﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ] [ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﺗﺳﺗﻁﻊ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻋﻧﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺃﻱ ﺻﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﺣﺗﻰ ﻭﺇﻥ ﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻧﻁﻠﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺩﻯ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻣﺗﻼء ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪،[ 5‬‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ )= ‪ ،(۳۲‬ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ]‪ AF‬ﻣﻊ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ[ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻭ]‬
‫[ ﻭ]‬
‫[ ﻭ]‬
‫[ ﻭ]‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ]‬
‫[‬
‫)ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ‪ ،(۱٦:۹‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ﺑﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ‬
‫]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻭ]‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁﻳﻥ ]‬
‫[ )ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ‪ ،(٤:۳‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺣﻔﻅ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ﺑﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻔﻝ ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻗﺑﻝ‪/‬ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭﻫﺎ ﺑﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ‪ ۳/۱‬ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺿﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﻣﻥ ‪-3‬‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.+3‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﻟﻘﻔﻝ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ .‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﻗﻔﻝ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺭﺹ ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻭﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﻗﻔﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ ] [ ﺍﻟﻅﺎﻫﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺃﺳﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻟﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﺗﺗﻣﺗﻊ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁﻬﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺳﻳﺔ ﺑﻧﻔﺱ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﺑﻘﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻗﺭﺹ ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺫﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻅﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻣﺭﺷﺢ ﻟﻠﻬﻭﺍء‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪/ Auto‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪C‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۱‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ“‬
‫)= ‪ (٥۹‬ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺻﻭﺕ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪5‬‬
‫)= ‪.(۳۲‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺻﻭﺕ[‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺣﺩﺩ ]ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺻﻭﺕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪ .‬ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ] [‪ ،‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ]ﻳﺩﻭﻱ[ ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫● ﻻﺳﺗﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﻛﺭّ ﺭ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﻟﻛﻥ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪٥۹‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﻣﺭﺷﺢ ﻟﻠﻬﻭﺍء[ ﺛﻡ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺻﻭﺕ[‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫● ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﻣﺭﺷﺢ ﺍﻟﺭﻳﺎﺡ‪/‬ﻣﺧﻔﻑ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ]ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ[‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺭﻏﻡ ﻣﻥ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ )ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ( ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺿﺑﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﻳﺩﻭﻳًﺎ ﺑﻣﺎ ﻳﻧﺎﺳﺏ ﻣﺷﻬﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ[‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ‬
‫] [] [‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ] [ ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﻭﺿﺎء ﺍﻟﻧﺎﺗﺟﺔ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﺭﻳﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﻳﺑﺩﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻁﺑﻳﻌﻲ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻫﺫﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺩﻡ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺭﻳﺎﺡ‪ .‬ﻛﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻣﺭﺷﺢ ﻟﻠﻬﻭﺍء ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻻﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ‬
‫ﻳﺳﺎﻋﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﻔﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺗﺷﻭﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺗﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻣﺎﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺻﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻙ‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﺈﻧﻪ ﻗﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻣﺎﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺻﻭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺧﻔﺿﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۱‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ“‬
‫)= ‪ (٥۹‬ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺻﻭﺕ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﻣﺭﺷﺢ ﺍﻟﺭﻳﺎﺡ‪/‬ﻣﺧﻔﻑ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫● ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﻣﺧﻔﻑ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ[‪.‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪/ Auto‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﻣﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﺑﺄﺳﻠﻭﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺿﻝ ﻟﺩﻳﻙ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪) AE‬ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ]‪([P‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﻟﺗﻧﺎﺳﺏ ﺃﺳﻠﻭﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺿﻝ ﻟﺩﻳﻙ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺩﺧﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻗﺭﺹ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺭﻏﺑﺗﻙ )= ‪– ٦۱‬‬
‫= ‪ ،(۸۱‬ﺛﻡ ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ] [ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺿﺑﻁ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ )= ‪ (۳۲ = ،۳۱‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺃﺟﻝ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪C‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪٦۰‬‬
‫● ﺗﻧﻁﺑﻕ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺻﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻗﺭﺹ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ] [‪ :‬ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪AE‬؛ ﺗﺷﻳﺭ ‪ AE‬ﺇﻟﻰ‪ :‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ‬
‫● ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺇﺣﺩﻯ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺩﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺻﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ ﺑﺧﻼﻑ ] [‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ )= ‪.(۱۷۷‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ )ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ(‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺗﻳﺢ ﻟﻙ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ”ﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺳﺭﻳﻊ ﺑـ ‪ “INFO.‬ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪/ Auto‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ”ﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺳﺭﻳﻊ ﺑـ ‪.“INFO.‬‬
‫[ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﺗﻛﺭﺭ ﻟﻌﺭﺽ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ”ﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺳﺭﻳﻊ ﺑـ ‪.“INFO.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﻟﺿﺑﻁﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ] [] []‬
‫ﻭﻋﺭﺽ ﻭﺻﻔﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺻﻳﻥ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ‪.‬‬
‫[]‬
‫[]‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ )ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ‪ ۳/۱‬ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺗﻭﻗﻑ‪ ،‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻁﺎﻕ‬
‫ﻣﻥ ‪ –3‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.+3‬‬
‫● ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺭﺹ ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻟﻠﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪C‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫● ﺗﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺿﺑﻁ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺗﺅﺩﻱ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻓﺗﺢ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺭﻣﺯ ]‬
‫[ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ‬
‫]‬
‫[‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﻟﻠﺭﺟﻭﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ”ﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺳﺭﻳﻊ ﺑـ ‪.“INFO.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ”ﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺳﺭﻳﻊ ﺑـ ‪ ،“INFO.‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﻬﺎ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻟﻼﻧﺗﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ] [ ﻟﻠﻌﻭﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ] [ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺟﺎﻧﺏ ﺍﻷﻳﻣﻥ ﻣﻥ ﻭﺻﻑ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻔﻝ ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ‪ /‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ )ﻗﻔﻝ ‪(AE‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﻘﻔﻝ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺟﻳﻪ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻧﺣﻭ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻣﻊ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﻣﺭ ًﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻟﻺﻟﻐﺎء ﻭﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ‬
‫] [‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٦۱‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫● ﺗﺷﻳﺭ ‪ AE‬ﺇﻟﻰ‪ :‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺩ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﻭﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺑﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ]‬
‫[ )ﺗﺣﻭﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ]‬
‫[]‬
‫[]‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ]‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ‬
‫ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻛﺫﻟﻙ ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩﻫﺎ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻟﺣﻅﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ[ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪ [ 3‬ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ )= ‪.(۳۲‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪/ Auto‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ISO‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ )ﻛﻳﻔﻳﺔ ﻗﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ( ﻟﺗﻼﺋﻡ ﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ )= ‪.(۳۱‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺗﻪ ﺣﻳﻧﺋﺫٍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫[ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﻭﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ]‬
‫‪ ،ISO‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﺳﺭﻋﺔ‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺗﻪ ﺣﻳﻧﺋﺫٍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪C‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺗﻘﺩﻳﺭﻱ‬
‫ﻗﻳﺎﺱ ﺟﺯﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻣﻭﺿﻌﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫ﺗﻧﺎﺳﺏ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺳﻁ‬
‫ﻟﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻳﺋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﻟﻣﻁﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻓﻌﺎﻻً ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﺳﻁﻭﻋًﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﺑﺳﺑﺏ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺑﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺛﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﻣﺳﺗﺩﻳﺭ )ﺇﻁﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ‪ (AE‬ﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻧﺗﺻﻑ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻬﺩ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻣﺳﺗﺩﻳﺭ )ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ‪ (AE‬ﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻧﺗﺻﻑ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺗﻧﺎﺳﺏ ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺿﻭء ﻋﺑﺭ ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺣﺳﺎﺑﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻋﺑﺭ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺳﻁﻰ ﻛﺄﻛﺛﺭ ﺃﻫﻣﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪AUTO‬‬
‫‪200 ،160 ،125 ،100‬‬
‫‪800 ،640 ،500 ،400 ،320 ،250‬‬
‫‪،3200 ،2500 ،2000 ،1600 ،1250 ،1000‬‬
‫‪12800 ،10000 ،8000 ،6400 ،5000 ،4000‬‬
‫ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻟﺗﻼﺋﻡ ﻧﻣﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻭﻅﺭﻭﻓﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﺥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺗﺩﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻧﺩ‬
‫ﻣﻐﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺷﻣﺱ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩ ﻟﻳﻠﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻐﺭﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻅﻠﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺯﺩﺍﺩ ﺣﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻣﻊ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ .ISO‬ﻭﻛﻠﻣﺎ ﺍﻧﺧﻔﺿﺕ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻠﺕ ﺍﻟﺣﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٦۲‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫●‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫●‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪/ Auto‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫●‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩﻫﺎ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻗﻳﺎﻣﻙ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ‬
‫]‪ ،[AUTO‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺭﻏﻡ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺃﻗﻝ ﻗﺩ ﻳﻘﻠﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺗﺣﺑﺏ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻫﻧﺎﻙ‬
‫ﺧﻁﻭﺭﺓ ﺃﻛﺑﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﻭﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺽ ﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻗﺩ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺍﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﺗﺑﺩﻭ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﻣﺣﺑﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ]ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ [ISO‬ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪[ 3‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ )= ‪ ،(۳۲‬ﺛﻡ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ]ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪.[ISO‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻧﺕ ﺗﺭﻏﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺳﺭﻋﺎﺕ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻥ ]‪) [H‬ﻣﻛﺎﻓﺋﺔ ﻟـ ‪ ،(ISO 25600‬ﻓﺎﻧﺗﻘﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ )= ‪ ،(۳۲‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‪ :C.Fn I‬ﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﺿﻭﺋﻲ[ ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪ [ 1‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﺑﻁ‬
‫]ﺗﻣﺩﻳﺩ ‪ [ISO‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪:1‬ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ[ )= ‪.(۸۸‬‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪٦۳‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﻗﺻﻰ ﻟﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[AUTO‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪3‬‬
‫)= ‪.(۳۲‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪[ISO‬‬
‫[ ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺛﻼﺙ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﺗﺗﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺑﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ )ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻗﻳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﻣﻧﺧﻔﺿﺔ ﺛﻡ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﺭﺗﻔﻌﺔ( ﻓﻲ ﻛﻝ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺧﻔﺿﺔ ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺗﻔﻌﺔ )ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺳﻳﺔ( ﻣﻥ ‪ –2‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ +2‬ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺗﻭﻗﻑ‬
‫ﺑﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ‪ ۳/۱‬ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺗﻭﻗﻑ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪3‬‬
‫)= ‪.(۳۲‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪C‬‬
‫ﺩﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ )ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ‪(AEB‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‪ [AEB‬ﻣﻥ‬
‫[ ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻳﻡ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻟﺿﺑﻁ‬
‫● ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ‪ ،AEB‬ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺗﻳﻥ ‪ ۱‬ﻭ‪ ۲‬ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﻗﻳﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ‪ AEB‬ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.0‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ‪ AEB‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ ] [ ﻭﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ”ﺗﺧﻔﻳﺽ‬
‫ﺿﻭﺿﺎء ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩﺓ“ )= ‪ ،(۸۰‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‪ ISO‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ )= ‪.(۳۲‬‬
‫● ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻗﻳﺩ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻝ )= ‪ ،(٦۱‬ﺗﺗﻡ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻬﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﻛﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺳﻲ ﻟﻬﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ،۲‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ‬
‫ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﻗﺭﺹ ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺑﺎﻳﻥ ) ُﻣﺣﺳﻥ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﻁﻌﺔ )ﺃﻭﻟﻭﻳﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﻭﻥ ﺳﺎﻁﻊ(‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺑﺎﻳﻥ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺻﺑﺣﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺩﺍﻛﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺻﺑﺢ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺎﻳﻥ ﻣﻧﺧﻔﺿًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ )= ‪.(۳۱‬‬
‫[ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺗﺳﺗﻁﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺗﺣﺳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺩﺭﺝ ﺑﺳﻠﺳﻠﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﻋﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﻟﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺿﺎء ﺍﻟﻅﺎﻫﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‪.‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺃﻭﻟﻭﻳﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﻟﻭﻥ ﺳﺎﻁﻊ[ ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪ ،[ 3‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‪[D+‬‬
‫)= ‪.(۳۲‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪/ Auto‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪C‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫● ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﻳﺯﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻭﻳﺵ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ”ﻣُﺣﺳﻥ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ“ ﻗﻭﻳًﺎ ﺟﺩًﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺳﺎﻁﻌﺔ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺯﺍﺋﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺑﻁﻪ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﻣﻧﺧﻔﺽ[ ﺃﻭ ]ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺁﺧﺭ ﺑﺧﻼﻑ ]ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ[ ﻭﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻟﺟﻌﻝ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﺇﻋﺗﺎﻣًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﺗﻅﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺳﺎﻁﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺭﺑﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ‪ AEB‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻧﺕ ﺗﺭﻏﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﺇﻋﺗﺎﻣًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺿﺑﻁ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ[‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪٦٤‬‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻣُﺣﺳﻥ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻣُﺣﺳﻥ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ[ ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪ [ 3‬ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ )= ‪.(۳۲‬‬
‫● ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [D+‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺳﺭﻋﺎﺕ ‪ ISO‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻗﻝ ﻣﻥ ‪ 160‬ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻣُﺣﺳﻥ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺹ‬
‫ﺃﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻣﻅﻬﺭ ﻁﺑﻳﻌﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺿﻭء ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﺿﺑﻁ ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﻟﻣﻼءﻣﺔ ﻣﺻﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﺿﻭء ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻳﻪ‪ .‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﺗﺣﺕ‬
‫ﻣﺻﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﺿﻭء ﺫﺍﺗﻪ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺈﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪/ Auto‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻳﺗﻳﺢ ﻟﻙ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ )‪ (WB‬ﺟﻌﻝ ﺃﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﺣﻳﻭﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻣﺷﻬﺩ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ )=‪.(۳۱‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫[ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺣﺩﺩ‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺗﻪ ﺣﻳﻧﺋﺫٍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻫﺩﻑ ﺃﺑﻳﺽ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﻣﻸ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺑﻭﺭﻗﺔ ﺑﻳﺿﺎء ﺃﻭ ﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻙ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻳﺩﻭﻳًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ )= ‪.(۷٤‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ]ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺃﺑﻳﺽ ﻣﺧﺻﺹ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪ ،[ 4‬ﺣﺩﺩ ]ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺃﺑﻳﺽ‬
‫ﻣﺧﺻﺹ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺹ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪C‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺣﻣّﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺿﺎء‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﻣﺛﻝ ﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻟﻳﻧﺎﺳﺏ ﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﻭء ﺍﻟﻧﻬﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﺥ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺗﺩﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻅﻝ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺗﺣﺕ ﺍﻟﻅﻝ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۱‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﻏﺎﺋﻡ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻁﻘﺱ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﺋﻡ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻣﻐﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺷﻣﺱ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﻭء ﺗﺎﻧﺟﺳﺗﻳﻥ‬
‫ﺗﺎﻧﺟﺳﺗﻳﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺿﻭء ﻓﻠﻭﺭﺳﻧﺕ‬
‫ﺃﺑﻳﺽ‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﻛﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻠﻭﺭﻳﺳﻧﺕ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺧﺻﺹ‬
‫ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﻣﺧﺻﺹ ﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﻳﺩﻭﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪٦٥‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ]‬
‫[ ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ”ﺿﺑﻁ ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ“‬
‫)= ‪ (٦٥‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫●‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪/ Auto‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫●‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۱‬ﺳﺎﻁﻌﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻌﺗﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ،۳‬ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﻧﺎﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﺗﺣﻣﻳﻝ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺇﻟﻐﺎء[ ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ‬
‫ﻟﺗﺣﻣﻳﻝ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻛﻥ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻹﺟﺭﺍء ﻗﺩ ﻻ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺳﻠﻳﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻅﻬﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ]ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ [.‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ،۳‬ﺣﺩﺩ ]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[ ﻹﻏﻼﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻅﻬﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ]ﺿﺑﻁ ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ”‬
‫“[ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ،۳‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ‬
‫] [ ﻟﻠﺭﺟﻭﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺣﺩﺩ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺯﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ‬
‫]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺻﻳﻥ ] []‬
‫● ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻹﻛﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻻﺣﺗﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.۱‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪C‬‬
‫● ﺑﺩﻻً ﻣﻥ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻌﺎﻧﺔ ﺑﻬﺩﻑ ﺃﺑﻳﺽ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻟﻠﻣﺧﻁﻁ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺎﺩﻱ ﺑﻧﺳﺑﺔ ‪) ٪۱۸‬ﻣﺗﻭﻓﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻭﺍﻕ( ﺗﺣﻘﻳﻕ‬
‫ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﺩﻗﺔ ﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻣﺅﺛﺭﺓ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻭﻗﺕ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.۱‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﻳﺩﻭ ًﻳﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪٦٦‬‬
‫● ‪ :B‬ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ؛ ‪ :A‬ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﻣﺎﻧﻲ؛ ‪ :M‬ﺍﻷﺭﺟﻭﺍﻧﻲ؛ ‪ :G‬ﺍﻷﺧﺿﺭ‬
‫● ﻳﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﻭﺍﺣﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﺣﻭﺍﻟﻲ ‪ ٥‬ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎﻳﺭﺩ ﻣﻥ ﻣﺭﺷﺢ‬
‫ﺗﺣﻭﻳﻝ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ‪) .‬ﺍﻟﻣﺎﻳﺭﺩ‪ :‬ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻣﺛﻝ ﻣﺭﺷﺢ ﺗﺣﻭﻳﻝ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﻛﺛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ(‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ )= ‪ (۳۲‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ[ ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪.[ 4‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﻳﺩﻭﻳًﺎ‪ .‬ﻗﺩ ﻳﻁﺎﺑﻕ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻧﺎﺗﺞ ﻋﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﺭﺷﺢ ﺗﺣﻭﻳﻝ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺎﺡ ﺗﺟﺎﺭﻳًﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺭﺷﺢ ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ”ﺿﺑﻁ ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ“‬
‫)= ‪ (٦٥‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﺣﻠﻘﺔ ]‬
‫ﺑـ ‪ B‬ﻭ‪.A‬‬
‫[ ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻣﺱ ﺃﻭ ﺳﺣﺏ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۱‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.۲‬‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۲‬ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻣﺱ ]‬
‫[ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.۱‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻅﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺿﻠﺔ )ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫[ ﺃﻭ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻳﺗﻳﺢ ﻟﻙ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻧﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺿﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ ﻭﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‪ .‬ﺛﻣﺔ ‪ ۷‬ﺃﻧﻭﺍﻉ‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺿﺑﻁﻬﺎ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ )= ‪.(۳۱‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫[ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪/ Auto‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪C‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻟﺗﻧﺎﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻬﺩ‪ .‬ﻭﺳﺗﺑﺩﻭ ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﺯﺍﻫﻳﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﺑﺧﺎﺻ ٍﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﻣﺎء ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻗﺎء ﻭﺍﻟﻧﺑﺎﺗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺿﺭﺍء ﻭﻣﻧﺎﻅﺭ ﻏﺭﻭﺏ ﺍﻟﺷﻣﺱ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻳﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻳﺔ ﻭﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩ ﻏﺭﻭﺏ ﺍﻟﺷﻣﺱ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺑﺩﻭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺯﺍﻫﻳﺔ ﻭﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ ﻭﻭﺍﺿﺣﺔ‪ .‬ﻣﻧﺎﺳﺏ ﻷﻏﻠﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺷﺧﺻﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪٦۷‬‬
‫ﻣﻧﻅﺭ ﻁﺑﻳﻌﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺣﺎﻳﺩ‬
‫ﻣﺧﻠﺹ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﻟﻭﻥ ﻟﻠﺑﺷﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻧﺎﻋﻣﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﺑﺩﻭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﻧﻌﻭﻣﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺗﺟﺎﻧﺳًﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻳُﻌﺩ ﻣﻧﺎﺳﺑًﺎ ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﺧﺻﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﻳﺑﺔ‪ .‬ﻏﻳّﺭ ]ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ[‬
‫ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﻟﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﺷﺭﺓ )= ‪.(٦۸‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﺿﺭﺍء ﻭﺍﻟﺯﺭﻗﺎء ﺍﻟﺯﺍﻫﻳﺔ ﻭﻛﺫﻟﻙ ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺷﺩﻳﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻭﺡ‪ .‬ﻣﻧﺎﺳﺏ ﻟﻠﻣﻧﺎﻅﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻳﻌﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﻬﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺟﺗﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻻﺣ ًﻘﺎ‪ .‬ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺃﻟﻭﺍﻥ‬
‫ﻁﺑﻳﻌﻳﺔ ﻭﻣﻅﻬﺭ ﻟﻁﻳﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺟﺗﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻻﺣ ًﻘﺎ‪ .‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‬
‫ﺗﺣﺕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﻟﻭﻥ ﺗﺑﻠﻎ ‪ ٥۲۰۰‬ﻛﻠﻔﻥ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻧﻲ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﻁﺎﺑﻕ ﻟﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‪ .‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺣﺟﺏ ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺯﺍﻫﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻅﻬﺭ ﻟﻁﻳﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻭﻥ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻭﻧﻳﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻭﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﻣﺛﻝ ]ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺷﺧﺻﻳﺔ[ ﺃﻭ ]ﻣﻧﻅﺭ ﻁﺑﻳﻌﻲ[‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﻣﻠﻑ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻭﺿﺑﻁﻬﺎ ﻛﻣﺎ ﺗﺭﻏﺏ )= ‪.(٦۷‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻓﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻫﺫﻩ‬
‫[ ﺃﻭ ]‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ]‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻫﻲ ﻧﻔﺱ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻳﺔ ]ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ )= ‪ (۳۲‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ[ ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪.[ 4‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﻓﻳﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺿﺑﻁﻬﺎ ﻟﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‪ .‬ﺗﺗﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺧﻔﺿﺔ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﻧﺎﻋﻣﺔ )ﺃﻛﺛﺭ‬
‫ﺗﻣﻭﺟً ﺎ(‪ ،‬ﺃﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ؛ ﻓﺗﺗﻳﺢ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﺣﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺎﻳﻥ ﺗﺗﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺧﻔﺿﺔ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﻗﻝ ﺗﺑﺎﻳ ًﻧﺎ‪ ،‬ﺃﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ؛ ﻓﺗﺗﻳﺢ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﺗﺑﺎﻳ ًﻧﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺗﺷﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﺗﺗﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺧﻔﺿﺔ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺃﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﺃﻗﻝ ﻋﻣ ًﻘﺎ‪ ،‬ﺃﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ؛ ﻓﺗﺗﻳﺢ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ‬
‫ﻋﻣ ًﻘﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﻟﻠﺑﺷﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﺗﺗﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺧﻔﺿﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﻭﻥ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ‬
‫ﺇﺣﻣﺭﺍﺭً ﺍ‪ ،‬ﺃﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﻡ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ؛ ﻓﺗﺗﻳﺢ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﻭﻥ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﺍﺻﻔﺭﺍﺭً ﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺣﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺎﻳﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪/ Auto‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺗﺷﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ*‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ*‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺗﺄﻛﻳﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺳﺣﺏ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺿﺎء ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻭﺭﺍﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺷﺟﺭ ﺍﻟﺧﺿﺭﺍء‪.‬‬
‫‪ :N‬ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻋﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻭﺩ ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺷﺢ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :Ye‬ﺗﺑﺩﻭ ﺍﻟﺳﻣﺎء ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻗﺎء ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﻁﺑﻳﻌﻳﺔ ﻛﻣﺎ ﺳﺗﺑﺩﻭ ﺍﻟﺳﺣﺏ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺿﺎء ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﻭﺿﻭﺣً ﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :Or‬ﺗﺑﺩﻭ ﺍﻟﺳﻣﺎء ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻗﺎء ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﺇﻋﺗﺎﻣًﺎ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻁﻔﻳﻑ‪ .‬ﻳﺑﺩﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻐﺭﻭﺏ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﺇﺑﻬﺎﺭً ﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :R‬ﺗﺑﺩﻭ ﺍﻟﺳﻣﺎء ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻗﺎء ﺩﺍﻛﻧﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺩ ﻣﺎ‪ .‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﺳﺗﺑﺩﻭ ﺃﻭﺭﺍﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺳﺎﻗﻁﺔ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﻭﺿﻭﺣً ﺎ ﻭﺳﻁﻭﻋًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :G‬ﺗﺑﺩﻭ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﻟﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﺷﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺷﻔﺎﻩ ﺑﺎﻫﺗﺔ‪ .‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﺳﺗﺑﺩﻭ ﺃﻭﺭﺍﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺷﺟﺭ ﺍﻟﺧﺿﺭﺍء ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﻭﺿﻭﺣً ﺎ ﻭﺳﻁﻭﻋًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪:N] :‬ﻻﺷﻲء[ ﺃﻭ ]‪:S‬ﺑﻧﻲ[ ﺃﻭ‬
‫]‪:B‬ﺃﺯﺭﻕ[ ﺃﻭ]‪:P‬ﺃﺭﺟﻭﺍﻧﻲ[ ﺃﻭ ]‪:G‬ﺃﺧﺿﺭ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪C‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺷﺢ*‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪٦۸‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺩﺭﻳﺞ*‬
‫*‪ ۱‬ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺗﺎﺡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ]‬
‫*‪ ۲‬ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺗﺎﺡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ]‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻅﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺿﻠﺔ‬
‫)ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ(“ )= ‪ (٦۷‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ‪،‬‬
‫ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺻﻳﻥ‬
‫[] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫]‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[ ﻟﻠﺗﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﻋﻥ ﺃﻱ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻬﺎء‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫● ﺗﺅﺩﻱ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ]ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺎﻳﻥ[ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻌﻝ ]ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺷﺢ[ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﻭﺿﻭﺣً ﺎ‪.‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪/ Auto‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺣﻔﻅ ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺿﻠﺔ‬
‫[ ﺣﺳﺑﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﺭﺍءﻯ ﻟﻙ ﻭﺣﻔﻅﻬﺎ ﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻻﺣ ًﻘﺎ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻭ]‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺛﻝ ]‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺣﻔﻅ ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ ﻟﻠﻣﻌﻠﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻣﺛﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﺩﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺑﺎﻳﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺑﺅﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻟﺣﻔﻅﻪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻅﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺿﻠﺔ‬
‫[ ﺃﻭ ]‬
‫)ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ(“ )= ‪ (٦۷‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ]‬
‫ﺃﻭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪C‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ‪) AF‬ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺑﺅﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( ﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻣﺷﻬﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫[‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬
‫ﺛﻡ ﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ )= ‪.(۳۲‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺻﻳﻥ‬
‫[] [ ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻧﻪ‬
‫]‬
‫ﻛﻧﻣﻁ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ‬
‫[ ﻟﺿﺑﻁ‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁﻪ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺻﻳﻥ ] []‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺻﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻬﺎء‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﻣﻌﺗﻣًﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﺑﺎﻳﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﻁﻌﺔ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻋﺩﺳﺎﺕ ‪ EF‬ﻭ‪ EF-S‬ﻣﻌﻳﻧﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﻳﺳﺗﻐﺭﻕ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻭﻗ ًﺗﺎ ﺃﻁﻭﻝ ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺃﻭ ﺭﺑﻣﺎ ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ‬
‫ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻣﺯﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻭﻗﻊ ‪ Canon‬ﻋﺑﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ‪.‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ،۲‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻣﺕ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺗﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬
‫‪.(۱٥۸ =) EOS Utility‬‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ )= ‪ (۳۲‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻁﺭﻕ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺑﺅﺭﻱ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ[ ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪.[ 2‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪ AF‬ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ‬
‫● ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺩ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﻭ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻟﻠﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺛﻭﻕ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻝ‪ .‬ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﺿﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪٦۹‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ )= ‪ .(۷۱‬ﻟﺗﻛﻭﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻓﺔ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺭﻛﻥ ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﺟﻪ ﺃﻭﻻً ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻻﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ‪،AF‬‬
‫ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺟﺯﺋﻲ‪ .‬ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ‪ ،‬ﺃﻋﺩ ﺗﻛﻭﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺭﻏﺑﺗﻙ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ )ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ(‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ‪ ٤ – ۲‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻳﺩﻭﻱ“ )= ‪ (۷٤‬ﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ‪.AF‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻌﻣﻝ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻣﺱ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪/ Auto‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫‪+‬ﺗﺗﺑﻊ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺩ ﺗﻭﺟﻳﻪ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‪ ،‬ﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﺃﺑﻳﺽ ﺣﻭﻝ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺷﺧﺹ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻟﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻲ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﺑﻧﻔﺳﻙ )= ‪.(۷۱‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻟﻠﺣﺭﻛﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺣﺭﻛﺔ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﻣﻌﻳﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪C‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻝ‪ .‬ﻳﺗﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﺿﺭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫● ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺛﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﻭﺟﻪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﺃﺧﺿﺭ ﺣﻭﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫●‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۷۰‬‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﺃﻣﺛﻠﺔ ﻟﻸﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ‪:‬‬
‫ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺑﻌﻳﺩﺓ ﺟﺩًﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﻳﺑﺔ ﺟﺩًﺍ‬‫ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻣﻕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺗﺢ‬‫ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻛﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺟﺎﻧﺑﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺑﻌﻳﺩﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺧﻔﻳﺔ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺟﺯﺋﻲ‬‫ﻗﺩ ﺗﺳﻲء ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺗﻭﺿﻳﺢ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺑﺷﺭﻳﺔ ﻛﺄﻭﺟﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ‪ AF‬ﺑﻠﻭﻥ ﺑﺭﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ] [ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﺗﺳﺗﻁﻊ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻋﻧﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺇﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺭﻣﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺗﺷﻔﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺣﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺍﻟﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﻗﺻﻰ ﻟﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ‬
‫)= ‪.(٤٥‬‬
‫[]‬
‫[]‬
‫ ]‬‫[‪ ٤۹ :‬ﺇﻁﺎﺭً ﺍ‬
‫ ]‬‫[‪ ۳٥ :‬ﺇﻁﺎﺭً ﺍ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺃﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﻟﻠﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ )‪ AF‬ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻣﺱ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪/ Auto‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪C‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﻌﺩ ﻗﻳﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺷﺧﺹ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺷﺧﺹ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﻗﻊ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺷﺧﺹ ﺍﻟﻅﺎﻫﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ‪ AF‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‬
‫ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ‪ AF‬ﺣﻳﺙ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻣﺱ‪.‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ‪ AF‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‬
‫] [ ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ )ﺗﺗﻡ ﻣﺗﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺣﺭﻙ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ(‪ .‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ‪AF‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻣﺱ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺩ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪ ،‬ﻟﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻹﺻﺑﻊ ﻋﻥ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﻘﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺗﻡ ﺍﻵﻥ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ]‬
‫● ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻧﺕ ﺗﻔﺿﻝ ﻋﺩﻡ ﻗﻳﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﻧﻣﻁ‬
‫]ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻣﺱ[‪ .‬ﺍﻧﺗﻘﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ )= ‪ ،(۳۲‬ﻭﺍﺿﺑﻁ ]ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻣﺱ[ ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ‬
‫]‪ ،[ 1‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﺩ ﻻ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺗﺑﻊ ﻣﻣﻛ ًﻧﺎ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺻﻐﻳﺭﺓ ﺟﺩًﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺗﺣﺭﻙ ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﻛﺑﻳﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻫﻧﺎﻙ ﺗﺑﺎﻳﻥ ﻛﺎ ٍ‬
‫ﻑ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﻭﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ‬
‫[ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻵﻥ‪.‬‬
‫]‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫‪۷۱‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫● ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻧﺗﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ] [ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﺿﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻗﻔﻝ ‪AF‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫[ ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺃﻭﺟﻪ ﺃﺷﺧﺎﺹ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﻙ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ‪.AF‬‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ‪ AF‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‬‫[‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ] [] [] [] [ ﻟﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﻟﻠﺭﺟﻭﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[ ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺗﻳﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻝ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺑﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻧﺗﺻﻑ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ‪ AF‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‬‫[‪ ،‬ﻳﻅﻬﺭ‬
‫]ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ‪ :‬ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ[‪ ،‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ] [ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﻛﻬﺩﻑ ﺭﺋﻳﺳﻲ‪ .‬ﻟﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ ] [ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺁﺧﺭ ﺗﻡ ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻓﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻧﻘﻝ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ]ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ‪ :‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺧﺗﻔﻲ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺑﺅﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ‬
‫●‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻳﺳﺎﻋﺩ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﻘﻭﺩﺓ ﻟﻸﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺣﺭﻛﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﺳﺑﺏ ﻣﻭﺍﺻﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻟﻠﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﻭﺿﺑﻁ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻁﺎﻟﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫●‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪C‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ ﻟﻠﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪ .‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ‬
‫‪ AF‬ﺃﺧﺿﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫● ﻭﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺣﺭﻙ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﺣﻭﻝ‬
‫ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ‪ AF‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﻭﻳﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪ .‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺿﺑﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ‪ ،‬ﻳﻌﻭﺩ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ‪ AF‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﺿﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫●‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۷۲‬‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫●‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‪ ،[ONE SHOT‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‪ [SERVO‬ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ )= ‪.(۳۲‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪/ Auto‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫●‬
‫ﻗﺩ ﻻ ﺗﺳﺗﻁﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪ ،‬ﺣﺗﻰ ﻭﺇﻥ ﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ‪ .‬ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺑﻳﻧﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﻣﺗﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﻳﺗﺣﻭﻝ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ‪ AF‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻗﻔﻝ ‪.AF‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ )= ‪ (٤۰‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﺷﻲء ﺁﺧﺭ ﺑﺟﺎﻧﺏ ] [‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫]‪.[ONE SHOT‬‬
‫ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ ،[Servo AF‬ﺗﺭﻛﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻧﺗﺻﻑ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﺃﻱ ﻭﺟﻪ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ ﻷﺳﻔﻝ‪ ،‬ﺣﺗﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻔﻌﻳﻝ‬
‫] ‪+‬ﺗﺗﺑﻊ[ )= ‪.(۷۰‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ‪ ،servo AF‬ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ‬
‫ﺫﻟﻙ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺑﻐﺽ ﺍﻟﻧﻅﺭ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ )= ‪.(٦۲‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻋﺩﺳﺔ ﺗﺣﻣﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﻡ ”‪ ،“STM‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ‪ servo AF‬ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ‬
‫)= ‪ (٤۲‬ﻣﻊ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺩﺍﺋﻡ‪ .‬ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻓﻘﺩﺍﻥ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻋﺩﺳﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ‪ ،‬ﻣﻣﺎ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺑﻁﻳﺋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﻭﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﻻ ﺗﺗﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﻥ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء‬
‫ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ )= ‪ (۳۲‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺑﺅﺭﻱ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ[ ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪.[ 2‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺑﺩﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻬﺔ ﺇﻟﻳﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺣﺗﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ‬
‫ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﺩﻻً ﻣﻥ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﺣﻅﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ‬
‫ﻓﻳﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪2‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪/ Auto‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ ‪ [AF‬ﻣﻥ‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ[ )= ‪.(۳۲‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۷۳‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻋﺩﺳﺔ ‪ ،EF-M‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺑﺩﻗﺔ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻛﺗﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﻓﺭﺹ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺟﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﻧﻅﺭً ﺍ ﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻣﺣﺎﻓﻅﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻧﻅﺭً ﺍ ﻟﻌﺩﻡ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ‬
‫ﻳﺳﺗﻐﺭﻕ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻭﻗ ًﺗﺎ ﺃﻁﻭﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺗﺎﺩ ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪2‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪C‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‪ [AF+MF‬ﻣﻥ‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ[ )= ‪.(۳۲‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻭﺍﺳﺗﻣﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻳﻪ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺑﺩﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺃﺩﺭ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻭﻣﺽ ]‪ [MF‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺭﻓﻊ ﺇﺻﺑﻌﻙ ﻋﻥ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﻣﻊ ‪.(۷۲ =) Servo AF‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﺗﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺃﻱ ﻋﺩﺳﺎﺕ ﺑﺧﻼﻑ ‪.EF-M‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻳﺩﻭﻱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪/ Auto‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪C‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪ ،AF‬ﻓﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﻳﺩﻭﻱ‪ .‬ﻳﺗﻳﺢ ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‬
‫ﺑﺳﻬﻭﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻋﺩﺳﺔ ‪.EF-M‬‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻋﺩﺳﺔ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﺑﺧﻼﻑ ‪ ،EF-M‬ﺃﻭﻗﻑ‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ ،[MF‬ﺛﻡ ﻗﻡ‬
‫ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ]‪.[MF‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ ]‪ AF‬ﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻠﺯﻡ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫]‪ [MF‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺃﻱ ﻋﺩﺳﺎﺕ ﺑﺧﻼﻑ ‪.EF-M‬‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺳﺣﺏ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۳‬ﻟﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺑﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﻟﻣﺱ ] [ ﺃﺳﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﻳﻣﻳﻥ ﻟﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺳﺣﺏ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻣﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺑﺭ‪.‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ ﺑﺳﻬﻭﻟﺔ )ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺣﻭﺍﻑ ‪(MF‬‬
‫● ﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻧﺗﺻﻑ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺃﺳﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺟﺎﻧﺏ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻳﻣﻥ‪ ،‬ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﻗﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ] [] []‬
‫ﺛﻡ ﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫[]‬
‫[ ﻟﺗﺣﺭﻳﻙ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ‪،‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺗﻳﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻗﻝ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻧﺗﺻﻑ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻋﺭﺽ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﻧﻅﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺑﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺑﺅﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺑﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫[‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺻﻳﻥ ] []‬
‫ﻟﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺩﻝ ﺍﻹﺟﻣﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﻠﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺑﻳﻥ ‪) ۱x‬ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ( ﺃﻭ‬
‫‪ 5x‬ﺃﻭ ‪.10x‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺣﻭﺍﻑ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﻗﻌﺔ ﺿﻣﻥ ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ ﺑﺎﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﻣﻥ ﺃﺟﻝ ﺗﻳﺳﻳﺭ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ ﻳﺩﻭﻳًﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﺣﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ )ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ( ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻣﺔ ﻻﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻓﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺳﺑﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﺯﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﺣﻭﺍﻑ ‪ [MF‬ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪ ،[ 2‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﺑﻁ‬
‫]ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺣﻭﺍﻑ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ[ )= ‪.(۳۲‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻋﻧﺻﺭ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﻟﺗﻬﻳﺋﺗﻪ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ )= ‪.(۳۲‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺣﻭﺍﻑ ‪ MF‬ﻓﻲ ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺗﻙ‪.‬‬
‫‪۷٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﻳﻧﻁﻠﻕ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺧﻔﺿﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﻳﻧﻁﻠﻕ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻝ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪/ Auto‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪C‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۷٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻟﻳﺗﻭﺍﻓﻕ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺷﻬﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺣﻭﻝ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ‬
‫”ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ“ )= ‪.(۱۹٦‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺯﺍﻣﻥ ﺑﻁﺊ‬
‫ﻳﻧﻁﻠﻕ ﻟﺗﻭﺿﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻲ )ﻣﺛﻝ ﺍﻷﺷﺧﺎﺹ( ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺃﺑﻁﺄ ﻟﺗﻭﺿﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺣﺭﻳﻙ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ] [‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺗﺧﺫ ﺗﺩﺍﺑﻳﺭ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻟﻼﺣﺗﻔﺎﻅ‬
‫ﺑﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺛﺎﺑﺕ ﻭﻣﻧﻌﻬﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻻﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻳﻧﺑﻐﻲ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻝ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻟﺗﺄﻣﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ )= ‪.(۷۸‬‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ] [‪ ،‬ﺣﺗﻰ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻧﻁﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺗﺣﺭﻙ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﻧﺗﻬﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺗﻪ ﺣﻳﻧﺋﺫٍ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺧﻔﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ .‬ﻗﻡ‬
‫ﺑﺗﺣﺭﻳﻙ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ] [ ﻟﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻧﻁﻠﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺣﺩﺙ ﺗﻅﻠﻳﻝ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻧﻁﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﻳﺣﺩﺙ ﺗﻅﻠﻳﻝ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻌﺩﺳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺧﻁﺭ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺃﻭ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ‬
‫‪ ISO‬ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻟﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﻅﻬﻭﺭ ﺍﻷﺟﺯﺍء ﺍﻟﺳﺎﻁﻌﺔ ﺑﺎﻫﺗﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻣﺛﻝ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﻻ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺃﻭ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ISO‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ ﻣﻁﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻟﻺﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ )= ‪ ،(۳۲‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪ ،[ 3‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ]ﺍﻧﻁﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ[ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪/ Auto‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻗﻔﻝ ‪FE‬‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﻓﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ )= ‪ ،(٦۱‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻣﻥ ‪ –2‬ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫‪ +2‬ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺑﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ‪ ۳/۱‬ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺗﻭﻗﻑ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﻭﺃﺩِﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ‬
‫[ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺭ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫]‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻵﻥ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪(۳۲ =) MENU‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪] < [ 3‬ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ[ < ]ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ[ <‬
‫]‬
‫ﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ[ )= ‪ (۳۲‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻝ‪.‬‬‫ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬‫[ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۷٦‬‬
‫ﻛﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻗﻔﻝ ‪ ،(٦۱ =) AE‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳُﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻭﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻧﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ] [ )= ‪.(۷٥‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﻘﻔﻝ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺟﻳﻪ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻧﺣﻭ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻣﻊ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻧﻁﻠﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﻭﻋﻧﺩ ﻋﺭﺽ ]‬
‫ﺧﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﻣﺭ ًﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻟﻺﻟﻐﺎء ﻭﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ ]‬
‫[؛ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻻﺣﺗﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪C‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ[ )= ‪ (۳۲‬ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‬
‫ﺛﻡ ﻟﻣﺱ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺗﺷﻳﺭ ‪ FE‬ﺇﻟﻰ‪ :‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﻗﻔﻝ ‪ ،FE‬ﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺍﺋﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻧﺗﺻﻑ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺳﻲ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻧﻁﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ،۲‬ﻳﻭﻣﺽ ]‬
‫ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۲‬ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺗﻭﻗﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺗﻭﻗﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻭﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪:‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪3‬‬
‫ﻓﻼﺵ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺑﻁ ]ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ[ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ[‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺣﺩﺩ ]ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ‬
‫● ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﺯﺍﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ )= ‪.(۳۲‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪/ Auto‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﻝ ﺳﺗﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺛﺎﻧﻲ ﺳﺗﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻳﻧﻁﻠﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺭ ﺑﻌﺩ ﻓﺗﺢ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻧﻁﻠﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺭ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪C‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ 1/100‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺳﺭﻉ‪ ،‬ﻳﻧﻁﻠﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ]ﺃﻭﻝ ﺳﺗﺎﺭ[‪ ،‬ﺣﺗﻰ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ]ﺛﺎﻧﻲ ﺳﺗﺎﺭ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻗﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ[‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺩﺩ ]ﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ‪،[E-TTL II‬‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ]ﻣﺗﻭﺳﻁ[‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﻗﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻟﻠﻣﺷﻬﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪۷۷‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ]ﺗﻘﺩﻳﺭﻱ[ ﻟﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ‬
‫ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﻫﺫﻩ ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﺗﻭﺳﻁ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻗﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻁﻭﻝ ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺑﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺛﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻋﻧﺩ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺟﺭﻯ ﻗﻳﺎﺳﻪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪3‬‬
‫ﺛﻡ ﺣﺩﺩ ]ﻣﺗﻭﺳﻁ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪3‬‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ[‬
‫[ ﺛﻡ ﺣﺩﺩ ]ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ‬
‫] [‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [‪،‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫● ﻭﻟﻠﻌﻠﻡ‪ ،‬ﺗﺣﺗﻭﻱ ﺃﺳﻣﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺯﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﻁﻊ ”‪ .“IS‬ﻳﺷﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺻﺎﺭ ‪ IS‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣُﺛﺑﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﻣﻁ ‪IS‬‬
‫ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺑﺎﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺣﺟﻡ ﺫﺍﺗﻪ ﺍﻟﻅﺎﻫﺭ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪/ Auto‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﺗﻊ ﺑﻌﺩﺳﺔ ‪ EF-M‬ﺗﺩﻋﻡ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪C‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۷۸‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‪ IS‬ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ[‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‪ IS‬ﻧﻣﻁ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ )= ‪.(۳۲‬‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪2‬‬
‫)= ‪.(۳۲‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻋﺩﺳﺔ ﺗﺩﻋﻡ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ‬
‫ﺣﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻳﺩ ﻟﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﻣﻧﻊ ﻣﻭﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻻﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﺗﺧﺫ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻳﺭ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻟﻠﻣﺣﺎﻓﻅﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺛﺑﺎﺗﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ]‪ IS‬ﻧﻣﻁ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ]‪ IS‬ﻧﻣﻁ[ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺃﻱ ﻋﺩﺳﺎﺕ ﺑﺧﻼﻑ ‪ .EF-M‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺑﺩﻻً ﻣﻥ )= ‪.(۲۲‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻣﻝ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺳﻠﻳﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‪ ،‬ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺑﺩء ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﻟﻠﺳﻣﺎﺡ‬
‫ﺑﺈﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﻟﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻻﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﻟﻠﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ .‬ﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺑﺎﻟﺣﺟﻡ ﺫﺍﺗﻪ ﺍﻟﻅﺎﻫﺭ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪،‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺧﻔﺽ ﺍﻻﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﻟﻠﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﻣﻁ ‪“IS‬‬
‫)= ‪ (۷۸‬ﻟﻠﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]‪ IS‬ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﻣﺛﺑﺕ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻧﺷﻁ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‪.(۳۲ =) [2‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ]ﻣﺛﺑﺕ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻧﺷﻁ[ ﺇﻻ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻋﺩﺳﺎﺕ ﺗﺩﻋﻡ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺿﺑﻁ ]‪ IS‬ﻧﻣﻁ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪ ،‬ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺑﺎﻟﺣﺟﻡ ﺫﺍﺗﻪ ﺍﻟﻅﺎﻫﺭ‬
‫ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻓﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪/‬ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻻﻧﺣﺭﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻧﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪/ Auto‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪C‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۷۹‬‬
‫●‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﻗﺩ ﺗﺅﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺧﺻﺎﺋﺹ ﺍﻟﻔﺭﻳﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺗﻅﻠﻳﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻧﺎﺛﺭ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺣﻭﻝ ﻣﺣﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺇﺻﻼﺡ‬
‫ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻅﺎﻫﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺗﻣﺗﻊ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺣﻭﺍﻟﻲ ‪ ۳٥‬ﻋﺩﺳﺔ ﺑﺈﻣﻛﺎﻧﻬﺎ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻻﻧﺣﺭﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻧﻲ‪/‬ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ EOS Utility‬ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺩﻡ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺗﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺗﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻳﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ‪EOS Utility‬‬
‫)= ‪.(۱٥۸‬‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫* ﻻ ﻳﻠﺯﻡ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺎﺕ ‪.EF-M‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ]ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻧﺣﺭﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ[‪.‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻧﺣﺭﺍﻑ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ[ ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪ ،[ 2‬ﺛﻡ ﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ‬
‫)= ‪.(۳۲‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﻋﺭﺽ ]ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ[ ﻟﻠﻌﺩﺳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻛﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻓﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪/‬ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻻﻧﺣﺭﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻧﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻭﺭ ‪JPEG‬‬
‫ﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ ﻣﻥ ﻗﺑﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻋﺩﺳﺔ ﻟﻳﺳﺕ ﻣﻥ ‪ ،Canon‬ﻳﻭﺻﻰ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﺣﻳﺣﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ[‪ ،‬ﺣﺗﻰ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺭﺽ ]ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ[‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ ‪ RAW‬ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪Digital Photo Professional‬‬
‫‪.(۱٥۸ =) software‬‬
‫ﻗﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺿﺑﻁ ]ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻁﺭﻓﻳﺔ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ[ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻅﻬﻭﺭ ﺗﺷﻭﻳﺵ ﺑﺎﻟﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ‬
‫ﻟﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ”ﺍﻧﺣﺭﺍﻑ ﻟﻭﻧﻲ“ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻭﺭ ‪ RAW‬ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ (۱٥۸ =) Digital Photo Professional‬ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ً‬
‫ﺑﺩﻻ ﻣﻥ ﺫﻟﻙ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫)= ‪.(۳۱‬‬
‫[ ﻟﺿﺑﻁﻪ‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻛﻥ ﻻ ﻳﺣﺩﺙ ﺃﻱ ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺃﻱ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﻟﻠﻌﺩﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺟﺩﻳﺩﺓ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻅﻬﻭﺭ ]ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ[‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ،۲‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ (۱٥۸ =) EOS Utility‬ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﻳﻛﻥ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﻣﺭﺋﻳًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻡ ﺑﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻭﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻧﻬﺎ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﺣﻳﺣﺎﺕ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺳﻊ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺣﻭﻝ ﺫﻱ ﻋﻣﺭ ﻁﻭﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﻘﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺃﻗﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻘﻝ ﻣﻘﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻘﻪ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ]ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻁﺭﻓﻳﺔ[ ﻗﻠﻳﻼً ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﻗﺻﻰ ﻟﻣﻘﺩﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺿﺑﻁﻪ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪.Digital Photo Professional‬‬
‫ﻛﻠﻣﺎ ﺯﺍﺩﺕ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ ،ISO‬ﻗﻝ ﻣﻘﺩﺍﺭ ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻓﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻭﻳﺵ‬
‫●‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪/ Auto‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺑﻳﻥ ‪ ۳‬ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﻟﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻭﺵ‪] :‬ﻗﻳﺎﺳﻲ[‪] ،‬ﻋﺎﻟﻲ[‪] ،‬ﻣﻧﺧﻔﺽ[‪ .‬ﺗﺑﺭﺯ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻫﺫﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺎﺕ ‪ ISO‬ﻋﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﺧﻔﻳﺽ ﺗﺷﻭﻳﺵ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻋﺎﻟﻳﺔ[ ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪ ،[ 4‬ﺛﻡ ﺣﺩﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ )= ‪.(۳۲‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪C‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۸۰‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺗﺧﻔﻳﺽ ﺿﻭﺿﺎء ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺗﺳﺗﻁﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺃﺭﺑﻊ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﻭﺗﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻟﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻭﻳﺵ ﺑﺩﻗﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻔﻭﻕ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ]ﻋﺎﻟﻲ[ ﻟﻺﻋﺩﺍﺩ ]ﺗﺧﻔﻳﺽ ﺗﺷﻭﻳﺵ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻋﺎﻟﻳﺔ[‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻭﻳﺵ“ ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺳﻔﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ‪ .‬ﺗﻠﺗﻘﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﺭﺑﻊ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺛﻡ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺗﺟﻣﻳﻌﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻟﺫﺍ ﺣﺎﻓﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺛﺑﺎﺕ ﻳﺩﻳﻙ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﻗﺩ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﻧﺗﺎﺋﺞ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺗﻭﻗﻌﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺩﻡ ﻣﺣﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺑﺳﺑﺏ ﺍﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻭﺻﻰ ﺑﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻝ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﻫﺩﻑ ﻣﺗﺣﺭﻙ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﻳﺑﻘﻰ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﺣﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺭﺑﻣﺎ ﺗﺻﺑﺢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻳﻁﺔ ﺩﺍﻛﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻭﻳﺵ ﺑﺎﻟﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﺫﻟﻙ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ‪] ،AEB‬ﺗﺧﻔﻳﺽ ﺗﺷﻭﻳﺵ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﻁﻭﻳﻝ[‪ ،‬ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫‪ RAW‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻥ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﻻ ﺗﺗﻭﻓﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ]ﺗﺧﻔﻳﺽ ﺿﻭﺿﺎء ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩﺓ[‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﻣﻛﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺳﺗﻐﺭﻕ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﻗ ًﺗﺎ ﺃﻁﻭﻝ ﻣﻧﻪ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ‪ .‬ﻭﻻ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺍﻛﺗﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻭﻳﺵ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺳﺭﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺧﻔﺿﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺗﺳﺗﻁﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻭﻳﺵ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﺣﺩﺙ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺳﺭﻋﺎﺕ ﻏﺎﻟﻕ ﺗﺻﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺃﻗﻝ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﺧﻔﻳﺽ ﺗﺷﻭﻳﺵ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﻁﻭﻳﻝ[ ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪ ،[ 4‬ﺛﻡ ﺣﺩﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ )= ‪.(۳۲‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪/ Auto‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻭﻳﺵ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﻁﻭﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪) OFF‬ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ(‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪C‬‬
‫‪) AUTO‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۸۱‬‬
‫‪) ON‬ﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ(‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻭﻳﺵ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻭﻳﺵ ﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻁﻭﻳﻝ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺳﺭﻋﺎﺕ ﻏﺎﻟﻕ ﺗﺻﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺭﺹ ﺩﺍﺋﻣًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻭﻳﺵ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺳﺭﻋﺎﺕ ﻏﺎﻟﻕ ﺗﺻﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﻝ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﺩ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻫﻧﺎﻙ ﺗﺄﺧﻳﺭ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺗﻣﻛﻥ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﺣﻳﺙ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﻣﻌﺎﻟﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻟﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻭﻳﺵ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ ISO1600‬ﺃﻭ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫]‪ [ON‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﻅﻬﻭﺭ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﺣﺑﺑﺔ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺃﻛﺑﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺿﺑﻁﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫]‪ [OFF‬ﺃﻭ ]‪.[AUTO‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪/ Auto‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ Tv‬ﻭ‪ Av‬ﻭ‪ M‬ﻭ‪C‬‬
‫ﺳﺭﻋﺎﺕ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ )ﻧﻣﻁ ]‪([Tv‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺿﻠﺔ ﻟﻙ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪ .‬ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‬
‫ﻟﺗﻧﺎﺳﺏ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻙ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺳﺭﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ“ )= ‪.(۱۹۲‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺩﺧﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻗﺭﺹ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﺫﻛﺎ ًء ﻭﺗﻁﻭﺭً ﺍ ﻭﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺳﻠﻭﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﻙ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻟﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪C‬‬
‫●‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫● ﺗﻧﻁﺑﻕ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺻﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺫﻱ ﺍﻟﺻﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫●‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫●‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۸۲‬‬
‫●‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ ]ﺗﺧﻔﻳﺽ ﺗﺷﻭﻳﺵ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﻁﻭﻳﻝ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [ON‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ [AUTO‬ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﻣﺩﺗﻬﺎ ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺃﻗﻝ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﻳﺣﺩﺙ ﺗﺄﺧﻳﺭ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﺑﺳﺑﺏ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺟﺔ ﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻭﻳﺵ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺳﺭﻋﺎﺕ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺑﻁﻳﺋﺔ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ‪ ،‬ﻳﻧﺑﻐﻲ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ )= ‪.(۷۸‬‬
‫ﺗﺑﻠﻎ ﺃﻗﺻﻰ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪ 1/200‬ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻛﺑﺭ‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺈﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ 1/200‬ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺷﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺗﻘﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻘﻳﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﺗﺟﺎﻭﺯ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻗﻳﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ )= ‪.(۸۸‬‬
‫● ]‬
‫[‪ :‬ﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻗﻳﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ )ﻧﻣﻁ ]‪([Av‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻣﺭﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﻋﻣﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺿﻠﺔ ﻟﻙ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪ .‬ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‬
‫ﻟﺗﻧﺎﺳﺏ ﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻙ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﻗﻳﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪/ Auto‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺩﺧﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻗﺭﺹ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪C‬‬
‫● ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ]‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻟﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺗﺷﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺗﻘﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺃﻥ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﺗﺟﺎﻭﺯ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ‬
‫ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ )= ‪.(۸۸‬‬
‫● ﺍﻟﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﻗﺻﻰ ﻟﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻫﻭ ‪ 1/200‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﺗﻐﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻟﺿﻣﺎﻥ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﻋﻥ ‪ 1/200‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۸۳‬‬
‫● ]‬
‫[‪ :‬ﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ )ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻐﺷﺎء ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ(‬
‫ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻣﻔﺗﻭﺣﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ .‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﺗﻐﻳﺭ ﺣﺟﻣﻬﺎ ﺇﻻ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻋﺎﺟﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻟﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﻳﺑﺩﻭ ﻋﻣﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﺎﻝ ﺃﺿﻳﻕ )ﺃﻗﻝ ﻋﻣ ًﻘﺎ( ﻋﻧﺩ ﻋﺭﺿﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﺃﺿّﻑ ] [ )ﻣﺭﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﻋﻣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺟﺎﻝ( ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )= ‪ (۸۹‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺹ ﻟﻣﻌﺎﻳﻧﺔ ﻋﻣﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺭﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ ﻭﻗﻳﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ]‪([M‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪/ Auto‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪C‬‬
‫‪۸٤‬‬
‫˼‬
‫˻‬
‫˽‬
‫˾‬
‫˺‬
‫●‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻟﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ )‪.(۱‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ )‪(۲‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ ،(۳) ISO‬ﺛﻡ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ] [ ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻗﻳﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺩﺧﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ]‬
‫● ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ]‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫●‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻗﺭﺹ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫●‬
‫ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻟﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﻭﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺿﻠﺔ ﻟﻙ ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺳﺭﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ“ )= ‪ .(۱۹۲‬ﺗﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﻗﻳﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫●‬
‫ﺑﻌﺩ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﻭﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﻐﻳﺭ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ‬
‫ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ ،ISO‬ﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﻐﻳﺭ ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻳﻅﻝ ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻭﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ ،[AUTO‬ﻳﺗﻐﻳﺭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻟﻣﻼءﻣﺔ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‬
‫ﻭﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺃﺟﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﻻ ﺗﺣﺻﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﻣُﺣﺳﻥ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )= ‪ (٦٤‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ‬
‫]‬
‫[ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣُﺣﺳﻥ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺃﺿﻑ ] [ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﻳﺩﻭﻱ[ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﺳﺗﻣﺭ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻣُﺣﺳﻥ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ[ ﻓﻲ ] [ ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ ،ISO‬ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ )‪ ،(٥‬ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻘﻳﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺅﺷﺭ‬
‫ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻟﻣﻘﺎﺭﻧﺗﻬﺎ ﺑﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺳﻳﺔ )‪ .(٤‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﺟﺎﻭﺯ ﺍﻧﺣﺭﺍﻑ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﻧﻘﻁﺗﻲ ﺗﻭﻗﻑ‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﺗﺗﻡ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﻣﺅﺷﺭ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ] [ ﺃﻭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ ،[AUTO‬ﻳﺅﺩﻱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ISO‬‬
‫ﻭﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﺍﻟﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﻭﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺗﻳﻥ‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫] [‪ :‬ﻳﺩﻭﻱ‬
‫ﻳﻌﺗﻣﺩ ﺣﺳﺎﺏ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ )= ‪.(٦۲‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ] [ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ]‬
‫[ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ )= ‪.(۸۹‬‬
‫ﻓﻳﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﺍﻹﺟﺭﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﻓﺭﺓ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[AUTO‬‬
‫ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻗﺭﺹ ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬‫‪ -‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﻟﻘﻔﻝ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻭﺿﺑﻁ ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺇﺧﺭﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﻁﻭﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﻳﺣﺎﻓﻅ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﻁﻭﻳﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻘﺎء ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﻣﻔﺗﻭﺣً ﺎ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪/ Auto‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﻁﻭﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺗﻳﻥ ‪ ۱‬ﻭ‪ ۲‬ﻓﻲ ﺳﺭﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ ﻭﻗﻳﻡ‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ )ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ]‪ (۸٤ =) ([M‬ﻭﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.[BULB‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺳﺗﻣﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﻁﺎﻟﻣﺎ ﺍﺳﺗﻣﺭ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺯﻣﻥ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻘﺿﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪LCD‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﻟﻠﺿﻭء‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪C‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺗﺧﺫ ﺗﺩﺍﺑﻳﺭ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻟﻠﻣﺣﺎﻓﻅﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺛﺑﺎﺗﻬﺎ ﻭﻣﻧﻌﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﺍﻻﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻳﻧﺑﻐﻲ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻝ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻟﺗﺄﻣﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ )= ‪.(۷۸‬‬
‫● ﻧﻅﺭً ﺍ ﻹﺻﺩﺍﺭ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ ﺗﺷﻭﻳ ًﺷﺎ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺗﺎﺩ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﺗﺑﺩﻭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﺣﺑﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻭﺟﺩ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﻟﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻭﻳﺵ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺿﺑﻁ ]ﺗﺧﻔﻳﺽ ﺗﺷﻭﻳﺵ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﻁﻭﻳﻝ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪[AUTO‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ ]‪.(۸۰ =) [ON‬‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑُﻌﺩ )ﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻝ( ﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ )= ‪.(۱٥۲‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﻔﻼﺵ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ]‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫[ ﻭ]‬
‫[ ﻭ]‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﻓﻼﺵ ﻳﺩﻭﻱ[‪.‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺣﺩﺩ ]ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ[‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪ .[ 3‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﻓﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ]ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﻣﻳﺽ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﻓﻼﺵ ﻳﺩﻭﻱ[‬
‫)= ‪.(۳۲‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﻭﻗﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺭ‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﺑﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ]‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺍﻛﺗﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺧﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫[‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺣﺩ‬
‫[‪ :‬ﻣﺗﻭﺳﻁ‪] ،‬‬
‫] [‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ‪] ،‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻗﺻﻰ‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ )= ‪ ،(۳۲‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪ ،[ 3‬ﺛﻡ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ]ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ[ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ[‬
‫ﻭﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]‬
‫ﺇﺧﺭﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ[ )= ‪ (۳۲‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻝ‪.‬‬‫ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬‫[ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ ]ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻣﺱ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ[‪ ،‬ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﺩء ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ .‬ﺗﻭﺥ ﺍﻟﺣﺫﺭ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻻ ﺗﻬﺗﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﺭ ﻓﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪۸٥‬‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ[ )= ‪ (۳۲‬ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‬
‫ﺛﻡ ﻟﻣﺱ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺳﺭﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ ﻭﻗﻳﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪/ Auto‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺿﻠﺔ ﻭﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻭﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ .ISO‬ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺳﺭﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ“ )= ‪ .(۱۹۲‬ﺗﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﻗﻳﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ‬
‫ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺩﺧﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻗﺭﺹ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ] [ )= ‪.(۳۱‬‬
‫[ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪C‬‬
‫● ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ]‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫● ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻭﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ ،ISO‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫] [‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ] [‬
‫ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۸٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ ،ISO‬ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻘﻳﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻣﺅﺷﺭ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻟﻣﻘﺎﺭﻧﺗﻬﺎ ﺑﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﺟﺎﻭﺯ ﺍﻧﺣﺭﺍﻑ‬
‫ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﻧﻘﻁﺗﻲ ﺗﻭﻗﻑ‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﺗﺗﻡ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﻣﺅﺷﺭ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫] [ ﺃﻭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ ،[AUTO‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ ﻟﻌﺭﺽ‬
‫ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪ . .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﺍﻟﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‬
‫ﻭﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺗﻳﻥ‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﻳﺗﺣﺭﻙ ﻣﺅﺷﺭ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻟﺗﻭﺿﻳﺢ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻻﻧﺣﺭﺍﻑ‪ . .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﺟﺎﻭﺯ ﺍﻧﺣﺭﺍﻑ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﻧﻘﻁﺗﻲ ﺗﻭﻗﻑ‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﺗﺗﻡ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻣﺅﺷﺭ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ] [ ﺃﻭ ] [‬
‫● ﺗﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ ISO 3200 – ISO 100 .‬ﻣﻊ ﻧﺳﺑﺔ‬
‫[ ﺃﻭ ]‬
‫[ ﺃﻭ ]‬
‫ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ]‬
‫[‪ ISO 6400 – ISO 100 ،‬ﻣﻊ‬
‫[ ﺃﻭ ]‬
‫[ ﺃﻭ ]‬
‫[ ﺃﻭ ]‬
‫ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻟﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﺩ ﺗﺑﺩﻭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻣﺿﺔ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻠﻭﺭﻳﺳﻧﺕ ﺃﻭ ‪ ،LED‬ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﻛﺑﻳﺭﺓ ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﻳﺳﺗﻐﺭﻕ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ ﻭﻗ ًﺗﺎ ﺃﻁﻭﻝ‪ ،‬ﻭﺭﺑﻣﺎ‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁﻪ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺳﻠﻳﻡ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﺳﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ] [] [ ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻟﻘﻔﻝ ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ‪ .‬ﻳﻅﻬﺭ ]‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]‬
‫[ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﻋﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺗﻳﻥ ‪ ۱‬ﻭ‪ ۲‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ“‬
‫)= ‪ (۸۷‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ]ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﺧﺻﺹ ‪ [1‬ﺃﻭ ]ﻋﺭﺽ‬
‫ﻣﺧﺻﺹ ‪ ،[2‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪/ Auto‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪C‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺿﻬﺎ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﺑﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫[ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ‬
‫[ ﻟﻠﺭﺟﻭﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫]ﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﻧﺗﻳﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪ ،[ 1‬ﻭﺣﺩﺩ ]ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻻﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ[‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ‬
‫] [ )= ‪.(۳۱‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ[‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ] [‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﻋﺭﺿﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ‬
‫] [ ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ] [‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﻠﻌﻭﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۸۷‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ] [‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﻋﺭﺿﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ] [ ﺇﻟﻳﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻧﻣﻭﺫﺝ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺽ ﺑﺎﻟﺟﺎﻧﺏ ﺍﻷﻳﺳﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻣﻌﺎﻳﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺷﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺳﻳﺑﺩﻭ ﻋﻠﻳﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.۲‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ] [ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ] [ ﺇﻟﻰ ]ﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺳﺭﻳﻊ ﺑـ ‪.[INFO.‬‬
‫● ﺍﻧﺗﻘﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ]ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ[ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪1‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﻧﺗﻘﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ]ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ[ ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪ [ 1‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺭﺳﻡ ﺗﻭﺿﻳﺣﻲ[‬
‫ﻟﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺿﻳﺣﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺽ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺿﻳﺣﻲ ﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺭﺳﻡ‬
‫ﺗﻭﺿﻳﺣﻲ ﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ ‪.RGB‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪/ Auto‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪C‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۸۸‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻁﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺗﻳﺢ ﻟﻙ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪ [ 1‬ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ )= ‪ (۳۲‬ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻧﻭﻋﺔ ﺑﻣﺎ ﻳﻧﺎﺳﺏ‬
‫ﺗﻔﺿﻳﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪ .‬ﻛﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﺗﺗﻡ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﺗﻛﺭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﻭﻗﺭﺹ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻭﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺗﻣﺩﻳﺩ ‪ISO‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫]‪.(۳۲ =) [ 1‬‬
‫[ ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﺿﻭﺋﻲ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ] [‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ )ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﺧﺭﻯ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫[ ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺻﻳﻥ ] []‬
‫ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ]‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[]‬
‫[ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ]‬
‫[ ﻟﻠﻌﻭﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫[‬
‫ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻧﻁﻼﻕ ﺷﻌﺎﻉ )‪(LED‬‬
‫ﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩﺓ ‪AF‬‬
‫ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ ﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ‬
‫ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﻋﺩﺳﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻑ‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪:1‬ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ[‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ]‪ .ISO [H‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ] [ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺎﻓﺊ‬
‫ﻟﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ ،ISO 25600‬ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ]‪ [H‬ﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﻣﺔ‬
‫[‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺎﻓﺋﺔ ﻟﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪]) ISO 6400‬‬
‫[( ﺃﻭ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ‬
‫[ ﺃﻭ ]‬
‫ﺃﻭ ]‬
‫[‬
‫[ ﺃﻭ ]‬
‫‪]) ISO 12800‬‬
‫[ ﺃﻭ ]‬
‫]‬
‫[(‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪:1‬ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ[‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﺍﻟﺣﺻﻭﻝ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‬
‫[‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ ﻭﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ]‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺗﻐﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﻭﻗﻳﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ]‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻗﺭﺏ ﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪:1‬ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ[‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻧﻁﻠﻕ‬
‫‪-AF‬ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﺗﻛﺭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﻭﻗﺭﺹ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻭﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ‬
‫)= ‪.(۸۹‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪:1‬ﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ[‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻻﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﺣﺗﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺇﻣﻛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺗﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪/ Auto‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫●‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ )‪ [(C.Fn‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ،۱‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ‬
‫ﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭﻫﺎ ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪ [ 1‬ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺗﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺭﻏﻡ ﻣﻥ ﺿﺑﻁ ]ﺗﻣﺩﻳﺩ ‪ [ISO‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪:1‬ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ[‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ]‪ [H‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ‬
‫]ﺃﻭﻟﻭﻳﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﻭﻥ ﺳﺎﻁﻊ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪.(٦٤ =) [D+‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻧﻁﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻟﻭﻥ ‪-AF‬ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩ ﻓﺎﺗﺣً ﺎ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ )ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ(‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﺿﻲء ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺗﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﻟﻠﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻳﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺩﻋﻡ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ]ﺗﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ[‪.‬‬
‫ ‪EF 40mm f/2.8 STM‬‬‫‪EF-S 24mm f/2.8 STM -‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪C‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۸۹‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ‪ /‬ﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺻﺎﻥ ]‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫[ ﺃﻭ‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫] [ )ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [( ﺃﻭ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ‬
‫[‬
‫] [] [] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺻﻳﻥ ] []‬
‫ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﻭﺍﻷﻗﺭﺍﺹ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[ ‪ ،[ ] /‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪ [ ] /‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ]‬
‫[ ﻭ] [ ﻭ)] [( ﻭﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﺗﻛﺭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ]‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺗﻳﻥ ‪ ۱‬ﻭ‪ ۲‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻁﻭﺭﺓ“ )= ‪ (۸۸‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ ﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ[‬
‫ﻣﻥ ]ﺃﺧﺭﻯ[‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ] [] [] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ‬
‫[ ﻟﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺇﻟﻳﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ‬
‫] []‬
‫] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪] /‬‬
‫[ ‪ ،[ ] /‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ]‬
‫]‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ] [ ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ‬
‫[] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ‬
‫ﻳﺗﻳﺢ ﻟﻙ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ ،AF/AE‬ﻋﺩﻡ ﻗﻔﻝ ‪ ،[AE‬ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ‬
‫ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﻗﻔﻝ ‪ AE‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪ .‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺯﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ‪ ،‬ﺗﻠﺗﻘﻁ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ‪.‬‬
‫[‬
‫[‪]/‬‬
‫[ ﻟﻠﻌﻭﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫[‬
‫[‬
‫ﻳﺗﻳﺢ ﻟﻙ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ [Av/Tv‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ]‬
‫ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻭﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ] [ ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ] [‪.‬‬
‫[‬
‫] [ )ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [(‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻹﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻳﻥ ﻟﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫●‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫●‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪/ Auto‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫●‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪C‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫●‬
‫[ ﻭﺯﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ‬
‫[ ﻭﺍﻟﺯﺭ )] [(]‬
‫ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫]‬
‫[ ﻭ] [ ﻭ] [ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺍﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻧﺕ ﻻ ﺗﺭﻏﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[ ﻭﺍﻟﺯﺭ )] [(] [ ﻭﺯﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﺎﺧﺗﺭ ]‬
‫[ ﻭ] [ ﻭ] [ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺍﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺷﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﻣﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﺑـ ] [ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[ ﻭﺍﻟﺯﺭ )] [(] [ ﻭﺯﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ] [ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻔﻅ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺯﺍﻣﻥ‬
‫ﻟﺻﻭﺭ ‪ RAW‬ﻓﻲ ﻛﻝ ﻣﺭﺓ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻓﻳﻪ ﻋﻠﻳﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ] [ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ ﻋﻧﺩ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻳﻪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻳﺢ ﻟﻙ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻧﺔ ﻋﻣﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ] [ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﺗﺧﺗﻔﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ‪ .‬ﻗﻡ‬
‫ﺑﺗﻧﻔﻳﺫ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻹﺟﺭﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻻﺳﺗﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﺯﺭ ﺑﺧﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪ON/OFF‬‬‫ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﻗﺭﺹ ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺭﺹ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺻﺎﻥ ] []‬‫[‬
‫ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻻﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺭﺃﺳﻲ‪/‬ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ ﻟﻠﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬‫ ﻓﺗﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻏﻼﻗﻬﺎ‬‫‪ -‬ﻓﺗﺢ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﻭﺇﺩﺍﺭﺗﻬﺎ ﻟﻸﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻣﺎﻣًﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺗﻬﺎ ﻟﻸﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻣﺎﻣًﺎ‬
‫ﺣﻔﻅ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ )ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ]‪([C‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺣﻔﻅ ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﺗﻛﺭﺭ ﻭﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﻳﺄﺓ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﻭﺻﻭﻝ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻔﻭﻅﺔ ﻻﺣ ًﻘﺎ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻳﻙ ﺳﻭﻯ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﻗﺭﺹ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ] [‪ .‬ﺣﺗﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺗﻡ‬
‫ﻣﺳﺣﻬﺎ ﻋﺎﺩ ًﺓ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ )ﻣﺛﻝ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ( ﻳﻣﻛﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺣﺗﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺑﻬﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺣﻔﻅﻬﺎ‬
‫● ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ )] [ ﻭ]‬
‫[ ﻭ]‬
‫[ ﻭ]‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻧﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ] [ ﻭ]‬
‫[(‬
‫[ ﻭ]‬
‫[ ﻭ]‬
‫[ )= ‪(۸٤ = – ٦۱‬‬
‫● ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫● ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺗﻲ )= ‪(۹۱‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ‬
‫ﺣﻔﻅﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﺭﻏﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﻣﺧﺻﺹ )‪ [(C‬ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪ ،[ 4‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺳﺟّ ﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ]‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺄﻛﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ] [ ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫‪۹۰‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫● ﻟﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻔﻭﻅﺔ )ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺛﻧﺎء ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﻬﺎ(‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﻭﻏﻳّﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﻛﺭّ ﺭ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺗﻳﻥ ‪ ۲‬ﻭ‪ .۳‬ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻫﺫﻩ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪/ Auto‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪C‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫● ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻔﻭﻅﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ[ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ،۲‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪1‬‬
‫)= ‪.(۳۲‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺗﻲ[‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ] [‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻋﻧﺎﺻﺭ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ] [‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻋﻧﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ ﺣﻔﻅﻪ )ﺑﺣﺩ ﺃﻗﺻﻰ ﺳﺗﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻧﺎﺻﺭ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﻟﺣﻔﻅﻪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫● ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺣﻔﻅ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫] [ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺫﻟﻙ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۹۱‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺣﻔﻅ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺳﺗﺔ ﻋﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺷﺎﺋﻌﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ‬
‫]‪ .[ 1‬ﻳﺗﻳﺢ ﻟﻙ ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪ [ 1‬ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﺭﺩﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺣﻔﻅ ﻋﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺷﺎﺋﻌﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ )ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺗﻲ(‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫[‪ .‬ﻟﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪/ Auto‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪C‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺃﻋﺩ ﺗﺭﺗﻳﺏ ﻋﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﺯﻡ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ]‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻓﺭﺯ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫[‬
‫● ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻋﻧﺻﺭ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﻟﻧﻘﻠﻪ )ﺇﻣﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ‬
‫] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ] [(‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ‬
‫] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ]‬
‫ﻟﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺗﻳﺏ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻭﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺎﺩﻱ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ،۲‬ﻟﻛﻧﻬﺎ ﻗﺩ ﻻ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺽ ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﻠﺗﻣﻛﻥ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺗﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﻉ ﺍﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻳﺔ[ ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﻧﻌﻡ[‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۹۲‬‬
‫● ﻣﻥ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻋﻧﺎﺻﺭ[ ﻟﺣﻔﻅ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻣﻥ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]ﻓﺭﺯ[‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﻟﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺗﺭﺗﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‪.‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪/ Auto‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺩ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻋﺭﺿﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺩﺧﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺁﺧﺭ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻟﻠﺩﺧﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪C‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﻣﺗﻊ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﻌﺭﺍﺽ ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺗﻙ ﻭﺗﺻﻔﺣﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭﻫﺎ ﺑﻌﺩﺓ ﻁﺭﻕ‬
‫● ﻟﺗﺟﻬﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻟﻬﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‬
‫● ﻗﺩ ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪/‬ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻣﺕ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺳﻣﻳﺗﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭﻫﺎ ﻣﻥ ﻗﺑﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺗﻘﻁﺔ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺻﻭﺭً ﺍ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ] [ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻛﺱ ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻌﺭﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ‬
‫] [ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻻﺳﺗﻌﺭﺍﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫● ﻟﻠﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ )ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻗﺻﺎﺻﺎﺕ(‪،‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ] [ ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ] [‪ ،‬ﻻﺳﺗﻌﺭﺍﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﻠﻌﻭﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﻔﺭﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫● ﻻﺳﺗﻌﺭﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺟﻣﻳﻌﻬﺎ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻣﻁ‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺻﺎﺻﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺭﻣﺯ ]‬
‫ﺍﻧﺗﻘﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.۳‬‬
‫‪۹۳‬‬
‫[‪ .‬ﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪،‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺳﻳﺔ‬
‫● ﻟﺑﺩء ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ‬
‫] [ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫˺‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۹٤‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻣﺅﻗ ًﺗﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ]‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻣﺅﻗ ًﺗﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺗﺋﻧﺎﻓﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ‬
‫] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪C‬‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫[]‬
‫[ ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﺅﺷﺭ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ )‪ (۱‬ﻣﺧﻔﻳًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] []‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪/ Auto‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫● ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺣﺏ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻳﻣﻳﻥ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻳﺳﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻋﺑﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ؛ ﻭﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺣﺏ ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻳﺳﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻳﻣﻳﻥ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻧﺗﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻣﻥ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺻﺎﺻﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪ ،(۳۲ =) MENU‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ <‬
‫]‪3‬‬
‫[ < ]ﻋﺭﺽ ﻗﺻﺎﺻﺎﺕ[ < ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺃﺣﺩﺙ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺩﺧﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪،(۳۲ =) MENU‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ < ]‪3‬‬
‫[‪] < ،‬ﺍﺳﺗﺋﻧﺎﻑ[ < ]ﺁﺧﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ[‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻘﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺽ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪،(۳۲ =) MENU‬‬
‫ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪3‬‬
‫[ < ]ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﺍﻧﺗﻘﺎﻝ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﻠﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻗﺻﺎﺻﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺣﺏ ﺳﺭﻳﻌًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻳﺳﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻳﻣﻳﻥ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﺗﻛﺭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻗﺻﺎﺻﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺳﺣﺏ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻳﺳﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻳﻣﻳﻥ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺳﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻛﺯﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺳﺗﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺭﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺭﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻﺳﺗﻌﺭﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻣﻌﺔ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻗﺻﺎﺻﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺣﺏ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺳﻔﻝ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﺑﺩء ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻓﻳﻠﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]‬
‫”ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ“ )= ‪.(۹٤‬‬
‫[ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۳‬ﻣﻥ‬
‫● ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺣﺏ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺳﻔﻝ ﺳﺭﻳﻌًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪/ Auto‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫● ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻫﺫﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺟﺎﻫﺯﺓ ﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ] [ ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ‬‫] [] [ ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ ﻟﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﺭﻳﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺣﺏ ﻟﻠﻳﺳﺎﺭ‬‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻳﻣﻳﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ ﻻﺳﺗﺋﻧﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]‬‫[‪.‬‬
‫ ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ] [ ﻟﻠﻌﻭﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﺣﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۲‬ﻓﻲ‬‫”ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ“ )= ‪.(۹۳‬‬
‫ﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‬
‫[ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻟﻠﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺑﻳﻥ ﻋﺩﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ‪۱‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ( ﻭﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ‪) ۲‬ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ(‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﺑﺭ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺑﺄﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﺧﻼﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪C‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺑﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻝ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ“ )= ‪.(۱۷٥‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺣﺩﺩ ]ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ[ ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ‬
‫[ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫]‪4‬‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﻋﺭﺿﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ] [‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‬
‫ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ] [ ﺇﻟﻳﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫● ﻟﻠﻌﻭﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫● ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻧﻣﻭﺫﺝ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺽ ﺑﺎﻟﺟﺎﻧﺏ ﺍﻷﻳﺳﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻣﻌﺎﻳﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺷﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺳﻳﺑﺩﻭ ﻋﻠﻳﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.۲‬‬
‫● ﺿﻊ ] [ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ‪ [2‬ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ] [‪ .‬ﻋﻧﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ] [ ﻭﻳﻠﻳﻬﺎ ]ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ‪.[2‬‬
‫‪۹٥‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﺫﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﺭﺗﻔﻌﺔ )ﻷﺟﺯﺍء ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﻁﻌﺔ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻭﻣﺽ ﺍﻷﺟﺯﺍء ﺍﻟﺳﺎﻁﻌﺔ ﻗﻠﻳﻼً ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ‪ ۲‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.(۹٥ =) ٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫● ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺗﻲ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ٦-۲‬ﻋﺑﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻥ ﺭﺳﻡ ﺗﻭﺿﻳﺣﻲ ﻳﺑﻳّﻥ ﺗﻭﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﺛﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻭﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻣﺛﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﺃﺳﻲ ﻣﻘﺩﺍﺭ ﻛﻝ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﻌﺩ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺿﻳﺣﻲ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪/ Auto‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﻠﺧﺻﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺭﺳﻡ ﺗﻭﺿﻳﺣﻲ ﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ ‪RGB‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫● ﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ‪ ۳‬ﻋﺭﻭﺽ ﻟﻠﺭﺳﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺿﻳﺣﻲ ﻷﻟﻭﺍﻥ ‪ RGB‬ﺣﻳﺙ ﺗﻭﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻅﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻣﺭ ﻭﺍﻷﺧﺿﺭ ﻭﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺣﺩﻯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﺛﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻭﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ ‪ R‬ﺃﻭ ‪ G‬ﺃﻭ ‪،B‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﻣﺛﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﺃﺳﻲ ﻣﻘﺩﺍﺭ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺗﻳﺢ ﻟﻙ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺿﻳﺣﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﺧﺻﺎﺋﺹ ﻟﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫[ )= ‪ (۳۷‬ﻓﻲ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﻳﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻣﻳﻳﺯﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺭﻣﺯ ]‬
‫[ ﺗﻡ‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ﻣﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺭﻣﺯ ]‬
‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺭﺳﻡ ﺗﻭﺿﻳﺣﻲ ﻟﻠﺳﻁﻭﻉ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪C‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺻﻳﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺇﻧﺷﺎﺅﻫﺎ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫)ﻣﻠﺧﺻﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ(‬
‫[‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫)= ‪.(۳۱‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬
‫[ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻣﻘﻁﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻳﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﻡ ﻓﻳﻪ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﺩﺍﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺩ ﻟﺣﻅﺔ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ]‬
‫ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ )= ‪.(۹٥‬‬
‫[ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﻊ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۹٦‬‬
‫● ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ‪ ٦ – ۲‬ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ[ ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪4‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ‬
‫]‪ ،[RGB‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪ .‬ﻭﺑﻌﺩﺋﺫٍ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺿﻳﺣﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ‬
‫ﺃﺳﻔﻝ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ‪.۳‬‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺿﻳﺣﻲ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ )= ‪.(۱۷٤‬‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻁﻊ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻣﺱ ]‬
‫]‬
‫[ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.۲‬‬
‫[ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۱‬ﻭﻟﻣﺱ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪/ Auto‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﻌﺭﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻭﺗﺭﺷﻳﺣﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﻠﺧﺹ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻓﻳﻠﻣًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺇﺩﺭﺍﺝ‪/‬ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ‬
‫ﻣﻠﺧﺻﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ[ ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪1‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ )= ‪.(۳۲‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪C‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫[ ﻟﺑﺩء ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻋﺩﺓ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻓﻬﺭﺱ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﻌﺛﻭﺭ ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺑﺣﺙ ﻋﻧﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻧﻘﻝ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻓﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻓﻬﺭﺱ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻓﻬﺭﺱ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻳﻪ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻟﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺃﻗﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺃﻗﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﻊ ﻛﻝ ﺿﻐﻁﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ]‬
‫[ ﻟﻠﺗﻧﻘﻝ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ] [] []‬
‫[]‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﺑﺭﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺭﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۹۷‬‬
‫● ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺛﻼﺛﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ )ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺿﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ] [ ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪< (۳۲ =) MENU‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪3‬‬
‫[ < ]ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ[ < ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺳﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺇﻳﺟﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ‬
‫● ﻗﺭﺏ ﺇﺻﺑﻌﻳﻙ ﻣﻥ ﺑﻌﺿﻬﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﺑﻌﺽ ﻟﻠﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﻣﻥ ﻋﺭﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺭﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫● ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺯﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﻐﺭﺓ ﻟﻛﻝ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺭﺏ‬
‫ﺇﺻﺑﻌﻳﻙ ﻣﻥ ﺑﻌﺿﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺑﻌﺽ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫● ﺍﺳﺣﺏ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺳﻔﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﻣﺭﻳﺭ ﺧﻼﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪/ Auto‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪C‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫● ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﺻﻐﺭﺓ ﺃﻗﻝ ﻟﻛﻝ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﺑﻌﺩ ﺇﺻﺑﻌﻳﻙ ﻋﻥ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺿﻬﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﺑﻌﺽ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﻬﺎ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻟﻌﺭﺿﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺭﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﺑﺣﺙ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺑﺔ ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻣﻣﺗﻠﺋﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺭﺷﻳﺢ ﻋﺭﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻙ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ )= ‪ (۱۰۲‬ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺳﺣﻬﺎ‬
‫)= ‪ (۱۰٥‬ﺟﻣﻳﻌﻬﺎ ﺩﻓﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺻﻧﻳﻑ‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺗﺻﻧﻳﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻌﻳﻧﺔ )= ‪.(۱۰۸‬‬
‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻣﻌﻳﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﺎﺱ‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺃﻭﺟﻪ ﻣﻛﺗﺷﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‪/‬ﻓﻳﻠﻡ‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ‬
‫] [ )= ‪.(۳۷‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﻧﻘﻝ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ] [ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ‬
‫] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ] [ ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺷﺣﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﻘﻳﺎﻡ ﺑﺈﺟﺭﺍء‬
‫ﻣﻌﻳﻥ ﻟﻛﻝ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﻌًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻧﺗﻘﻝ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.۳‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﻭﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺛﻭﺭ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ] [ ﺃﻭ ] [ ﺃﻭ ] [ ﻟﻠﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺃﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ] [ ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺛﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﻠﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﺭﺷﺣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ‬
‫] [‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻧﺗﻘﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.۳‬‬
‫‪۹۸‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻙ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺇﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺻﻔﺭﺍء‪ .‬ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻓﻘﻁ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺷﺣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﻟﻠﺗﻧﻘﻝ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫● ﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺷﺣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﻭﺣﺩﺩ ] [ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫[‪،‬‬
‫ﺗﺧﻁﻲ ‪ ۱۰‬ﺻﻭﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻝ ﻣﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪/ Auto‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺩﻡ ﻋﺛﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻟﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻻﺕ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪C‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫●‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺗﺻﻧﻳﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻌﻳﻧﺔ )= ‪.(۱۰۸‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻭﻝ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻝ ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺗﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺫﺍﺗﻪ‪.‬‬
‫●‬
‫[ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.۲‬‬
‫ﻹﺧﻔﺎء ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺭﺿﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﺗﺗﺿﻣﻥ ﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ )ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪” (۳‬ﺍﻟﺗﻧﻘﻝ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻓﻬﺭﺱ“ )= ‪ (۹۷‬ﻭ”ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ“ )= ‪ (۱۰۰‬ﻭ”ﻋﺭﺽ ﻋﺭﻭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﺍﺋﺢ“ )= ‪.(۱۰۱‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺑﺣﺙ[ ﻓﻲ ”ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ“ )= ‪ (۱۰۲‬ﺃﻭ ”ﻣﺳﺢ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩﺓ ﺩﻓﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ“‬
‫)= ‪ (۱۰٥‬ﺃﻭ ”ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ )‪ (۱٦٤ =) “(DPOF‬ﺃﻭ ]ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻛﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺑﺣﺙ[ ﻓﻲ ”ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻟﺑﻭﻡ ﺻﻭﺭ“ )= ‪.(۱٦٦‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻭﺣﻔﻅﻬﺎ ﻛﺻﻭﺭ ﺟﺩﻳﺩﺓ )= ‪ ،(۱۱۲ = – ۱۰۹‬ﻓﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﻟﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺛﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻭﺣﺩﺩ ]ﺑﺣﺙ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ[ ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪1‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[ ﻟﻠﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ‬
‫ﺫﺍﺗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺧﻁﻲ ‪ ۱۰۰‬ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻝ ﻣﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺇﺣﺩﻯ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻻﺕ )ﺃﻭ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺧﻁﻲ( ﻓﻲ ﻋﺭﺽ‬
‫[ ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺭﺩﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻙ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺧﻁﻳﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﻘﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﺣﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫● ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ]‬
‫ﻓﻘﻁ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺧﻁﻲ ﺣﺳﺏ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺗﻳﻥ ‪ ۱‬ﻭ‪.۲‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۹۹‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ] [ ﻭ] [ ﻭ] [ ﻭ] [ ﻭ] [ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﻁﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﻟﻛﻝ ﺗﺻﻧﻳﻑ‪ .‬ﻳﺗﻡ‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ] [ ﻭ] [ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﺃﻱ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺗﻡ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺗﺻﻧﻳﻔﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻳﺢ ﻟﻙ ] [ ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺿﻠﺔ ﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻧﻳﻔﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺳﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ]‬
‫[ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﺳﺗﻌﺭﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺧﻁﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺧﻁﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺗﺎﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺭﺩﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺎﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ] [ ﺃﻭ ] [‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺳﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺍﻟﺗﺧﻁﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﺣﺳﺏ‬
‫ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺧﻁﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۱‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﻟﻠﺗﻧﻘﻝ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ“ )= ‪ (۹۹‬ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺳﺣﺏ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻳﺳﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻳﻣﻳﻥ ﺑﺈﺻﺑﻌﻳﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪/ Auto‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑﻲ ﻟﻠﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ )‪(۱‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺭﺟﻭﻉ ﺇﻟﻳﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪C‬‬
‫● ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﻌﻭﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺭﺩﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻭﺗﺿﺧﻳﻣﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻟﻣﺎ ﻳﺻﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪10x‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫˺‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺣﺭﻳﻙ ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻭﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺣﺳﺏ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺣﺎﺟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﺗﺣﺭﻳﻙ ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ‬
‫] [] [] [] [‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ] [ ﻟﻼﻧﺗﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﻠﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﻌﻭﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺭﺩﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣُﻛﺑﱠﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ‬
‫]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﻧﺗﻘﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ]ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ )ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑﻲ([ ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪4‬‬
‫[ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﻋﺭﺽ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﻔﺭﺩﺓ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﻣﺛﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﻳﺭ[‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ‬
‫]‬
‫[ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺑﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱۰۰‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺳﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﻋﺭﻭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﺍﺋﺢ‬
‫● ﺃﺑﻌﺩ ﺇﺻﺑﻌﻳﻙ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺿﻬﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﺑﻌﺽ )ﻓﺭﺩ ﺍﻹﺻﺑﻌﻳﻥ(‬
‫ﻟﻠﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺣﺗﻰ ‪ 10x‬ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﻛﺭﺍﺭ‬
‫ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻹﺟﺭﺍء‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫● ﻟﺗﺣﺭﻳﻙ ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺣﺏ ﺇﺻﺑﻌﻳﻙ ﻋﺑﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪/ Auto‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫● ﻗﺭﺏ ﺇﺻﺑﻌﻳﻙ ﻣﻥ ﺑﻌﺿﻬﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﺑﻌﺽ ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]‬
‫[ ﻻﺳﺗﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺭﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪1‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﻋﺭﺽ ﺷﺭﺍﺋﺢ[‬
‫[ )= ‪.(۳۲‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ]‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺍﺑﺩﺃ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫[‬
‫]ﺟﺎﺭ ﺗﺣﻣﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ[‬
‫● ﻳﺑﺩﺃ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﺍﺋﺢ ﺑﻌﺩ ﻋﺭﺽ‬
‫ٍ‬
‫ﺑﺛﻭﺍﻥ ﻗﻠﻳﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ٍ‬
‫[ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﺍﺋﺢ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺗﻭﻓﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ )= ‪ (۲۸‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﺍﺋﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪C‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫● ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﺍﺋﺢ ﻣﺅﻗ ًﺗﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺗﺋﻧﺎﻓﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ] [‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺗﻘﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻳﻊ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﺟﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻳﻊ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ‬
‫] [] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻋﺭﻭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﺍﺋﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺭﺍﺭ ﻭﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻘﺎﻝ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻭﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﺩﺓ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻛﻝ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ )= ‪.(۳۲‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۱۰۱‬‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻋﺭﻭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﺍﺋﺢ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪/ Auto‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻣﺔ ﻟﻣﻧﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﻌَ ﺭَ ﺿﻲ ﻟﻬﺎ )= ‪.(۱۰٥‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺩﺩ ]‬
‫[ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﺛﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ] [‪،‬‬
‫[‪ .‬ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻅﻬﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ ] [ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ ]‬
‫ﻭﻣﻥ ﺛﻡ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻣﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ )= ‪.(۱۳۸‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪C‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۱۰۲‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻣﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ .‬ﻟﻣﺳﺣﻬﺎ ﺑﻬﺫﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺃﻭﻻً ﺑﺈﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫[‪،‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[ )= ‪.(۳۲‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪1‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫[ ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ[ ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﺭﻏﺑﺔ )= ‪.(۳۲‬‬
‫● ﻟﻠﻌﻭﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪/ Auto‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻣﺩﻯ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻧﻔﺭﺩ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۲‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ“ )= ‪،(۱۰۲‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪ .‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫● ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ] [ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺫﻟﻙ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫● ﻛﺭّ ﺭ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪C‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫[‪ .‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺄﻛﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ]‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫[‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫● ﻟﻥ ﺗﺗﻡ ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺇﻧﻬﺎء‬
‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.۳‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۱۰۳‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ]‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﺩﺍﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪ .‬ﻟﻥ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۲‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ“ )= ‪،(۱۰۲‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﻯ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﻯ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ،۲‬ﻭﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﻛﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻣﺱ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻣﺱ ]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.۳‬‬
‫[‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺩﻓﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻧﺗﻬﺎء‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺁﺧﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۲‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ“ )= ‪،(۱۰۲‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪/ Auto‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪C‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ]‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫[‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻲ‬
‫ﻛﺂﺧﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺧﻳﺭﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ]‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺗﻳﻥ ‪ ۲‬ﻭ‪.۳‬‬
‫● ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﻓﺗﺢ[ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.٤‬‬
‫[ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۱۰٤‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ]‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫[‬
‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺩﻓﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺩﻓﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ[ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۱‬ﻣﻥ ”ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺩﻓﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ“‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﻛﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.۲‬‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺧﻳﺭﺓ ﻋﺑﺭ ﻟﻣﺱ ﺇﺣﺩﻯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۲‬ﺃﻭ ‪.۳‬‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻣﺱ ]ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.٤‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻣﺳﺢ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩﺓ ﺩﻓﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ‬
‫ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪/ Auto‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺿﺭﻭﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﻣﺳﺣﻬﺎ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‪ .‬ﻛﻥ ﺣﺫﺭً ﺍ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﻷﻧﻪ‬
‫ﻳﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﺍﺳﺗﺭﺩﺍﺩﻫﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻣﻳﺔ )= ‪.(۱۰۲‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﻣﺳﺣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ]‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫[‬
‫ﺍﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪C‬‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪1‬‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺩ ﻋﺭﺽ ]ﻣﺳﺢ؟[‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻣﺳﺢ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻋﺩﺓ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻟﻣﺳﺣﻬﺎ ﺩﻓﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ‪ .‬ﻛﻥ ﺣﺫﺭً ﺍ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﻷﻧﻪ ﻳﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﺍﺳﺗﺭﺩﺍﺩﻫﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻣﻳﺔ )= ‪.(۱۰۲‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﻣﺳﺢ[ ﻣﻥ‬
‫[ )= ‪.(۳۲‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ]‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻵﻥ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺢ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺇﻟﻐﺎء[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻟﻣﻠﻔﻲ ‪ RAW‬ﻭ‪ JPEG‬ﻟﻼﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺑﻳﻥ ]ﻣﺳﺢ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ]ﻣﺳﺢ ‪ [JPEG‬ﺃﻭ ]ﻣﺳﺢ‬
‫‪ .[JPEG +‬ﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺿﻝ ﻟﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫[‬
‫● ﻟﻠﻌﻭﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫[‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻧﻔﺭﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻣﺱ ]ﻣﺳﺢ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.۲‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۲‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ“ )= ‪،(۱۰٥‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۲‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻧﻔﺭﺩ“‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ )= ‪.[ ] (۱۰۳‬‬
‫● ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ] [ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺫﻟﻙ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪ .‬ﻟﻥ‬
‫● ﻛﺭّ ﺭ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱۰٥‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻣﺩﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[‪ .‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺄﻛﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ]‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫[‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۲‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ“ )= ‪،(۱۰٥‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﻯ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪/ Auto‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﻯ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻟﻣﻠﻔﻲ ‪ RAW‬ﻭ‪ ،JPEG‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻣﺳﺣﻬﻣﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺻﻭﺭً ﺍ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺗﻳﻥ ‪ ۲‬ﻭ‪ ۳‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻣﺩﻯ“ )= ‪(۱۰۳‬‬
‫ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻣﺳﺢ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪C‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۱۰٦‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺩﻓﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۲‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ“ )= ‪،(۱۰٥‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ]‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫[‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪/ Auto‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻭﺣﻔﻅﻬﺎ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[ )= ‪.(۳۲‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪1‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫)= ‪.(۳۱‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪C‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫[ ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ[ ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ] [ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ[‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ] [ ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ‬
‫] [ ﺃﻭ ] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﻣﻘﺩﺍﺭ ‪ ۹۰‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﻟﺗﺄﻛﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ]‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﻟﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﻣﻘﺩﺍﺭ ‪ ۹۰‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻳﻪ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﻟﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭﻫﺎ ﺑﻣﻘﺩﺍﺭ ‪ ۹۰‬ﻓﻲ ﻋﻛﺱ ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻳﻪ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﻟﺛﺔ ﻻﺳﺗﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻻﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﻠﻌﻭﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۱۰۷‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ]ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ )= ‪.(۱۰۸‬‬
‫[‬
‫● ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ،۲‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻟﻣﺱ ]‬
‫]‬
‫[ ﻟﻠﺭﺟﻭﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻟﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻣﺱ‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻧﻳﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﻧﺎ ًء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪3‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ[‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ )= ‪.(۳۲‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺻﻧﻳﻔﻬﺎ )ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ(‪ .‬ﺗﻧﻘﺳﻡ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ] [ ﻭ] [ ﻭ] [‬
‫ﻭ] [ ﻭ] [ ﻭ] [‪ .‬ﻳﺗﻳﺢ ﻟﻙ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻧﻳﻔﺎﺕ ﻗﺻﺭ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺗﻣﺗﻊ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻧﻳﻑ ﺫﺍﺗﻪ‪.‬‬
‫● ”ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ“ )= ‪” ،(۹۳‬ﻋﺭﺽ ﻋﺭﻭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﺍﺋﺢ“ )= ‪” ،(۱۰۱‬ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ“ )= ‪،(۱۰۲‬‬
‫”ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ“ )= ‪” ،(۱۰٥‬ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ )‪” ،(۱٦٤ =) “(DPOF‬ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻟﺑﻭﻡ ﺻﻭﺭ“ )= ‪(۱٦٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪/ Auto‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬
‫ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻧﻳﻑ )= ‪.(۳۱‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ )= ‪ (۱۰۷‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ]ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪ .‬ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻙ‪،‬‬
‫ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﻗﻡ‬
‫● ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻧﻳﻔﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻛﺭّ ﺭ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪C‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﺻﻧﻳﻑ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪1‬‬
‫[ ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﺻﻧﻳﻑ[ ﻣﻥ‬
‫[ )= ‪.(۳۲‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺻﻧﻳﻑ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ]‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻧﻳﻑ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱۰۸‬‬
‫[‪،‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﻛﻣﻝ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[‪ .‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺄﻛﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ]‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫[‬
‫● ﻳﺗﺎﺡ ﻓﻘﻁ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ )= ‪ (۱۱۲ = – ۱۰۹‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﻳﺔ ﺧﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪/ Auto‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫● ﻟﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺻﻧﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺇﻧﻬﺎء‬
‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.۳‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ،۲‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺗﺻﻧﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ]‬
‫[]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻟﻣﺱ ]‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﻅﻬﻭﺭ ]‬
‫] [ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻧﺕ ﺗﻔﺿﻝ ﺫﻟﻙ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻟﻣﺱ ]‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﻅﻬﻭﺭ ]‬
‫]‬
‫[ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻧﺕ ﺗﻔﺿﻝ ﺫﻟﻙ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﺑﺩﻻً ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ‬
‫[ ﺑﺩﻻً ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪C‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺣﺗﻔﻅ ﺑﻧﺳﺧﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﻌﺩﺩ ﺃﻗﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺑﻛﺳﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﺣﺟﻡ )= ‪.(۳۱‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫[ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺟﺩﻳﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺩ ﻋﺭﺽ ]ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺟﺩﻳﺩﺓ؟[‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ‬
‫] [] [‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ] [‪ ،‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪۱۰۹‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪/ Auto‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪C‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫[‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺟﺯء ﻣﻥ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻟﺣﻔﻅﻪ ﻛﻣﻠﻑ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﺳﺗﻘﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺗﻘﻁﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺑﻛﺳﻝ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻓﻲ ]‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺻﻭﺭ ‪.RAW‬‬
‫[ )= ‪.(٤۳‬‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ،۱‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ] [ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺑﻛﺳﻼﺕ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‪.‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬
‫[ )= ‪.(۳۱‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‬
‫[ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻬﺫﻳﺏ ﻭﻣﻭﺿﻌﻪ ﻭﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﺃﻭ ]‬
‫● ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ] [] []‬
‫[ ﻟﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻟﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫[]‬
‫● ﻟﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ]‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﺟﻡ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪2‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫[ ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﺟﻡ[ ﻣﻥ‬
‫[ )= ‪.(۳۲‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ]‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫● ﻟﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻹﻁﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ] [‪ .‬ﺗﺗﻧﻘﻝ ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺑﻳﻥ )] [] [] [] [( ﻓﻲ ﻛﻝ ﻣﺭﺓ ﻳﺗﻡ‬
‫ﻓﻳﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫[‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ]‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺣﺟﻡ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﻬﺫﻳﺑﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ]‬
‫[‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻛﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺟﺩﻳﺩﺓ ﻭﺍﺳﺗﻌﺭﺿﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۲‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ“ )= ‪.(۱۰۹‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۳‬ﻓﻲ‬
‫”ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ“ )= ‪.(۱۰۹‬‬
‫‪۱۱۰‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻵﻥ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻔﻭﻅﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﻌﺭﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺟﺩﻳﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ]‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻧﻌﻡ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻬﺫﻳﺏ‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ] [ ﻟﻠﺗﻧﻘﻝ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻡ ﺗﻬﺫﻳﺑﻬﺎ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﻡ ﺗﻬﺫﻳﺑﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫● ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪/ Auto‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪C‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻛﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺟﺩﻳﺩﺓ ﻭﺍﺳﺗﻌﺭﺿﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۱۱۱‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺗﻳﻥ ‪ ۲‬ﻭ‪ ۳‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ“ )= ‪.(۱۰۹‬‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺗﻘﻁﺔ ﺑﺩﻗﺔ ]‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺻﻭﺭ ‪.RAW‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻬﺫﻳﺏ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺗﻡ ﺗﻬﺫﻳﺑﻬﺎ ﻣﻥ ﻗﺑﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ”ﻣﺭﺷﺣﺎﺕ ﺇﺑﺩﺍﻋﻳﺔ“ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺗﻡ ﺗﻬﺫﻳﺑﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻭﺣﻔﻅﻬﺎ ﻛﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺟﺩﻳﺩﺓ‪] .‬‬
‫[ ﻭ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﻭ] [ ﻭ] [ ﻭ]‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫● ﺳﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﻬﺫﻳﺑﻬﺎ ﺑﻛﺳﻼﺕ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺃﻗﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻬﺫﻳﺑﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ،۳‬ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﻬﺫﻳﺑﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﺯﺍﻝ ﺑﺈﻣﻛﺎﻧﻙ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﻬﺫﻳﺏ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺣﺟﻡ ﻭﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۲‬ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺗﻬﺫﻳﺏ[‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪2‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﻭﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ )= ‪.(۳۱‬‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ،۲‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺳﺣﺑﻪ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﻔﺭﺩ ﺍﻹﺻﺑﻌﻳﻥ ﻭﺿﻣﻬﻣﺎ‬
‫)= ‪ (۱۰۱‬ﻟﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ،۲‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﻟﻣﺱ ] [ ﺃﻭ ] [ ﺃﻭ ] [ ﺃﻭ ] [ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫[ ﻭ] [ ﻭ]‬
‫[‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺷﺢ‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬
‫[ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺣﺩﺩ‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﻧﻣﻁ ] [‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ] [‪ ،‬ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺎﻳﻥ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﻧﻣﻁ ] [‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ] [‪ ،‬ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﻭﺝ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﻧﻣﻁ ] [ ﺃﻭ ] [‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ‬
‫] [] [‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ] [‪ ،‬ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﻗﻭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﻧﻣﻁ ] [‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ] [ ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺷﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﻧﻣﻁ ]‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ] [‪ ،‬ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﻧﻣﻁ ] [‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ]‬
‫[]‬
‫[ ﻟﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ‬
‫[ ﻟﻧﻘﻠﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪/ Auto‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻛﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺟﺩﻳﺩﺓ ﻭﺍﺳﺗﻌﺭﺿﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺗﻳﻥ ‪ ۲‬ﻭ‪ ۳‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ“ )= ‪.(۱۰۹‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻵﻥ ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺭﺍء ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺗﻘﻁﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺇﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺣﻭﻝ ﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﺗﺣﻭﻳﻝ ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺭﺃﺳﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ] [‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [] [ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ .۲‬ﻟﺗﺣﺭﻳﻙ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪ .‬ﻭﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [‪.‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ]ﻣﺭﺷﺣﺎﺕ ﺇﺑﺩﺍﻋﻳﺔ[‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﺫﻟﻙ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪ ،[ 1‬ﻭﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ،۱‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ] [ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭﻫﺎ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﺯﻡ‪ .‬ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ“ )= ‪.(۱۰۰‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪C‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ،۲‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﻭﺳﺣﺑﻪ ﻋﺑﺭ ﺍﻟﺟﺎﻧﺏ ﺍﻟﺳﻔﻠﻲ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺱ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺳﺣﺏ ﻋﺑﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺄﺛﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺭﺍء ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺣﻬﺎ ﻛﻣﻠﻑ ﻣﺳﺗﻘﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺭﺍء[‪.‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻥ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺭﺍء[ ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪.(۳۲ =) [ 2‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ]‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱۱۲‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺭﺍء‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﺣﻳﻧﺋ ٍﺫ ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻛﻣﻠﻑ ﺟﺩﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۳‬ﻓﻲ‬
‫”ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ“ )= ‪.(۱۰۹‬‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫[‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻛﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺟﺩﻳﺩﺓ ﻭﺍﺳﺗﻌﺭﺿﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ] [] [] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ‬
‫] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻣﻠﻑ ﺟﺩﻳﺩ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﻗﺩ ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺩﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺣﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﻛﺗﺎﺑﺔ ﻓﻭﻗﻳﺔ[ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.٤‬‬
‫ﻭﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻣﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺻﻭﺭ ‪ RAW‬ﺑﻬﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺭﺍء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻭﺭ ‪ JPEG‬ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻔﻭﻅﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺻﻭﺭ ‪ ،RAW‬ﻭﻟﻛﻥ‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻣﺱ ]ﻣﻠﻑ ﺟﺩﻳﺩ[ ﺃﻭ ]ﻛﺗﺎﺑﺔ ﻓﻭﻗﻳﺔ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.٤‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫˺‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻷﺟﺯﺍء ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﻗﺻﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ]‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﺣﻳﻧﺋ ٍﺫ ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﻛﻣﻠﻑ ﺟﺩﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● )‪ (۱‬ﻋﺑﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻥ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﻭ)‪ (۲‬ﻋﺑﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻥ‬
‫ﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪C‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫˻‬
‫[]‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]‬
‫[ ﺃﻭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻷﺟﺯﺍء ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻗﺻﻬﺎ )ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺭﻣﺯ‬
‫] [ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ] [ ﻟﺗﺣﺭﻳﻙ ] [‪ .‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﻘﺹ ﺑﺩﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ )ﻣﻥ‬
‫] [( ﺑﺎﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﺹ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﺑﺎﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﻧﻘﻝ ] [ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺁﺧﺭ ﺑﺧﻼﻑ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ] [‬
‫ﻓﻲ ] [‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻗﺹ ﺍﻟﺟﺯء ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺃﻗﺭﺏ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫] [ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻳﺳﺎﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﺑﻳﻧﻣﺎ ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻗﺹ ﺍﻟﺟﺯء ﺑﻌﺩ‬
‫ﺃﻗﺭﺏ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ] [ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻳﻣﻳﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﻌﺭﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭﻩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪ .‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺣﻳﻧﺋ ٍﺫ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭﻩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﻣﺭ ًﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪ ،‬ﻛﺭّ ﺭ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.۲‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ‬
‫● ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[ )ﺇﻣﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ] [(‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱۱۳‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻵﻥ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻭﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺣﻔﻅ ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﺿﻐﻁ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﻣﻥ ‪ ۱‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٥‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ“‬
‫)= ‪ ،(۹۳‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪/ Auto‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫[]‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ] [] [] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ‬
‫] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻣﻠﻑ ﺟﺩﻳﺩ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻷﺟﺯﺍء ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺿﺭﻭﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺑﺩﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻭﻧﻬﺎﻳﺗﻬﺎ )ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺛﻧﺎء ﻣﻠﺧﺻﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.(۳۷ = ،‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ]‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭﻩ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﻻﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﻡ ﻗﺻﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﻛﺗﺎﺑﺔ ﻓﻭﻗﻳﺔ[ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ .٤‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻻ ﻳﻭﺟﺩ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻛﺗﺎﺑﺔ ﻓﻭﻗﻳﺔ[ ﻓﻘﻁ ﻣﺗﺎﺣً ﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺩ ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻧﻔﺩﺕ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻔﻅ ﻗﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺩﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﻳﻧﺑﻐﻲ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺷﺣﻭﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺣﻭﻝ ‪) AC‬ﻳُﺑﺎﻉ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ‬
‫ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻝ( ﻣﻊ ﻭﺻﻠﺔ ﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ ) ُﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻝ‪.(۱٤۸ = ،‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺃﺣﺟﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۲‬ﻣﻥ ”ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ“‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ] [‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﻣﻠﻑ ﺟﺩﻳﺩ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫● ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺿﻐﻁ ﻭﺣﻔﻅ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﻓﻳﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻷﺟﺯﺍء ﺍﻟﻔﺭﺩﻳﺔ )ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻁﻊ( )= ‪ (۳۷‬ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ]‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺎﻁﻊ‪ ،‬ﻷﻧﻪ ﻳﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﺍﺳﺗﺭﺩﺍﺩﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﺿﺭﻭﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻛﻥ ﺣﺫﺭً ﺍ‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﻁﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﻣﺳﺣﻪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺗﻳﻥ ‪ ۱‬ﻭ‪ ۲‬ﻓﻲ ”ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺻﻳﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻡ ﺇﻧﺷﺎﺅﻫﺎ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ )ﻣﻠﺧﺻﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ(“‬
‫)= ‪ (۹٦‬ﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻓﻳﻠﻡ ﺗﻡ ﺇﻧﺷﺎﺅﻩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﻟﻠﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪/ Auto‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺃﺣﺟﺎﻡ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﺩﻳﻭ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺿﻐﻁ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﻣﻠﺧﺹ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ]‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ] [ ] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪C‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ]‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫[‬
‫[‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﻁﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺣﻭ ﻣﺗﻛﺭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۱۱٤‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻭ]‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺿﻐﻁ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ]‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭﻫﺎ ﺑﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ ﻣﺿﻐﻭﻁ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻛﺗﺎﺑﺔ ﻓﻭﻗﻳﺔ[‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺄﻛﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺢ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ]‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﻁﻊ ﻭﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺻﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ] [ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﻘﻁﻊ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫[‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪/ Auto‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﻣﻳﺯﺍﺕ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻭﺍﺳﺗﻼﻣﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﻬﺫﻩ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻋﺑﺭ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪.Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻫﻭﺍﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻳﺔ ﻭﺃﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﻟﻭﺣﻳﺔ *‬
‫ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺈﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻻﺳﻠﻛﻳًﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻧﺗﺭﻧﺕ‬
‫● ﺍﺳﺗﻳﺭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ )= ‪(۱۱٦‬‬
‫● ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻋﻥ ﺑُﻌﺩ )= ‪(۱۳۳‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪C‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫● ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ‪ ،Wi-Fi‬ﺍﺣﺭﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺭﺍءﺓ ”ﺍﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﺎﺕ ‪) Wi-Fi‬ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ LAN‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ(“‬
‫)= ‪.(۲۰۰‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻣﻥ‬
‫‪Canon‬‬
‫)‪(۲* CANON iMAGE GATEWAY‬‬
‫ﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ‬
‫● ﺗﺣﻭﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ )= ‪(۱۲۹‬‬
‫● ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻭﻣﺷﺎﺭﻛﺗﻬﺎ )= ‪(۱۲۲‬‬
‫● ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ )= ‪(۱۳۱‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ *‬
‫ﻣﺷﻐﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺳﺎﺋﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪* DLNA‬‬
‫● ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ )= ‪(۱۲۷‬‬
‫● ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ )= ‪(۱۲٦‬‬
‫*‪۱‬‬
‫*‪۲‬‬
‫*‪۳‬‬
‫*‪٤‬‬
‫‪۱۱٥‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺗﺑﺳﻳﻁ‪ ،‬ﺗﺗﻡ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﺍﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﺣﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ ﺇﺟﻣﺎﻻً‬
‫”ﺑﺎﻟﻬﻭﺍﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻳﺔ“‪.‬‬
‫‪ CANON iMAGE GATEWAY‬ﻋﺑﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻥ ﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻋﺑﺭ ﺍﻹﻧﺗﺭﻧﺕ ﻣﻥ ‪.Canon‬‬
‫ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺩﻋﻡ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ ‪) PictBridge‬ﺩﻋﻡ ‪ ،(DPS over IP‬ﻣﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭﺓ ﻋﺑﺭ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪.Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ DLNA‬ﻋﺑﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﺭﻑ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﻣﻥ ‪.Digital Living Network Alliance‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﻳﺭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻳﻘﺗﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺗﺎﻥ ﻻﺳﺗﻳﺭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪/ Auto‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪C‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۱۱٦‬‬
‫● ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﻋﺑﺭ ‪(۱۱٦ =) NFC‬‬
‫ﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻳﻙ ﺳﻭﻯ ﻣﻼﻣﺳﺔ ﻫﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ ﺑﻧﻅﺎﻡ ‪ Android‬ﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻕ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻘﻧﻳﺔ ‪) NFC‬ﺇﺻﺩﺍﺭ ‪ OS‬ﻫﻭ ‪4.0‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺇﺻﺩﺍﺭ ﺃﺣﺩﺙ( ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﻋﺑﺭ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪(۱۱۸ =) Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ ﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻕ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻘﻧﻳﺔ ‪NFC‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻣﻳﺯﺓ ‪ NFC‬ﺑﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ ﺑﻧﻅﺎﻡ ‪) Android‬ﺇﺻﺩﺍﺭ ‪ OS‬ﻫﻭ ‪ 4.0‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﺻﺩﺍﺭ ﺃﺣﺩﺙ( ﻟﺗﻳﺳﻳﺭ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ‪ EOS Remote‬ﻭﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻣﻼﻣﺳﺔ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺑﺑﻌﺿﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻭﻧﻘﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯﻳﻥ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ )= ‪ .(۱۳۳‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺑﺳﻬﻭﻟﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪.Wi-Fi‬‬
‫● ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻣﻼﻣﺳﺔ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺑﺑﻌﺿﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺭﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻭﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﻋﺑﺭ ‪ NFC‬ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻣﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺛﺑّﺕ ‪.EOS Remote‬‬
‫● ﻧ ّﺷﻁ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ‪ NFC‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﻗﻡ ﺑﻣﻼﻣﺳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ‪ N‬ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ) (‬
‫ﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ‪ Google Play‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺻﻔﺣﺔ ﺗﻧﺯﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ‪EOS‬‬
‫‪ ،Remote‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻧﺯﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﻭﺗﺛﺑﻳﺗﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﻧﺷﺎء ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﻣﻼﻣﺳﺔ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ‪ ( ) N‬ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺛﺑﺕ ﻋﻠﻳﻪ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ‪ EOS Remote‬ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ‪N‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺑﺩء ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]ﺍﻻﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻌﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﺟﻬﺎﺯ[‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ )= ‪ (۳۳‬ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬
‫[ ﻟﻠﺭﺟﻭﻉ‬
‫ﺍﺳﻡ ﻣﺳﺗﻌﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]ﺍﻻﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻌﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﺟﻬﺎﺯ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ]‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫[‬
‫● ﻳﺑﺩﺃ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ‪ EOS Remote‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﺻﻭﺻﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺩ ﺇﻧﺷﺎء ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻏﻠﻕ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻏﺿﻭﻥ ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﻳﺭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ ﻻﺳﺗﻳﺭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫●‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪/ Auto‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪C‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫●‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﻳﺯﺓ ‪ ،NFC‬ﺗﺫﻛﺭ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ ﺗﺟﻧﺏ ﺍﺻﻁﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ ﺑﻘﻭﺓ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯﻳﻥ‪.‬‬‫ ﻭﺑﻧﺎ ًء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﻻ ﻳﺗﻌﺭﻑ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯﺍﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻌﺿﻬﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺭ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﻩ‬‫ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺟﺭﺏ ﺣﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯﻳﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻭﺍﺿﻊ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ ﻗﻠﻳﻼً‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻓﺷﻝ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻗﺭّ ﺏ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯﻳﻥ ﻣﻥ ﺑﻌﺿﻬﻣﺎ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺙ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ ﻻ ﺗﺿﻊ ﺃﺟﺳﺎﻣًﺎ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻅ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺃﻏﻁﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﻭ‬‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺎﺑﻬﺔ ﻗﺩ ﺗﺣﺟﺏ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ]ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ[ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۳‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻋﻥ ﺑُﻌﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺻﻝ ﻋﻧﺩ ]ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ[‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ .۳‬ﺣﺩﺩ ﺧﻳﺎﺭً ﺍ ﺁﺧﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۳‬ﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﻗﻳﻭﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ‬
‫ﻋﺭﺿﻬﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ )= ‪ .(۱۳٥‬ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﻗﻳﺎﻣﻙ ﺑﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻫﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺻﻭﺻﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ )= ‪.(۱۳٥‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻗﺭﺹ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ] [‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﻫﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺗﺗﻁﻠﺏ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻻﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻪ ﻳﺑﺩﺃ ﺑﺭﻣﺯ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺳﺎﻓﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺃﺩﺧﻝ ﺍﺳﻣًﺎ ﻣﺳﺗﻌﺎﺭً ﺍ ﻣﺧﺗﻠ ًﻔﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﻋﺑﺭ ‪ NFC‬ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[ ﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﻣﻼﻣﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺛﺑﺕ ﻋﻠﻳﻪ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ‪EOS‬‬
‫‪ (۱۱۹ =) Remote‬ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ‪ N‬ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ) (‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ] [] []‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻟﻳﺗﻡ‬
‫[‪ .‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ] [ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺫﻟﻙ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪ .‬ﻟﻥ‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻛﺭﺍﺭ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻬﺎء ﻣﻥ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫]‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﻘﻁﻊ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺃﺯﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ] [ ﻣﻥ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪،‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۱۱۷‬‬
‫● ﺇﺫﺍ ﻅﻬﺭﺕ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺗﻁﻠﺏ ﻣﻧﻙ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻌﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۲‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﻋﺑﺭ ‪ NFC‬ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ“ )= ‪ (۱۱٦‬ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻟﻪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﺗﺣﺗﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺳﺟﻝ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﺍﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﺑﺭ ‪ NFC‬ﻓﻲ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪/ Auto‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪C‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻫﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﻳﻧﺑﻐﻲ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ”‪ “EOS Remote‬ﺍﻟﻣﺟﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺣﻭﻝ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ )ﺍﻟﻬﻭﺍﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﻋﻭﻣﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣُﺿﻣﱠﻧﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ‬
‫ﻣﻭﻗﻊ ‪ Canon‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻭﺿﺢ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﻛﻳﻔﻳﺔ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻛﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ‬
‫ﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ )= ‪.(۱۱۹‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫● ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﻬﻭﺍﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﺑﻧﻅﺎﻡ ‪،Android‬‬
‫ﺍﺑﺣﺙ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ‪ EOS Remote‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺟﺭ‬
‫‪ Google Play‬ﻭﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻧﺯﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﻭﺗﺛﺑﻳﺗﻪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ iPhone‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ،iPad‬ﺍﺑﺣﺙ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ‬
‫‪ EOS Remote‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺟﺭ ‪ App Store‬ﻭﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻧﺯﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﻭﺗﺛﺑﻳﺗﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪.Wi-Fi‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫[ ﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻣﻥ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ‪SSID‬‬
‫)ﺍﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ( ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻹﻧﺷﺎء ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]ﺍﻻﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻌﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﺟﻬﺎﺯ[‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ )= ‪ (۳۳‬ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬
‫[ ﻟﻠﺭﺟﻭﻉ‬
‫ﺍﺳﻡ ﻣﺳﺗﻌﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]ﺍﻻﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻌﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﺟﻬﺎﺯ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ]‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻙ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﺣﻘﻝ ﻛﻠﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺧﻝ ﻛﻠﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫[‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ‬
‫] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪۱۱۸‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣُﻌﺭﱢ ﻑ ‪ SSID‬ﻭﻛﻠﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻭﺭ ﻟﻠﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺛﺑّﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺹ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ] [‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺑﺩﺃ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ‪.EOS Remote‬‬
‫● ﺍﺑﺩﺃ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ‪ EOS Remote‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ ﺗﺗﻳﺢ ﻟﻙ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻟﺑﺩء ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻹﻗﺭﺍﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪/ Auto‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﺻﻭﺻﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺩ ﺇﻧﺷﺎء ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻏﻠﻕ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻏﺿﻭﻥ ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﻳﺭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ ﻻﺳﺗﻳﺭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪C‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۱۱۹‬‬
‫● ﺣﺩﺩ ]ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ[ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۸‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻋﻥ ﺑُﻌﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺻﻝ ﻋﻧﺩ ]ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ[‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ .۸‬ﺣﺩﺩ ﺧﻳﺎﺭً ﺍ ﺁﺧﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۸‬ﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﻗﻳﻭﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ‬
‫ﻋﺭﺿﻬﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ )= ‪ .(۱۳٥‬ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﻗﻳﺎﻣﻙ ﺑﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻫﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺻﻭﺻﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ )= ‪.(۱۳٥‬‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻗﺭﺹ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ] [‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﻫﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ‪.‬‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﺗﺗﻁﻠﺏ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻻﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻪ ﻳﺑﺩﺃ ﺑﺭﻣﺯ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺳﺎﻓﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺃﺩﺧﻝ ﺍﺳﻣًﺎ ﻣﺳﺗﻌﺎﺭً ﺍ ﻣﺧﺗﻠ ًﻔﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻼﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻛﻠﻣﺔ ﻣﺭﻭﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ،٥‬ﺍﻧﺗﻘﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ )= ‪ ،(۳۲‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪ ،[ 4‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ]ﻛﻠﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻭﺭ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ ﻓﻲ ]ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ .[Wi-Fi‬ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ‬
‫]ﻛﻠﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻭﺭ[ ﺑﻌﺩﺋ ٍﺫ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺭﺽ ‪) SSID‬ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.(٤‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﺄﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﻣﻥ ﻗﺑﻝ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﺩﺭﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﻳﺭﺓ ﺃﻭﻻً ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ‬
‫‪ .Wi-Fi‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﻣﺟﺩﺩًﺍ ﺑﺳﻬﻭﻟﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﻭﻣﻥ ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪ .‬ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺟﺩﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﻌﺭﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﻠﻣﺱ‬
‫] [] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻧﺕ ﺗﻔﺿﻝ ﻋﺩﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺁﺧﺭ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻬﺩﻓﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺧﺗﺭ ‪ < (۳۲ =) MENU‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪] < [ 4‬ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪] < [Wi-Fi‬ﺍﻟﺳﺟﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻬﺩﻑ[ < ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺣﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ ﻋﺑﺭ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪.Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪/ Auto‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪C‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﻳﺩ ﺗﻭﺍﻓﻕ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺗﻭﺍﻓﻕ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻭﺟﻳﻪ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﺣﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻳﺭ ﺗﻘﻧﻳﺔ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ”‪.(۱۹٤ =) “Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺗﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﻁﺭﻕ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻧﺎ ًء ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺗﺩﻋﻡ ‪Wi-Fi Protected Setup‬‬
‫)‪ (۱۲۰ = ،WPS‬ﺃﻡ ﻻ )= ‪ .(۱۲۱‬ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺑﺧﻼﻑ ‪ ،WPS‬ﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ )‪(SSID/ESSID‬‬
‫ﻣُﻌﺭﱢ ﻑ ‪ SSID‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ESSID‬ﻟﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺔ‪ .‬ﻭ ُﺗﻌﺭﻑ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺑـ ”ﺍﺳﻡ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ“ ﺃﻭ‬
‫”ﺍﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ“‪.‬‬
‫● ﻣﺻﺎﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ /‬ﺗﺷﻔﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ )ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻔﻳﺭ ‪ /‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻔﻳﺭ(‬
‫ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺷﻔﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻲ‪ .‬ﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ‪WPA2-PSK :‬‬
‫)‪ (AES‬ﺃﻭ )‪ WPA2-PSK (TKIP‬ﺃﻭ )‪ WPA-PSK (AES‬ﺃﻭ )‪ WPA-PSK (TKIP‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫‪) WEP‬ﻣﺻﺎﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﻭﺡ(‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻛﻠﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻭﺭ )ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻔﻳﺭ ‪ /‬ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺷﻔﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻲ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻌﺭﻑ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﻡ ”ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻔﻳﺭ“‬
‫ﺃﻭ ”ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ“‪.‬‬
‫● ﻓﻬﺭﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ )ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ(‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ‪ WEP‬ﻟﻣﺻﺎﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ /‬ﺗﺷﻔﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ”‪ “۱‬ﻛﺈﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻳﻠﺯﻡ ﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﺳﺅﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺗﺻﻝ ﺑﻣﺳﺅﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺗﻌﺗﺑﺭ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻬﻣﺔ ﺟﺩًﺍ ﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﻭﺥ ﺍﻟﺣﺫﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫‪۱۲۰‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺗﻭﺍﻓﻕ ‪ WPS‬ﻭﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻘﻕ‪،‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺟﻳﻪ ﻫﻭ ﻋﺑﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻳﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺈﻧﺷﺎء ﺑﻧﻳﺔ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ )‪ (LAN‬ﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﻋﺩﺓ ﺃﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳُﻌﺭﻑ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺟﻳﻪ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﺗﺿﻣﻥ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﻡ ”ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻭﺟﻳﻪ ‪.“Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻳﺷﻳﺭ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﻝ ﺃﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺗﻭﺟﻳﻪ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻭﻣﺣﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﻡ ”ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ“‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻧﺕ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﺗﺭﺷﻳﺢ ﻋﻧﺎﻭﻳﻥ ‪ MAC‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ ،Wi-Fi‬ﻓﺎﺣﺭﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻧﻭﺍﻥ ‪ MAC‬ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﻋﻧﻭﺍﻥ ‪ MAC‬ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ )= ‪ .(۳۲‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪ ،[ 4‬ﺛﻡ ﺣﺩﺩ ]ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﻋﻧﻭﺍﻥ‬
‫‪ [MAC‬ﻓﻲ ]ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪.[Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪WPS‬‬
‫ﻳﻌﻣﻝ ‪ WPS‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺳﻬﻳﻝ ﺇﻛﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﻋﺑﺭ ‪ .Wi-Fi‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺭﻣﺯ ‪ PIN‬ﻟﻺﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻳﺩﻋﻡ ‪.WPS‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺻِ ﻝ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ ﺑﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺣﺿﻳﺭ ﻟﻼﺗﺻﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ‪ ٤ – ۱‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻫﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪ (۱۱۸ =) “Wi-Fi‬ﻟﻠﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]ﺑﺎﻧﺗﻅﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ[‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ] [‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﻣﻥ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺗﺷﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ‪.[WPS‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ] [‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ‪ ،[WPS‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ‪.[PBC‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ] [‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ‪ ،[PBC‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﻧﺷﺎء ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﺯﺭ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺛﻭﺍﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪ WPS‬ﻟﺑﺿﻊ‬
‫ٍ‬
‫● ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻟﻼﻧﺗﻘﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪C‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۱۲۱‬‬
‫● ﺍﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﺭﺟﺔ )ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ( ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ‬
‫ﻣﻭﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﻣﻥ ‪ ۱‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ۳‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ‬
‫ﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪.(۱۲۰ =) “WPS‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪/ Auto‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫ﺍﻋﺭﺽ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﺭﺟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ] [‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ )ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﻳﺭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ‪ ۹ – ٦‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻫﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪ (۱۱۸ =) “Wi-Fi‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﺻﻭﺻﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﻳﺭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ‪ [PIN‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ،٥‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺭﻣﺯ ‪ PIN‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺣﺭﺹ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ[‪ .‬ﻟﻣﺯﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ‪ .‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻓﻕ ﻣﻊ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻝ ﻛﻠﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﻟﻠﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻝ ﻛﻠﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻭﺭ )= ‪.(۳۳‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ]‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫[‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ]‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫[‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪/ Auto‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪C‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۱۲۲‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﻳﺭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ‪ ۹ – ٦‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻫﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪ (۱۱۸ =) “Wi-Fi‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺻﻭﺻﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﻗﻡ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺗﻳﺭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻛﻠﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ‪ ،‬ﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺫﺍﺗﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺭﺍﺟﻊ‬
‫ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺣﺗﻰ ‪ ۱٦‬ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ‬
‫]ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺙ[ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۲‬ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺙ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻳﺩﻭﻳﺔ[ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۲‬ﻹﻛﻣﺎﻝ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﻳﺩﻭﻳًﺎ‪ .‬ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻅﺎﻫﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺃﺩﺧﻝ ﻣُﻌﺭﱢ ﻑ ‪ SSID‬ﻭﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﻭﻛﻠﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺗﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻣﻥ ﻗﺑﻝ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ”*“ ﻟﻛﻠﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻭﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.۳‬‬
‫ﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻛﻠﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻭﺭ ﺫﺍﺗﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ[ )ﺇﻣﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ‬
‫] [(‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ‬
‫ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ٤‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻫﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪“Wi-Fi‬‬
‫)= ‪.(۱۱۸‬‬
‫● ﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻛﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ[ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ُﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺈﻧﺷﺎء‬
‫ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﻭﺿﻊ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪ ،‬ﺣﺩﺩ ]ﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ[ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ُﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺈﻧﺷﺎء‬
‫ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪” ٤‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪ (۱۲۰ =) “WPS‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪۲‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﺭﺟﺔ“ )= ‪.(۱۲۱‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﻭﻳﺏ ﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻫﺎﺗ ًﻔﺎ ﺫﻛﻳًﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻠﺯﻡ ﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﻫﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻣﺯﻭﺩ ﺑﻣﺗﺻﻔﺢ ﻭﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺇﻧﺗﺭﻧﺕ ﻻﺳﺗﻛﻣﺎﻝ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺧﺩﻣﺔ ‪ CANON iMAGE GATEWAY‬ﻭﻏﻳﺭﻫﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺗﻔﺿﻝ ﺑﺯﻳﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﻭﻗﻊ ‪ CANON iMAGE GATEWAY‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺣﻭﻝ ﻣﺗﻁﻠﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺻﻔﺢ )‪ ،Microsoft Internet Explorer‬ﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻙ(‪ ،‬ﺑﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻙ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺻﺩﺍﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻠﺩﺍﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺧﺩﻣﺔ ‪CANON iMAGE‬‬
‫‪ ،GATEWAY‬ﺗﻔﺿﻝ ﺑﺯﻳﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﻭﻗﻊ ‪ Canon‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ )‪.(http://www.canon.com/cig/‬‬
‫● ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻟﺩﻳﻙ ﺣﺳﺎﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ ﺑﺧﻼﻑ ‪CANON iMAGE‬‬
‫‪ GATEWAY‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻧﺕ ﺗﺭﻏﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻟﻣﺯﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﻣﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ ﻟﻛﻝ ﺧﺩﻣﺔ‬
‫ﻭﻳﺏ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﺩ ُﺗﻔﺭَ ﺽ ﺭﺳﻭﻡ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻠﺔ ﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﻣﻭﻓﺭ ﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻧﺗﺭﻧﺕ )‪ (ISP‬ﻭﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻓﻲ ‪CANON iMAGE GATEWAY‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺩ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭ‪ ،CANON iMAGE GATEWAY‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﺿﺎﻓﺔ ‪CANON iMAGE‬‬
‫‪ GATEWAY‬ﻛﻭﺟﻬﺔ ﻟﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪/ Auto‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪C‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۱۲۳‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺳﺟّ ﻝ ﺍﻟﺩﺧﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﺩﻣﺔ ‪CANON iMAGE‬‬
‫‪ GATEWAY‬ﻭﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﻔﺣﺔ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺭﺍﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ ﻟﻠﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻣﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻫﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﻊ ‪ http://www.canon.com/cig/‬ﻟﺯﻳﺎﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻣﻭﻗﻊ ﺧﺩﻣﺔ ‪.CANON iMAGE GATEWAY‬‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺩ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺩﺧﻭﻝ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺧﻝ ﺍﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ‬
‫ﻭﻛﻠﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻭﺭ ﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺩﺧﻭﻝ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﻳﻛﻥ ﻟﺩﻳﻙ ﺣﺳﺎﺏ‬
‫‪ ،CANON iMAGE GATEWAY‬ﻓﺎﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻻﺳﺗﻛﻣﺎﻝ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺿﻭﻳﺔ )ﻣﺟﺎ ًﻧﺎ(‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﻔﺣﺔ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪.Wi-Fi‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[ ﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻅﻬﻭﺭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]ﺍﻻﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻌﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﺟﻬﺎﺯ[‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ )= ‪ (۳۳‬ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﺳﻡ ﻣﺳﺗﻌﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[ ﻟﻠﺭﺟﻭﻉ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]ﺍﻻﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻌﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﺟﻬﺎﺯ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ]‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬
‫[‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﻁﺭﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻫﺫﺍ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ]‬
‫‪.Wi-Fi‬‬
‫[ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺻﻔﺣﺔ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺭﻣﺯ‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺎﺩﻗﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ،۷‬ﺳﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺭﻣﺯ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺎﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻣﻥ ‪ ۳‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.٦‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﻣﺻﺎﺩﻗﺔ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ]‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻣﺻﺎﺩﻗﺔ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫[‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪/ Auto‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﻧﺷﺎء ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻣﻭﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﻣﻥ ‪ ٤‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٦‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻊ ‪ (۱۲۰ =) “WPS‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﻣﻥ ‪ ۲‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٤‬ﻓﻲ‬
‫”ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﺭﺟﺔ“ )= ‪.(۱۲۱‬‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺩ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑـ ‪CANON iMAGE‬‬
‫‪ GATEWAY‬ﻋﺑﺭ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺭﻣﺯ‬
‫ﻣﺻﺎﺩﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺣﺗﻔﻅ ﺑﻬﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺟﻌﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﺭﺽ ﺣﺗﻰ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﻛﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.۷‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻝ ﺭﻣﺯ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺎﺩﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪C‬‬
‫● ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺧﻝ ﺭﻣﺯ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺎﺩﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﻧﺗﻘﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫● ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺭﻗﻡ ﺗﺄﻛﻳﺩ ﻣﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﻥ ﺳﺗﺔ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۱۲٤‬‬
‫● ﺗﺗﻡ ﺣﻳﻧﺋ ٍﺫ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ‪CANON iMAGE GATEWAY‬‬
‫ﻭ] [ )= ‪ (۱۳۱‬ﻛﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺗﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫[ ﺇﻟﻰ ]‬
‫]‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﻛﻳﺩ ﻭﺃﻛﻣﻝ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ،٦‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ‬
‫] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﻛﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﻣﻁﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﻛﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ]‬
‫]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ‬
‫● ﺍﺳﺗﻛﻣﻝ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‬
‫ﻟﻺﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻧﺗﻬﺎء ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﻳﺏ‬
‫ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻹﺟﺭﺍء ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ“‬
‫)= ‪ (۱۲٤‬ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.۲‬‬
‫● ﺗﺗﻁﻠﺏ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻔﻭﻅﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﻋﺑﺭ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪ ،Wi-Fi‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺳﺭﺩ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﻳﺭﺓ ﺃﻭﻻً ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻟﻠﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﻭﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﻳﺏ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﺎﻧﺏ ‪ CANON iMAGE GATEWAY‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻅ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﺟﺏ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ‪ CANON iMAGE GATEWAY‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﻭﻻً )= ‪.(۱۲۳‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۱‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻓﻲ ‪CANON iMAGE‬‬
‫‪ (۱۲۳ =) “GATEWAY‬ﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺩﺧﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﺩﻣﺔ‬
‫‪ ،CANON iMAGE GATEWAY‬ﺛﻡ ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪/ Auto‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪.Wi-Fi‬‬
‫[ ﻟﻠﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﺣﻳﻧﺋ ٍﺫ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺙ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻐﻳﺭﺕ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻬﻳﺄﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺗﺑﻊ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﻣﺟﺩﺩًﺍ ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺙ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﻣﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪C‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪.Wi-Fi‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۱۲٥‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫[ ﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻬﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻬﺎ‬
‫)ﺇﻣﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ] [(‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻋﺩﺓ ﻣﺳﺗﻠﻣﻳﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﺷﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﻭﻳﺏ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺧﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ‬
‫ﻣﺳﺗﻠﻡ[ )ﺇﻣﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ] [(‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺭﺳﻝ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻟﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻣﻳﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ،YouTube‬ﺍﻗﺭﺃ ﺑﻧﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﺩﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ‬
‫]ﺃﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﺳﻳﺑﺩﺃ ﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺧﻔﺕ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﻧﻘﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺩ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﻟﻠﻌﻭﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺗﺗﻁﻠﺏ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻔﻭﻅﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻋﺩﺓ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﻭﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻭﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﻌﻠﻳﻘﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ )= ‪.(۱۳۰‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﺷﻐﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺳﺎﺋﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪/ Auto‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪C‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺯﻧﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻁﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺁﺧﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺗﻁﻠﺏ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﺃﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﺃﻭ ﻫﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺷﻐﻝ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻁ ﺁﺧﺭ ﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻕ ﻣﻊ ‪.DLNA‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ“ ﻳﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﻁﻠﺢ ”ﻣﺷﻐﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺳﺎﺋﻁ“ ﻟﻺﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻱ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﻥ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺑﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻓﻘﻁ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﻣﺷﻐﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺳﺎﺋﻁ ﺑﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻭﺛﺎﺋﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪.Wi-Fi‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۲‬ﻣﻥ ”ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻫﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ‬
‫‪ (۱۱۸ =) “Wi-Fi‬ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪.Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ‬
‫] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۱۲٦‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺷﻐﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺳﺎﺋﻁ ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻠﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺗﻌﺭﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺷﻐﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺳﺎﺋﻁ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻋﺭﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺷﻐﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺳﺎﺋﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫● ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻣﺷﻐﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺳﺎﺋﻁ ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ]‪EOS M3‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﺩ ﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﺭﻣﺯ ﺁﺧﺭ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻧﻭﻉ ﻣﺷﻐﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺳﺎﺋﻁ‪ .‬ﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻣﻳﺯ ﺑـ ]‪.[ EOS M3‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‪ [ EOS M3‬ﻭﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ )ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SD‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ( ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺟﻠﺩ ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﻋﺭﺿﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺷﻐﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺳﺎﺋﻁ ﻣﻣﻛ ًﻧﺎ‪ ،‬ﺗﻅﻬﺭ‬
‫ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻌﺗﻳﻡ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺭﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﻧﺷﺎء ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻣﻭﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﻣﻥ ‪ ٤‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٦‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻊ ‪ (۱۲۰ =) “WPS‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﻣﻥ ‪ ۲‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٤‬ﻓﻲ‬
‫”ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﺭﺟﺔ“ )= ‪.(۱۲۱‬‬
‫● ﺣﺩﺩ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻟﻌﺭﺿﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺷﻐﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺳﺎﺋﻁ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻌﺗﻳﻡ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﺯﺭ ﻹﻅﻬﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪ ،‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۳‬ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪/ Auto‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪C‬‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﺗﺗﻁﻠﺏ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻔﻭﻅﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﻋﺑﺭ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪ ،Wi-Fi‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺳﺭﺩ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﻳﺭﺓ ﺃﻭﻻً ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪ .Wi-Fi‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﻣﺟﺩﺩًﺍ ﺑﺳﻬﻭﻟﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻭﻣﻥ ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪ .‬ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺟﺩﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﻌﺭﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻻﺕ ﻣﺷﻐﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺳﺎﺋﻁ ﻣﺛﻝ ”ﺧﺎﺩﻡ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻁ“ ﻓﻲ ﺳﺟﻝ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻻﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺻﻭﺭ ‪ RAW‬ﻭﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻐﻳﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﺑﺣﺳﺏ ﻣﺷﻐﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺳﺎﺋﻁ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻣﺷﻐﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺳﺎﺋﻁ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﻻ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻭﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﻭﻟﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻩ‬
‫ﺃﻓﻘﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﺗﻭﻱ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﻣﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﺑﻣﻠﺻﻘﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻣﺛﻝ ”‪ “۱۰۰-۱‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﺟﻣﻌﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻠﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺩ ﺗﻌﻛﺱ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺍﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻠﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻠﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺁﺧﺭ ﻣﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻻﺳﻠﻛ ًﻳﺎ ﻣﻥ ﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻣﺗﺻﻠﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻋﺑﺭ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻟﻠﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻭﺿﺢ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﻛﻳﻔﻳﺔ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻛﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ‬
‫ﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ )= ‪.(۱۱۹‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪.Wi-Fi‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻣﻭﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۲‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻫﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪“Wi-Fi‬‬
‫)= ‪.(۱۱۸‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ‬
‫] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ] [‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۱۲۷‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣُﻌﺭﱢ ﻑ ‪ SSID‬ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺻِ ﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻣﻥ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ‪) SSID‬ﺍﺳﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ( ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻹﻧﺷﺎء ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺍﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ )ﺇﻣﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] []‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ] [(‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫[‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪/ Auto‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻟﺗﺗﻡ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ]‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪C‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ]‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫● ﻟﻣﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺻﻳﻠﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ“ )= ‪.(۱٦۰‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫● ﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﻛﻳﺩ )ﺇﻣﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ] [(‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۱۲۸‬‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫[‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫[‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﺗﺗﻁﻠﺏ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻔﻭﻅﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﻋﺑﺭ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪ ،Wi-Fi‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺳﺭﺩ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﻳﺭﺓ ﺃﻭﻻً ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪ .Wi-Fi‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﻣﺟﺩﺩًﺍ ﺑﺳﻬﻭﻟﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻭﻣﻥ ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪ .‬ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺟﺩﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﻌﺭﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻧﺕ ﺗﻔﺿﻝ ﻋﺩﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺁﺧﺭ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻬﺩﻓﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺧﺗﺭ ‪ < (۳۲ =) MENU‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪] < [ 4‬ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪] < [Wi-Fi‬ﺍﻟﺳﺟﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻬﺩﻑ[ < ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ“‬
‫)= ‪.(۱۱۹‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺗﻳﻥ ﻋﺑﺭ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ ،Wi-Fi‬ﻭﺃﺭﺳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﻳﻧﻬﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﺣﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪/ Auto‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪C‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺃﻱ ﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺑﺧﻼﻑ ﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍﺕ ‪ Canon‬ﺍﻟﻣﺯﻭﱠ ﺩﺓ ﺑﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻻﺳﻠﻛﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍﺕ ‪ Canon‬ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺩﻋﻡ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ‪ Eye-Fi‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﻏﻳﺭ‬
‫ﻣﺯﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ .Wi-Fi‬ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍﺕ ‪DIGITAL IXUS WIRELESS‬‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫● ﺳﻳﺑﺩﺃ ﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺧﻔﺕ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﻧﻘﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ]ﺍﻛﺗﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﻝ[ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻡ‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ‬
‫● ﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﻛﻳﺩ )ﺇﻣﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ] [(‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪.Wi-Fi‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻣﻭﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۲‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻫﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪“Wi-Fi‬‬
‫)= ‪.(۱۱۸‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ‬
‫] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫●‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫●‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ] [‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﻣﻥ ‪ ۱‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ۳‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻬﺩﻓﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۱۲۹‬‬
‫● ﺗﺗﻡ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻋﺭﺽ‬
‫]ﺑﺩء ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻬﺩﻓﺔ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻠﺗﺎ ﺷﺎﺷﺗﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺗﻳﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺭﺳﻝ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻟﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺗﻁﻠﺏ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﻋﺑﺭ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪ ،Wi-Fi‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺳﺭﺩ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﻳﺭﺓ ﺃﻭﻻً ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪ .Wi-Fi‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﻣﺟﺩﺩًﺍ ﺑﺳﻬﻭﻟﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻭﻣﻥ ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪ .‬ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺟﺩﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﻌﺭﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻧﺕ ﺗﻔﺿﻝ ﻋﺩﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺁﺧﺭ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻬﺩﻓﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺧﺗﺭ ‪ < (۳۲ =) MENU‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪] < [ 4‬ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪] < [Wi-Fi‬ﺍﻟﺳﺟﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻬﺩﻑ[ < ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻋﺩﺓ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﻭﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ )= ‪.(۱۳۰‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۲‬ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﺭﺗﻳﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﻔﺭﺩﺓ ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪/ Auto‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻋﺩﺓ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻣﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﻭﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺩﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ )ﺍﻟﺣﺟﻡ( ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ‪ .‬ﺗﺗﻳﺢ ﻟﻙ ﺑﻌﺽ‬
‫ﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﻠﻳﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺈﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻭﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻣﻥ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻭﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺻﻭﺭً ﺍ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ] [] [] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ‬
‫] [ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻛﺭﺍﺭ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻬﺎء ﻣﻥ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫]‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫[ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪ .‬ﻟﻥ‬
‫ﺃﺭﺳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ]‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪۱۳۰‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺃﺻﺎﺑﻌﻙ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺷﻳﺎء ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ ﻋﻥ ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﻫﻭﺍﺋﻲ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ .(۳ =) Wi-Fi‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﺗﺅﺩﻱ ﺗﻐﻁﻳﺗﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﻳﺳﺗﻐﺭﻕ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻭﻗ ًﺗﺎ ﻁﻭﻳﻼً‪ .‬ﻭﺍﺣﺭﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺭﺍﻗﺑﺔ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ‬
‫ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺣﺗﻰ ‪ ٥۰‬ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﻌًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻝ ﻣﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻓﻳﻠﻡ ﻭﺍﺣﺩ ﻓﻘﻁ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﺗﻘﻳﺩ‬
‫ﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻁﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ‪ ،‬ﻻﺣﻅ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺗﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﻋﻭﻣﺔ ﺑﺎﺧﺗﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ] [ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺫﻟﻙ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻅﺎﺕ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻋﺩﺓ ﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪C‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫[ ﻟﻠﻭﺻﻭﻝ‬
‫[‬
‫● ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻭﺿﻳﺢ ﻗﻭﺓ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫] [ ﻣﺭﺗﻔﻌﺔ‪ [ ] ،‬ﻣﺗﻭﺳﻁﺔ‪ [ ] ،‬ﻣﻧﺧﻔﺿﺔ‪ [ ] ،‬ﺿﻌﻳﻔﺔ‬
‫● ﻳﺳﺗﻐﺭﻕ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ ﻓﺗﺭﺓ ﺃﻗﻝ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻣﻥ ﻗﺑﻝ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻻ ﺗﺯﺍﻝ ﻣﺧﺯﻧﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﺎﺩﻡ ‪.CANON iMAGE GATEWAY‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪/ Auto‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪C‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻋﺩﺩ ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﻛﺳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ )ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ(‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ] [ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪ .‬ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺑﻛﺳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ )ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ( ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺣﺟﻣﻬﺎ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﺣﺩﺩ ]ﻻ[ ﻛﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﺟﻡ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]‬
‫[ ﺃﻭ ]‬
‫[ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺯﻳﺩ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﻌﻠﻳﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﻌﻠﻳﻘﺎﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺭﺳﻠﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻧﻭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻳﺩ ﺍﻹﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻲ ﻭﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺟﺗﻣﺎﻋﻳﺔ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ .‬ﻗﺩ ﻳﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺈﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﻠﻳﻘﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫● ﻣﻥ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ ﻋﺑﺭ ‪.CANON iMAGE GATEWAY‬‬
‫ﻻﺣﻅ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ ﻓﻘﻁ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺟﻬﻳﺯﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺩﺋﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺟﻬﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫● ﻣﻥ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ] [ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ‬
‫] [] [] [] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋ ًﻳﺎ )ﻣﺯﺍﻣﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ(‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺃﺿﻑ ﺗﻌﻠﻳ ًﻘﺎ )= ‪.(۳۳‬‬
‫ﺃﺭﺳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺗﻌﻠﻳﻕ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﻠﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﻓﻲ ‪CANON iMAGE GATEWAY‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﻠﻳﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺩﺓ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺗﺗﻡ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﻠﻳﻕ ﺫﺍﺗﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻣﻌًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ]‬
‫[ ﻛﻭﺟﻬﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ] [ ﻛﻭﺟﻬﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺃﺿﻑ ] [ ﻛﻭﺟﻬﺔ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻣﻭﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻓﻲ‬
‫‪.(۱۲۳ =) “CANON iMAGE GATEWAY‬‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﻭﻳﺏ ﺑﺎﻋﺗﺑﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﻭﺟﻬﺔ ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﺳﺟّ ﻝ ﺍﻟﺩﺧﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪CANON iMAGE‬‬
‫‪ ،(۱۲٤ =) GATEWAY‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻁﺭﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﺑﻌﺩﺋ ٍﺫ ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﻣﻥ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺯﺍﻣﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻭﺟﻬﺔ ﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻟﻠﺗﻌﺭﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﻠﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺩﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ‬
‫‪.CANON iMAGE GATEWAY‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ )ﻓﻘﻁ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ(‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪[Wi-Fi‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪.(۳۲ =) [ 4‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻣﺯﺍﻣﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ[‪،‬‬
‫ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ[ )= ‪.(۳۲‬‬
‫‪۱۳۱‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺟﻬﻳﺯ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‬
‫ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﻭﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻬﺩﻑ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪/ Auto‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫● ‪ :Mac OS‬ﻓﻲ ﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻘﺭ ﻓﻭﻕ ] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻧﻘﺭ‬
‫ﻓﻭﻕ ]‪/Add new camera‬ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺟﺩﻳﺩﺓ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺗﺑﻁﺔ ﺑﺧﺩﻣﺔ ‪CANON‬‬
‫‪ .iMAGE GATEWAY‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﻧﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪C‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫● ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﺗﺟﻬﻳﺯ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻻﺳﺗﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻐﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ ﺇﻟﻰ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۱۳۲‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫● ‪ :Windows‬ﻓﻲ ﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﻬﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻘﺭ ﺑﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﻭﺱ ﺍﻷﻳﻣﻥ‬
‫ﻓﻭﻕ ] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻧﻘﺭ ﻓﻭﻕ ]‪/Add new camera‬ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ‬
‫ﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺟﺩﻳﺩﺓ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻣﺗﺻﻝ ﺑﺎﻹﻧﺗﺭﻧﺕ‬
‫)= ‪.(۱٥۸‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺳﻠﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﻧﻭﻱ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻳﻪ‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﺅﻗ ًﺗﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﺎﺩﻡ‬
‫‪ .CANON iMAGE GATEWAY‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺯﻧﺔ ﺑﺻﻔﺔ ﺩﻭﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻟﺫﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﺭﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻭﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺗﻳﻥ ‪ ۱‬ﻭ‪ ۲‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﺣﻣﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ“ )= ‪ (۱۲٥‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺇﻧﺷﺎء ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪ .‬ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻡ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﻧﺟﺎﺡ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﺎﺩﻡ ‪CANON iMAGE‬‬
‫‪ ،GATEWAY‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ] [ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ‬
‫ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻠﻪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻅﻬﺭ ] [ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺳﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺻﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﻧﺑﻐﻲ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺷﺣﻭﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺣﻭﻝ ‪) AC‬ﻳُﺑﺎﻉ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ‬
‫ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻝ( ﻣﻊ ﻭﺻﻠﺔ ﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ ) ُﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻝ‪.(۱٤۸ = ،‬‬
‫● ﺣﺗﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﺗﻭﺭﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺃﻱ ﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﻋﺑﺭ ‪ CANON iMAGE GATEWAY‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺃﻛﺑﺭ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻬﺔ ﻋﺑﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻔﺱ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ؛ ﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻋﺑﺭ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺑﺩﻻً ﻣﻥ ‪CANON‬‬
‫‪ .iMAGE GATEWAY‬ﻻﺣﻅ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺯﻧﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫‪ ،CANON iMAGE GATEWAY‬ﻟﺫﺍ ﻳﻠﺯﻡ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺑﺎﻹﻧﺗﺭﻧﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻋﻥ ُﺑﻌﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻋﻥ ﺑُﻌﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺗﺎﺡ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﺩ ﻳﺳﺗﻐﺭﻕ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻭﻗ ًﺗﺎ ﺃﻁﻭﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺗﺎﺩ ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﺑﻁﺄ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺗﺎﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫● ﻳﺟﺏ ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺻﻭﺻﻳﺔ ﻣﻘﺩﻣًﺎ ﻹﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ )= ‪.(۱۳٥ = ،۱۱٦‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪/ Auto‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪C‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۱۳۳‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺄﻣﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺣﺎﻓﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺛﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺗﺛﺑﻳﺗﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﺗﺧﺫ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺗﺩﺍﺑﻳﺭ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺻِ ﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ )= ‪.(۱۱٦‬‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺻﻭﺻﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ[‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ ﻓﻲ ‪ EOS Remote‬ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺟﺎﻫﺯﺓ ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺣﻳﻧﺋ ٍﺫ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ‪،‬‬
‫ﻣﺎ ﻋﺩﺍ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪ ON/OFF‬ﺃﻭ ﻗﺭﺹ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﻥ ﺗﺅﺛﺭ ﺃﻱ ﺣﺭﻛﺔ ﻣﺗﻘﻁﻌﺔ ﻟﻠﻬﺩﻑ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺿﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ ﺑﺳﺑﺏ ﺑﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ ﻟﺗﺻﻔﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺳﺗﻳﺭﺍﺩﻫﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﺳﺣﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﺳﺣﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﺣﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫● ﺗﻌﺗﻣﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭﻫﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺧﺩﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪/ Auto‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪C‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۱۳٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯﺍ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪ ،Wi-Fi‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ‬
‫ﻟﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭﻩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[ ﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ )ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ] [(‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﺩ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭﻩ )ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ‬
‫] [] [] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ] [(‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ )= ‪(۱۳٥‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫ﻣﺳﺢ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ )= ‪(۱۳٥‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻻﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻌﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﺟﻬﺎﺯ )ﺍﻻﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺽ( ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺿﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ٤‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ“‬
‫)= ‪ ،(۱۳٤‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻻﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻌﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﺟﻬﺎﺯ[ ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫[‬
‫● ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺣﻘﻝ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﻡ ﻣﺳﺗﻌﺎﺭ ﺟﺩﻳﺩ )= ‪.(۳۳‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭﻩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ] [‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﺩ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭﻩ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻻﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻌﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﺟﻬﺎﺯ )= ‪(۱۳٤‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻻﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻌﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ]‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ‬
‫‪ :O‬ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ – ‪ :‬ﻏﻳﺭ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭﻩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ] [‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭﻩ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺳﺢ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﻣﺳﺢ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ )ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻬﺎ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﺣﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ٤‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ“‬
‫)= ‪ ،(۱۳٤‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﻣﺳﺢ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺩ ﻋﺭﺽ ]ﻣﺳﺢ؟[‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪/ Auto‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪C‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۱۳٥‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫● ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻣﺳﺢ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻟﻣﺷﺎﺭﻛﺗﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﺍﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻻﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻌﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﺟﻬﺎﺯ )ﺍﻻﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺽ( ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺿﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺎﺭﻛﺔ‬
‫ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﻠﺗﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻳﻭﻡ‬
‫ﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﻠﺗﻘﻁﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻳﺎﻡ ﻣﺎﺿﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻗﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ‬
‫ﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺯﻧﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺗﻘﻁﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻳﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺗﻘﻁﺔ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻋﺩﺩ ﻣﻌﻳﻥ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻷﻳﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺿﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻧﻳﻑ‬
‫ﺻﻭﺭ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺗﺻﻧﻳﻑ ﻣﻌﻳﻥ )= ‪(۱۰۸‬‬
‫ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺭﻗﻡ ﻣﻠﻑ‬
‫ﺻﻭﺭ ﺿﻣﻥ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﻣﻌﻳﻥ‬
‫ﻳﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻅﻬﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﻳّﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۲‬ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﻫﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ٤‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ“‬
‫)= ‪ ،(۱۳٤‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ[ ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻣﺷﺎﺭﻛﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] []‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺩ ﻋﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ]‬
‫[‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ]ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ[ ﺃﻭ ]ﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﻠﺗﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻳﻭﻡ[‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ]ﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﻠﺗﻘﻁﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻳﺎﻡ ﻣﺎﺿﻳﺔ[‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ‬
‫] [] [ ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻷﻳﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ]ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻧﻳﻑ[‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ‬
‫] [‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ‬
‫] [] [ ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻧﻳﻑ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ]ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺭﻗﻡ ﻣﻠﻑ[‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ‬
‫] [‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ‪ ،‬ﺣﺩﺩ ﺑﺩﺍﻳﺔ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺭﻗﻡ ﻣﻠﻑ‬
‫ﻭﻧﻬﺎﻳﺗﻪ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺗﻳﻥ ‪ ۲‬ﻭ‪ ۳‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻣﺩﻯ“ )= ‪(۱۰۳‬‬
‫ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻧﻁﺎﻕ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ[ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻋﻥ ﺑُﻌﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪/ Auto‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻋِ ﺩ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻧﻘﻝ ﻣﻠﻛﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺧﺹ ﺁﺧﺭ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺧﻠﺹ ﻣﻧﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺅﺩﻱ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ‪ .‬ﻟﺫﺍ‪ ،‬ﻛﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻳﻘﻳﻥ ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻙ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪.[Wi-Fi‬‬
‫[ ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪[Wi-Fi‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪.(۳۲ =) [ 4‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪C‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ]‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫[‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ]‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫[‬
‫● ﺗﺗﻡ ﺣﻳﻧﺋ ٍﺫ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪.Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۱۳٦‬‬
‫● ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ )ﺑﺧﻼﻑ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ (Wi-Fi‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ‬
‫ﻛﻝ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ[ ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪.(۱٤٥ =) [ 4‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪/ Auto‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺿﺑﻁﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﺗﻣﺗﻊ ﺑﺄﻛﺑﺭ ﻗﺩﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺭﺍﺣﺔ‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪ (۳۲ =) MENU‬ﻓﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪ [ 1‬ﻭ]‪ [ 2‬ﻭ]‪ [ 3‬ﻭ]‪ .[ 4‬ﻛﻣﺎ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺷﺎﺋﻌﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺣﺳﺑﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﺭﺍءﻯ ﻟﻙ ﻟﻠﺗﻣﺗﻊ ﺑﺄﻛﺑﺭ ﻗﺩﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺭﺍﺣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﺑﺩﻻً ﻣﻥ ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺟﻠﺩﺍﺕ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻧﺷﺎﺅﻫﺎ ﻛﻝ ﺷﻬﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻟﻠﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﻡ ﺑﻔﺗﺢ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻛﻝ ﻳﻭﻡ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﻓﻳﻪ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻟﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺍﻟﻳﻭﻡ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺇﻧﺷﺎء ﻣﺟﻠﺩ[ ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪ ،[ 1‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ‬
‫]ﻳﻭﻣﻲ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﺣﻳﻧﺋ ٍﺫ ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺟﻠﺩﺍﺕ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻧﺷﺎﺅﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪C‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺗﺭﻗﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ‬
‫ﻛﻝ ﻣﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ ﻣﺎ‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺭﻗﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﺑﺗﺭﺗﻳﺏ ﺗﺳﻠﺳﻠﻲ )‪ (9999–0001‬ﻭﺣﻔﻅﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺟﻠﺩﺍﺕ ﻳﻘﻭﻡ ٍ‬
‫ﻳﺻﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 2000‬ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﺭﻗﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ[ ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪ ،[ 1‬ﺛﻡ ﺣﺩﺩ‬
‫ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫ﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫‪۱۳۷‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺭﻗﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﺗﺗﺎﺑﻊ )ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ‪/‬ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﺭﻗﻡ ‪(9999‬‬
‫ﺣﺗﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺗﻡ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺗﺭﻗﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 0001‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‪،‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺇﻧﺷﺎء ﻣﺟﻠﺩ ﺟﺩﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫● ﺑﻐﺽ ﺍﻟﻧﻅﺭ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺭﻗﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﺗﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺁﺧﺭ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺣﺩﻳﺛﺎ‪ .‬ﻟﺑﺩء ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻡ‬
‫ﺭﻗﻡ ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺑﻬﺎ‬
‫‪ ،0001‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻓﺎﺭﻏﺔ )ﺃﻭ ﺗﻣﺕ ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺗﻬﺎ )= ‪.((۱۳۸‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪/ Auto‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪C‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺟﺩﻳﺩﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺗﻣﺕ ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺗﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺁﺧﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﻧﺑﻐﻲ ﻋﻠﻳﻙ ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺅﺩﻱ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻗﺑﻝ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﻟﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﻧﺳﺦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻟﻧﺳﺧﻬﺎ ﺍﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ[ ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪ ،[ 1‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۱۳۸‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺧﻔﺽ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﺟﺭﺍء ﻣﺳﺢ ﻣﻧﺧﻔﺽ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪ :‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ]ﺧﻁﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ[ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻧﺧﻔﺿﺕ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﻗﺭﺍءﺓ‪/‬ﻛﺗﺎﺑﺔ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻧﺧﻔﺿﺕ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻔﺎﺟﺊ‪ .‬ﺗﺅﺩﻱ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺧﻔﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺳﺢ‬
‫ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻗﺑﻝ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺧﻔﺽ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﻧﺳﺦ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻟﻧﺳﺧﻬﻡ ﺍﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻅﺎﻫﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۲‬ﻣﻥ ”ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ“ )= ‪ ،(۱۳۸‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[‬
‫ﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ] [ ﺑﺟﺎﻧﺏ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻣﺳﺢ ﻣﻧﺧﻔﺽ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۲‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ“ )= ‪(۱۳۸‬‬
‫ﻟﻣﺗﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ]‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫[‬
‫● ﺗﺗﻡ ﺣﻳﻧﺋ ٍﺫ ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫● ﻗﺩ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺳﻌﺔ ﺍﻹﺟﻣﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳُﺷﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻳﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺃﻗﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻣُﻌﻠﻥ ﻋﻧﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺗﺅﺩﻱ ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻓﻘﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﻻ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺗﻣﺎﻣًﺎ‪ .‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﻧﻘﻝ ﻣﻠﻛﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺧﻠﺹ ﻣﻧﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺷﺧﺻﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺯﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺭ‪،‬‬
‫ﻣﺛﻝ ﺗﺣﻁﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﻓﻌﻠﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺳﺗﻐﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺧﻔﺽ ﻭﻗ ًﺗﺎ ﺃﻁﻭﻝ ﻣﻥ ”ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ“ )= ‪ ،(۱۳۸‬ﻷﻧﻪ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻣﺳﺢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻥ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺧﻔﺽ ﺍﻟﺟﺎﺭﻱ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺇﻟﻐﺎء[‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻛﻥ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻁﺑﻳﻌﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻹﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺗﻧﺳﻳﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﺩﻳﻭ‬
‫ﻳﺗﻳﺢ ﻟﻙ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪ .‬ﻛﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻳﻘﻭﻡ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺑﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫)ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ( ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﻓﺭﺓ ﻟﻸﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻹﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺎﻟﺗﻪ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻳﺔ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻅ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﻡ ﺑﺫﻟﻙ ﻣﺎ ﻟﻡ ﺗﻘﻡ‬
‫ﺑﻣﻌﺎﻳﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻹﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻲ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺇﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻲ[ ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪ ،[ 1‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﺩﻳﻭ[ ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪ ،[ 1‬ﺛﻡ ﺣﺩﺩ‬
‫ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫● ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺑﻁ[‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫● ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪/ Auto‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪C‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۱۳۹‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻗﺗﺻﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻹﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻲ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻹﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻲ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺑﺩﺍ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻻ ﻳﺳﺎﻋﺩﻙ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻌﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﻗﺔ ﺃﻛﺑﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺎﻳﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﻌﺭﺽ ﺧﻁﻭﻁ )= ‪ (۳۰‬ﻟﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩﺗﻙ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻌﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﻣﺳﺗﻭ ﻣﻘﺩﻣًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ٍ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﻭﺍء ﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺳﺗﻭ ﻣﺛﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻭﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻁﺢ‬
‫ٍ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﻣﻌﺎﻳﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻹﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻲ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺇﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻲ[ ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪ ،[ 1‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﻝ ﻳﺳﺎﺭً ﺍ‪/‬ﻳﻣﻳ ًﻧﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺭﺓ ﺃﻓﻘﻳﺔ[‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﻝ ﻟﻸﻣﺎﻡ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻑ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺭﺓ ﻋﻣﻭﺩﻳﺔ[‪،‬‬
‫ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪ .‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺄﻛﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺗﻳﺢ ﻟﻙ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ‬
‫ﺧﻔﺕ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺳﺭﻳﻌًﺎ ﻟﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺍﺳﺗﻬﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻗﺗﺻﺎﺩﻱ[ ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪ ،[ 2‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻅﻬﺭ ]‬
‫[ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ )= ‪.(۱۷٤‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﺧﻔﺕ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺗﻳﻥ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﻌﺩ ﻋﺷﺭ‬
‫ﺛﻭﺍﻥ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻔﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ .‬ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ٍ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺛﻼﺙ ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻕ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ ﻣﻥ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻧﺷﺎﻁ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺍﻻﺳﺗﻌﺩﺍﺩ ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﻟﻛﻥ ﻣﻊ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻣﺅﺷﺭ )ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻲ(‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪/ Auto‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺗﻭﻓﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻔﺗﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺯﻣﻧﻳﺔ ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ )ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‪ ،‬ﺑﺷﻛﻝ‬
‫ﻣﺗﺗﺎﺑﻊ( ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﺯﻡ )= ‪.(۲۸‬‬
‫● ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﻭﻓﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ[ ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪ ،[ 2‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﺗﻭﻓﻳﺭ ﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺟﺏ ﻋﻠﻳﻙ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ[ ﻟﻺﻋﺩﺍﺩ ]ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ[ ﻭ]‪ 1‬ﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ[ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﻝ‬
‫ﻟﻺﻋﺩﺍﺩ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪C‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۱٤۰‬‬
‫● ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ[ ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪ ،[ 2‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﺣﺩﺩ ﻋﻧﺻﺭً ﺍ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ] [ ﻟﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪،‬‬
‫ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ[ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ]ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﺗﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺗﻭﻓﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻫﺫﻩ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻗﺗﺻﺎﺩﻱ )= ‪ (۱۳۹‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ[‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‬
‫● ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻗﺻﻰ ﺣﺩ ﻟﻠﺳﻁﻭﻉ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻝ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﻔﺭﺩﺓ‪) .‬ﺳﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺗﺟﺎﻫﻝ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ]ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ[ ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪ (.[ 2‬ﻻﺳﺗﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻝ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻡ‬
‫ﺑﺈﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪/ Auto‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻭﻗﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻣﻲ‬
‫ﻟﺿﻣﺎﻥ ﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺗﻙ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻭﺍﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻷﻭﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﺣﻳﺣﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺳﻔﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺝ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻁ ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻬﺔ ﻣﻘﺩﻣًﺎ ﻭﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺯﻣﻧﻳﺔ ﻫﺫﻩ‪ .‬ﺗﺧﻠﺻﻙ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻳﺣﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻳﺩﻭﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﻗﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻣﻲ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺯﻣﻧﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻠﻳﺔ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻣﻭﺿﺢ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ“ )= ‪.(۱۸‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ]‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ] ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻡ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪۱٤۱‬‬
‫[‬
‫● ﻟﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﻗﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻳﻔﻲ )ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ(‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ‬
‫] [ ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﻏﻳّﺭ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﺯﻡ‪.‬‬
‫[‬
‫● ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[ ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪ ،[ 2‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ] [] [] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ‬
‫] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻟﻐﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺯﻣﻧﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺻﻭﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ]‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ] ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻡ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫● ﻳﻅﻬﺭ ]‬
‫[ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ )= ‪.(۱۷٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺧﻳﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﻗﻡ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻬﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫● ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ[ ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪ ،[ 2‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻬﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺯﻣﻧﻳﺔ[ ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪ ،[ 2‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪C‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ] [ )= ‪ (۱۹‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺙ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﻳﻥ ﺑﺈﻋﺩﺍﺩ ] ﺍﻟﺑﻠﺩ[ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﻙ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫[‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ[ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﻛﺗﻡ ﺻﻭﺕ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻛﺗﻡ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺻﻔﻳﺭ[ ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪ ،[ 3‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪/ Auto‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺇﺧﻔﺎء ﺍﻟﻧﺻﺎﺋﺢ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻠﻣﻳﺣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪C‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺎﺩ ًﺓ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻧﺻﺎﺋﺢ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻠﻣﻳﺣﺎﺕ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻳﻊ )= ‪ (۳۱‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ )= ‪ .(٦۱‬ﻭﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻧﺕ ﺗﺭﻏﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻙ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﻧﺻﺎﺋﺢ ﻭﺗﻠﻣﻳﺣﺎﺕ[ ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪ ،[ 3‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺳﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺣﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺳﻳﺔ ﻟﻼﺳﺗﺟﺎﺑﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺭﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺱ ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺟﺎﺑﺔ ﻟﻬﺎ ﻣﻁﻠ ًﻘﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺱ[ ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪ ،[ 3‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺣﺳﺎﺱ[ ﻟﺗﺣﺳﻳﻥ ﺣﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺳﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ‬
‫]ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ[ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺳﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱٤۲‬‬
‫ﺗﺗﻣﺗﻊ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﺑﺈﻣﻛﺎﻧﻬﺎ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺑﺎﺭ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻥ ﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻠﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻭﻓﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﻫﺫﻩ‪،‬‬
‫ﻣﺗﻰ ﺭﻏﺑﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺗﻣﺎﻣًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫● ﻻﺣﻅ ﺍﻻﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺳﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ ﻧﻅﺭً ﺍ ﻟﻌﺩﻡ ﺣﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﻟﻠﺿﻐﻁ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺃﻱ ﺃﺷﻳﺎء ﺣﺎﺩﺓ ﻛﺎﻷﻅﺎﻓﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻗﻼﻡ‬‫ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺳﻧﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﺑﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻹﺟﺭﺍء ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺱ‪.‬‬
‫ ﻻ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺃﺻﺎﺑﻊ ﻣﺑﻠﻠﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺱ‪.‬‬‫ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﻫﻧﺎﻙ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺭﻁﻭﺑﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﺃﺻﺎﺑﻌﻙ ﻣﺑﺗﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﻻ ﺗﺳﺗﺟﻳﺏ‬‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺱ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺩ ﻳﺣﺩﺙ ﺧﻁﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻠﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭﻗﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﻣﺳﺢ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺑﻘﻁﻌﺔ ﻗﻣﺎﺵ‪.‬‬
‫ ﻻ ﺗﻠﺻﻕ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺃﻏﻁﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻗﻳﺔ )ﻣﺗﻭﻓﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻭﺍﻕ( ﺃﻭ ﻣﻠﺻﻘﺎﺕ ﺑﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ .LCD‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ‬‫ﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﺳﺗﺟﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺳﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﺩ ﻻ ﺗﺳﺗﺟﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺳﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ]ﺣﺳﺎﺱ[ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻧﻔﻳﺫ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﻟﻣﺱ ﻣﺗﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺩ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ[ ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪ ،[ 3‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ] [‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ]‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫● ﻭﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻓﺿﻝ ﺍﻟﻧﺗﺎﺋﺞ ﻣﻥ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ‪ ،‬ﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻣﻭﺩﻳًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻛﺗﺏ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ‬
‫ﺳﻁﺢ ﺁﺧﺭ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻔﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺗﺗﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺗﺎﺋﺞ ﺃﻓﺿﻝ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪ .‬ﻗﺩ ﻻ‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺗﻛﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ‬
‫ٍ‬
‫ﻳﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﺍﻵﻥ‬
‫[ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻏﺑﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺎﺩﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻟﻡ ﺗﺗﻡ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺗﻪ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺻﻝ ﺑﺄﺣﺩ ﻣﻛﺎﺗﺏ ‪ Canon‬ﻟﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﺩﻋﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻼء‪.‬‬
‫[‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪/ Auto‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪C‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﻳﺩﻭﻱ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻏﺑﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻟﻡ ﺗﺗﻡ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺗﻬﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ‪ ،‬ﺣﺎﻭﻝ‬
‫ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻔﻪ ﻳﺩﻭﻳًﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﻧﻔﺎﺥ ﺃﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﻣﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﻭﺍﻕ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺁﺧﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻟﻠﻌﻠﻡ‪ ،‬ﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺷﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺣﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﺫﺍ‪ ،‬ﻳﻭﺻﻰ ﺑﺷﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺭﺟﻭﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺭﻛﺯ ﺍﻟﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺑﻊ‬
‫ﻟﺷﺭﻛﺔ ‪) Canon‬ﻣﺑﻳّﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ( ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﺯﻡ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﻳﺩﻭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺩ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ[ ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪ ،[ 3‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ]‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﺍﻵﻥ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫[] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ]‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ]‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫● ﺗﺷﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﺟﺭﻱ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺭﻏﻡ ﻣﻥ ﺳﻣﺎﻉ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ‪ ،‬ﺇﻻ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻟﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺃﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۱٤۳‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫[‬
‫● ﻳﻌﻣﻝ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﻋﺩﻡ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺃﻱ ﻋﺩﺳﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺃﻱ ﻋﺩﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻻ‬
‫ُﺗﺩﺧﻝ ﺇﺻﺑﻌﻙ ﺃﻭ ﻁﺭﻑ ﻣﻧﻔﺎﺥ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﺍء ﺧﻠﻑ ﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﻟﻠﺣﻳﻠﻭﻟﺔ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻠﻑ ﺳﺗﺎﺋﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ‪.‬‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ّ‬
‫ﻧﻅﻑ ﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻟﻠﻌﻠﻡ‪ ،‬ﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺷﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺣﺳﺎﺳﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻠﺯﻡ ﺗﻭﺧﻲ ﺍﻟﺣﺫﺭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﻧﻔﺎﺧﺎ ﻣﺯﻭﺩًﺍ ﺑﻔﺭﺷﺎﺓ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﺗﺅﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻔﺭﺵ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻑ ﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﻣﺟﺭﺩ ﺍﻻﺣﺗﻛﺎﻙ ﺑﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺩﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻔﺎﺥ ﻓﻲ ﺳﻁﺢ ﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺫﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻏﺎﺯ ﺃﻭ ﻫﻭﺍء ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ‪ .‬ﻗﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺗﺩﻓﻕ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺗﻔﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻑ‬
‫ﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﺭﺑﻣﺎ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺗﻛﺛﻑ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﺯ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺟﻣﺩﻩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻑ ﺳﻁﺢ ﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺳﺗﻣﺭ ﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻔﺎﺥ‪ ،‬ﻓﻳﻭﺻﻰ ﺑﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻟﺩﻯ ﻣﺭﻛﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻟﺷﺭﻛﺔ ‪.Canon‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻣﺭﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺷﻌﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺷﻬﺎﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺷﻌﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﺗﻁﻠﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺷﻬﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻔﻲ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﺗﻡ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺷﻌﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺷﻬﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺑﻭﺓ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﻋﺭﺽ ﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﻬﺎﺩﺓ[ ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪،[ 4‬‬
‫ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪/ Auto‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺣﺫﻑ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻘﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻊ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪C‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۱٤٤‬‬
‫● ﻟﻠﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻘﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻊ[ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ (۱٥۸ =) EOS Utility‬ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻘﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻊ‬
‫ﻭﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭﻫﺎ ﻭﺣﺫﻓﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺩ ﻻ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻷﺣﺭﻑ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻛﻥ ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺻﺣﻳﺢ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻣﺭﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻘﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺣﻔﻅ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺣﺫﻑ ﻛﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺍﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺅﻟﻑ ﻭﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺣﻘﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻊ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺱ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻘﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻊ ﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺅﻟﻑ ﻭﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺣﻘﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﻣﺳﺑ ًﻘﺎ ﺑﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻘﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻊ[ ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪،[ 4‬‬
‫ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ] [‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺅﻟﻑ[ ﺃﻭ ]ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺣﻘﻭﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻊ[‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﻟﻠﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺃﺩﺧﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﻡ )= ‪.(۳۳‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ]ﻗﺑﻭﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭﺍﺕ؟[‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻧﻌﻡ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻧﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ”ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻘﻭﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻊ ﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ“ )= ‪ (۱٤٤‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺣﺫﻑ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻘﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻊ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ]‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺣﺫﻑ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻘﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻝ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫[‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪/ Auto‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﻓﻳﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﻓﺭﺓ ﻟﻼﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‪.‬‬
‫● ]ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪) [Wi-Fi‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪(۱۱٥ =) ([ 4‬‬
‫● ]ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻣﺧﺻﺹ )‪) [(C‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪(۹۰ =) ([ 4‬‬
‫● ]‬
‫ﺇﺻﺩﺍﺭ ﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ ﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‪) [*.*.* :‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪) ([ 4‬ﻳُﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺙ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ(‬
‫● ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺛﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺕ‪ ،‬ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺱ ﻟﻣﻧﻊ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺻﻭﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪C‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۱٤٥‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻋﺭﺿﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﺳﺗﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻛﻝ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻛﻝ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ[ ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪،[ 4‬‬
‫ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ]‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﺗﺗﻡ ﺣﻳﻧﺋ ٍﺫ ﺍﺳﺗﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫[‬
‫● ﻻ ﺗﺗﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ ]ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﺩﻳﻭ[ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪(۱۳۹ =) [ 1‬‬‫ ]ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺯﻣﻧﻳﺔ[ )= ‪ (۱٤۱‬ﻭ]ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ[ )= ‪ (۱٤۱‬ﻭ]ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ [ )= ‪ (۱٤۱‬ﻓﻲ‬‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪[ 2‬‬
‫ ]ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ[ ﺃﻭ ]ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ C.Fn‬ﻓﻼﺵ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ[ ﻓﻲ ]ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ[‬‫ﻓﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪[ 3‬‬
‫ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪[ 1‬‬‫ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ )= ‪(٦۱‬‬‫ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ )= ‪(٥۱‬‬‫ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪(۱۱٥ =) Wi-Fi‬‬‫ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻣﺕ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺭﺗﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻹﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻲ )= ‪(۱۳۹‬‬‫‪ -‬ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻘﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻊ )= ‪(۱٤٤‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪/ Auto‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪C‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۱٤٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﻣﺗﻊ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﻥ ﻋﺩﺓ ﺟﻭﺍﻧﺏ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻳﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ ‪ Canon‬ﺍﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺑﻳﻌﻬﺎ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻝ‬
‫ﻳﻭﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ ‪ Canon‬ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﻣﺻﻣﻡ ﻟﺗﺣﻘﻳﻕ ﺃﺩﺍء ﻣﻣﺗﺎﺯ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ ‪ Canon‬ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻻ ﺗﺗﺣﻣﻝ ‪ Canon‬ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﺳﺅﻭﻟﻳﺔ ﻗﺎﻧﻭﻧﻳﺔ ﻋﻥ ﺃﻱ ﺗﻠﻑ ﻳﺣﺩﺙ ﻟﻬﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺣﺩﺍﺙ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺿﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺛﻝ‬
‫ﻧﺷﻭﺏ ﺣﺭﻳﻕ‪ ،‬ﺇﻟﺦ‪ ،‬ﺗﻧﺗﺞ ﻋﻥ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺧﻠﻝ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﻲ ﻷﻳﺔ ﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ ﺑﺧﻼﻑ ﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ ‪ Canon‬ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻳﺔ )ﻣﺛﻝ‬
‫ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺗﺳﺭﺏ ﻟﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻧﻔﺟﺎﺭﻫﺎ(‪ .‬ﻭﺍﻟﺭﺟﺎء ﻣﻼﺣﻅﺔ ﺃﻥ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺿﻣﺎﻥ ﻻ ﻳﻧﻁﺑﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺻﻼﺡ ﺍﻟﻧﺎﺗﺟﺔ ﻋﻥ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺧﻠﻝ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﻲ ﺑﺳﺑﺏ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ ﺑﺧﻼﻑ ﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ ‪ Canon‬ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻳﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﻟﻛﻧﻪ ﻳﺣﻕ ﻟﻙ ﻁﻠﺏ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺻﻼﺡ ﻫﺫﻩ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻝ ﺩﻓﻊ ﻣﺻﺎﺭﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﺻﻳﺎﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻣﺧﻁﻁ ﺍﻟﻧﻅﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ‬
‫ﻋﻥ ﺑُﻌﺩ‬
‫‪RC-6‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪/ Auto‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﻋﺩﺳﺎﺕ ‪EF-S‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﻋﺩﺳﺎﺕ ‪EF‬‬
‫ﻣﻛﺗﺷﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻬﺩ ﺍﻹﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻲ‬
‫‪EVF-DC1‬‬
‫‪Macro Ring Lite‬‬
‫‪MR-14EX II‬‬
‫‪MR-14EX‬‬
‫‪Macro Twin Lite‬‬
‫‪MT-24EX‬‬
‫‪90EX ST-E3-RT ۱*ST-E2‬‬
‫‪270EX II‬‬
‫‪430EX II 320EX‬‬
‫‪600EX-RT‬‬
‫‪600EX‬‬
‫ﻋﺩﺳﺎﺕ ‪EF-M‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ‬
‫‪EF-EOS M‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪C‬‬
‫ﻣﻳﻛﺭﻭﻓﻭﻥ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻛﺑﻝ ‪HDMI‬‬
‫‪HTC-100‬‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪/‬ﻓﻳﺩﻳﻭ‬
‫ﺭﺑﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﻕ‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪*EM-200DB‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫‪*IFC-400PCU‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﻳﺎﺭ ‪PictBridge‬‬
‫ﺭﺑﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﻕ‬
‫‪EM-E2‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‬
‫ﻣﻧﻔﺫ ‪USB‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺭﺉ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‬
‫‪SD/SDHC/SDXC‬‬
‫ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫*‪۱‬‬
‫*‪۲‬‬
‫‪۱٤۷‬‬
‫ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭ ّﻛﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﻳﻠﺯﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ‪ Off-Camera Shoe Cord‬ﻁﺭﺍﺯ ‪ُ ) OC-E3‬ﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻠﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﻟﻠﺷﺭﺍء ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺻﻠﺔ ﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ‬
‫‪DR-E17‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫‪*LC-E17/LC-E17E‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫‪*LP-E17‬‬
‫ﻣﺣﻭﻝ ‪AC‬‬
‫‪CA-PS700‬‬
‫ﺟﺭﺍﺏ ﻟﻠﻬﻳﻛﻝ‬
‫‪EH27-CJ‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪/ Auto‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻠﺔ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻅ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﻳﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﺑﺎﺧﺗﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﺩ ﻻ ﺗﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﺑﻌﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ ﺑﻌﺩﺋﺫٍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ‬
‫● ﺗﺗﻣﺗﻊ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﻐﻁﺎء ﻣﻧﺎﺳﺏ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺑﻪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺣﻭﻧﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻻ ﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺣﻭﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺩﺳﺎﺕ ‪ ،EF-M‬ﻋﺩﺳﺎﺕ ‪ ،EF‬ﻋﺩﺳﺎﺕ ‪EF-S‬‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻣﻥ ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﻣﺗﻧﻭﻋﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺃﻱ ﻫﺩﻑ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺑﻳﺭ ﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻠﺯﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ‪ EF-EOS M‬ﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻋﺩﺳﺗﻲ ‪ EF‬ﻭ‪.EF-S‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ‪EF-EOS M‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪C‬‬
‫● ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻋﺩﺳﺔ ‪ EF‬ﺃﻭ ‪EF-S‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﻭﻓﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪LP-E17‬‬
‫● ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻳﻭﻥ ﻟﻳﺛﻳﻭﻡ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻁﺭﺍﺯ ‪LC-E17/LC-E17E‬‬
‫● ﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﻟﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪LP-E17‬‬
‫‪۱٤۸‬‬
‫● ﻟﺗﺯﻭﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺯﻟﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻭﺻﻰ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﺣﻭﻝ ‪ AC‬ﻣﻊ ﻭﺻﻠﺔ ﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻟﻔﺗﺭﺍﺕ ﺯﻣﻧﻳﺔ ﻁﻭﻳﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺑﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪ .‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﻟﺷﺣﻥ‬
‫ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫● ُﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺣﻭﻝ ‪.AC‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﻣﺣﻭﻝ ‪AC CA-PS700‬‬
‫ﻭﺻﻠﺔ ﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ ‪DR-E17‬‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ]ﺧﻁﺄ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ[ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺧﻼﻑ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ‬
‫‪ Canon‬ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺟﺏ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺎﻣﻝ ﻣﻊ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﺄ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻅ ﺃﻥ ‪ Canon‬ﻻ‬
‫ﺗﺗﺣﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺅﻭﻟﻳﺔ ﻋﻥ ﺃﻱ ﺗﻠﻔﻳﺎﺕ ﻧﺎﺟﻣﺔ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻭﺍﺩﺙ‪ ،‬ﻣﺛﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻁﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﻳﻕ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺣﺩﺙ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺣﺯﻡ ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺃﺻﻠﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ‪.Canon‬‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﻣﺣﻭﻝ ‪ AC‬ﻓﻲ ﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻣﺗﺭﺩﺩ ﻳﺗﺭﺍﻭﺡ ﺟﻬﺩﻩ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﻲ‬
‫ﺑﻳﻥ ‪ ۱۰۰‬ﻭ‪ ۲٤۰‬ﻓﻭﻟﺕ )‪ ٦۰/٥۰‬ﻫﺭﺗﺯ(‪.‬‬
‫● ﻭﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﻣﻧﺎﻓﺫ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻣﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺗﻠﻑ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺃﺣﺩ ﻣﺣﻭﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻭﺍﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻡ ﻣﻁﻠ ًﻘﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﺣﻭﻝ ﻛﻬﺭﺑﻲ ﻣﺻﻣﻡ ﻟﻠﺳﻔﺭ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻑ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ‪ Off-Camera Shoe Cord‬ﻁﺭﺍﺯ ‪OC-E3‬‬
‫● ﻋﺑﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻥ ﺳﻠﻙ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ‪Speedlite‬‬
‫ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻝ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪/ Auto‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪C‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۱٤۹‬‬
‫‪Speedlite 600EX-RT/600EX/430EX II/‬‬
‫‪320EX/270EX II/90EX‬‬
‫● ﻫﻭ ﻋﺑﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻥ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺑﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺎﻋﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ ﻭﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﻟﻳﺏ ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺗﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ .‬ﻛﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﺍﻟﺩﻋﻡ ﻟﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ‪Speedlite‬‬
‫‪ 580EX II‬ﻭ‪ 580EX‬ﻭ‪ 550EX‬ﻭ‪430EX‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ 420EX‬ﻭ‪ 380EX‬ﻭ‪ 270EX‬ﻭ‪.220EX‬‬
‫‪Speedlite Transmitter ST-E3-RT/ST-E2‬‬
‫● ﺗﺗﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪Speedlite‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﺭﻋﻳﺔ )ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺛﻧﺎء ‪.(Speedlite 220EX/270EX‬‬
‫● ﻗﺩ ﻳﻠﺯﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ‪Off-Camera Shoe Cord‬‬
‫ﻁﺭﺍﺯ ‪ OC-E3‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ‪ ST-E2‬ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﻋﺩﺳﺎﺕ ﻣﻌﻳﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪Macro Twin Lite MT-24EX‬‬
‫‪Macro Ring Lite MR-14EX II/MR-14EX‬‬
‫● ﻋﺑﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻥ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ macro‬ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻳﺔ ﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺳﺎﻟﻳﺏ ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺗﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻲ ﺑﻔﻼﺵ ‪.macro‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﻣﻛﺗﺷﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻬﺩ ﺍﻹﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻲ ‪EVF-DC1‬‬
‫● ﻟﺗﻳﺳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑُﻌﺩ ‪RC-6‬‬
‫● ﺗﺗﻳﺢ ﻟﻙ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﺛﺑﺗﺔ ﻋﻥ ﺑُﻌﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﺭﺍﺏ ‪ EH27-CJ‬ﻟﻠﻬﻳﻛﻝ‬
‫● ﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻷﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺧﺩﻭﺵ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺑﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﻕ ‪EM-E2‬‬
‫● ﺭﺑﺎﻁ ﻣﺻﻧﻭﻉ ﻣﻥ ﻧﻔﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﻧﻭﻉ ﻣﻧﻬﺎ ﺟﺭﺍﺏ‬
‫‪ EH27-CJ‬ﻟﻠﻬﻳﻛﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ‪IFC-400PCU‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫● ﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫● ﻛﺑﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ‪ IFC-200U‬ﻭ‪ IFC-500U‬ﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫ﻛﺑﻝ ‪HDMI HTC-100‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫● ﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﻣﺩﺧﻝ ‪ HDMI‬ﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ‬
‫ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺩﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪/ Auto‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪C‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻁﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ ‪ Canon‬ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﻳﺎﺭ ‪PictBridge‬‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪،‬‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺗﻔﺿﻝ ﺑﺯﻳﺎﺭﺓ ﺃﻗﺭﺏ ﻣﻭﺯﻉ‬
‫‪ Canon‬ﻟﺩﻳﻙ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻳﺗﻳﺢ ﻟﻙ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺩﻗﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻛﺑﻝ ‪) HDMI HTC-100‬ﻳُﺑﺎﻉ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻼً(‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻙ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻳﺭﺓ ﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺗﻡ‬
‫[‬
‫[ ﺃﻭ ]‬
‫[ ﺃﻭ ]‬
‫[ ﺃﻭ ]‬
‫[ ﺃﻭ ]‬
‫ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭﻫﺎ ﺑﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ]‬
‫ﻋﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻭﺿﻭﺡ ٍ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺃﻭ ﻛﻳﻔﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﺧﻼﺕ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺻِ ﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻣﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻗﺎﺑﺱ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺩﺧﻝ ‪ HDMI‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻣﻭﺿﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۱٥۰‬‬
‫● ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﻓﺗﺢ ﻏﻁﺎء ﺃﻁﺭﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﻭﺃﺩﺧﻝ ﻗﺎﺑﺱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻓﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪/ Auto‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺩﺧﻝ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺯﻭﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺯﻟﻳﺔ‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺣﻭﻳﻝ ﻣﺩﺧﻝ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻝ ﺑﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.۲‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[ ﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﻳﺧﻠﺻﻙ ﺗﺯﻭﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻁﺎﻗﻡ ﻣﺣﻭﻝ ‪) AC CA-PS700‬ﻳُﺑﺎﻉ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻝ( ﻣﻊ ﻭﺻﻠﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ ‪ُ ) DR-E17‬ﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻝ( ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺭﺍﻗﺑﺔ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺷﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺑﻘﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻵﻥ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ‪) .‬ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺷﻲء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪(.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻬﺎء‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ‬
‫ﻗﺑﻝ ﻓﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻝ‪.‬‬
‫˺‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻣﻊ ﺣﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻠﺔ ﻭﺗﻭﺟﻳﻪ ﺍﻷﻁﺭﺍﻑ )‪ (۱‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻣﻭﺿﺢ‪،‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻠﺔ ﺗﻣﺎﻣًﺎ ﻣﺛﻠﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ )ﺑﺎﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۲‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ“ )= ‪.((۱۷‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺩﻋﻡ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺱ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻳﺭﺓ ﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﺫﺍﺗﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ )= ‪.(۱۰۰‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ٤‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ“ )= ‪ (۱۸‬ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۱‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ“ )= ‪ (۱۷‬ﻟﻔﺗﺢ ﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪C‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫˻‬
‫˺‬
‫ﺻِ ﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻭﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﻓﺗﺢ ﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء ﻭﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻗﺎﺑﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻭﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻠﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺻِ ﻝ ﺳﻠﻙ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺻِ ﻝ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺃﻁﺭﺍﻑ ﺳﻠﻙ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﻣﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﻣﺞ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﺻِ ﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻑ ﺍﻵﺧﺭ ﺑﻣﺄﺧﺫ ﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻛﻣﺎ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻬﺎء‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﻓﺻﻝ ﺳﻠﻙ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻥ ﻣﺄﺧﺫ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱٥۱‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪/ Auto‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪C‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﺗﻔﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻭﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺳﻠﻙ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﻭﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻗﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﺗﻘﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻭﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺳﻠﻙ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻭﻝ ﺑﺄﺟﺳﺎﻡ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﻡ ﺑﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﻋﻁﻝ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻔﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ُﺑﻌﺩ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑُﻌﺩ ‪ُ ) RC-6‬ﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻝ( ﻻﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑُﻌﺩ ﻳﺻﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٥‬ﺃﻣﺗﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺟﺯء ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﻟﻠﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۱‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ“ )= ‪(٤۰‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺟﻳﻪ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑُﻌﺩ ﻧﺣﻭ ﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑُﻌﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ‬
‫ُﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻗﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻣﻛﺗﺷﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻬﺩ ﺍﻹﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻲ ﻭﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻳﺔ ) ُﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻝ(‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺃﺯﻝ ﻏﻁﺎء ﻗﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺳﺣﺏ ﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء ﻟﻠﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺳﻬﻡ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﺗﺟﻧﺏ ﻓﻘﺩ ﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء‪ ،‬ﺿﻌﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺣﻘﻳﺑﺔ ﻣﻛﺗﺷﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻬﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺭ ّﻛﺏ ﻏﻁﺎء ﻗﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺩ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻛﺗﺷﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻬﺩ‪ ،‬ﺃﻋﺩ‬
‫ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء ﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﻗﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺭ ّﻛﺏ ﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺳﻬﻡ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﺗﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﻣﺞ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ ﺑﺟﺎﻧﺏ ﻣﻛﺗﺷﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻬﺩ ﺍﻹﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻲ ‪EVF-DC1‬‬
‫ﺑﻘﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺻﻁﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﻬﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‪ .‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﻧﻁﻠﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺣﻳﻧﺋﺫٍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﺩ ﺗﺅﺩﻱ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻠﻭﺭﺳﻧﺕ ﺃﻭ ‪ LED‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺳﻠﻳﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﻗﺻﺩ‪ .‬ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﻌﻳﺩًﺍ ﻋﻥ ﻣﺻﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻫﺫﻩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻭﺟﻳﻪ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑُﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﻧﺣﻭ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺛﻡ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻠﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ‬
‫ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺳﻠﻳﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﻗﺻﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑُﻌﺩ ﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ )= ‪.(٥۸‬‬
‫‪۱٥۲‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﺗﻔﺗﺢ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻣﺛﻝ ﻣﻛﺗﺷﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻬﺩ ﺍﻹﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻲ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﻘﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﺗﺻﻁﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﻣﻛﺗﺷﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻬﺩ ﺍﻹﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻲ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﻛﺗﺷﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻬﺩ ﺍﻹﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻲ )ﻳﺑﺎﻉ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻼً(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪/ Auto‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻣﻛﺗﺷﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻬﺩ ﺍﻹﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻲ )ﻳﺑﺎﻉ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻼً( ﻟﻼﻗﺗﺭﺍﺏ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺃﻛﺑﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻪ ﺑﺳﻬﻭﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﻛﺗﺷﻑ ﻣﺷﻬﺩ ﺇﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﻣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻭﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ )ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.(LCD‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭ ّﻛﺏ ﻣﻛﺗﺷﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻬﺩ ﺍﻹﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫● ﺃﺯﻝ ﻏﻁﺎء ﻣﻛﺗﺷﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻬﺩ ﺍﻹﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫● ﺭ ّﻛﺏ ﻣﻛﺗﺷﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻬﺩ ﺍﻹﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ‬
‫)= ‪ (۱٥۲‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﺢ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺗﺳﺗﻘﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻛﺎﻧﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻣﺻﺩﺭ ًﺓ ﺻﻭﺕ ﻧﻘﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪C‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۱٥۳‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻣﻛﺗﺷﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻬﺩ ﺍﻹﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻲ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﺭّ ﺏ ﻋﻳﻧﻳﻙ ﻣﻥ ﻣﻛﺗﺷﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻬﺩ ﺍﻹﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﻳﺗﻡ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺃﺑﻌِﺩ ﻋﻳﻧﻳﻙ ﻭﺳﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻛﺗﺷﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻬﺩ ﻭﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻬﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﺗﺳﻧﻰ ﻟﻙ ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩﺓ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻛﺗﺷﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻬﺩ ﺍﻹﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻲ ﺑﻭﺿﻭﺡ‪.‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫ﺃﺯﻝ ﻣﻛﺗﺷﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻬﺩ ﺍﻹﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻲ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﺇﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻝ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭﻗﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‪ [UNLOCK‬ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﻣﻛﺗﺷﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻬﺩ ﺍﻹﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻲ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺗﻪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺃﺯﻝ ﻣﻛﺗﺷﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻬﺩ ﺍﻹﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻲ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺣﺗﻔﻅ ﺑﻪ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻣﻛﺎﻥ ﺁﻣﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻣﻛﺗﺷﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻬﺩ ﺍﻹﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻲ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻣﻛﺗﺷﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻬﺩ ﺍﻹﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻲ ﺣﺗﻰ‬
‫‪ ۹۰‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺣﺳﺑﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﻁﻠﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻬﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻛﺗﺷﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻬﺩ ﺍﻹﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻲ ﻭﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﻌًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺳﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﻣﻛﺗﺷﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻬﺩ ﺍﻹﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫●‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫●‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪/ Auto‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫●‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪C‬‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺭﻏﻡ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺗﻡ ﺇﻧﺗﺎﺝ ﻣﻛﺗﺷﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻬﺩ ﺍﻹﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻲ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺗﺻﻧﻳﻊ ﻓﺎﺋﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺩﻗﺔ ﻭﺃﻥ‬
‫ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﻣﻥ ‪ ٪۹۹٫۹۹‬ﻣﻥ ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﻛﺳﻝ ﺗﺗﻭﺍﻓﻕ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻣﻳﻡ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺑﻌﺽ ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﻛﺳﻝ ﻣﻌﻳﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺩ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺣﻣﺭﺍء ﻭﺳﻭﺩﺍء ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﻧﺎﺩﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻳﺱ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺧﻠﻼً‬
‫ﻭﻅﻳﻔﻳًﺎ‪ .‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻻ ﻳﺅﺛﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺟﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺩ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺃﺷﺭﻁﺔ ﺳﻭﺩﺍء ﺃﻓﻘﻳﺔ ﻭﺭﺃﺳﻳﺔ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ )= ‪.(٤٥‬‬
‫ﺗﺷﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺷﺭﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﻭﺩﺍء ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻛﺗﺷﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻬﺩ ﺍﻹﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻲ ﻟﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ )= ‪ ،(۳۲‬ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺭﺽ[‪ ،‬ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪ ،[ 1‬ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫]ﻳﺩﻭﻱ[ ﻟﻼﺣﺗﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﺣﺗﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﻋﻳﻧﻳﻙ ﻋﻥ ﻣﻛﺗﺷﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻬﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻣﻛﺗﺷﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻬﺩ ﺍﻹﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻲ ﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ‪.‬‬
‫[‬
‫[ ﻭ]‬
‫ﻳﺗﻳﺢ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﻛﺗﺷﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻬﺩ ﺍﻹﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ] [ ﻭ] [ ﻭ]‬
‫ﻭ] [ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﺗﻊ ﺑﻌﺭﺽ ﺳﻠﺳﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺗﻲ ﻣﻛﺗﺷﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻬﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ )= ‪،(۳۲‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ[‪ ،‬ﻓﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪ ،[ 1‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺗﻭﻓﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ[ ﻟﻠﺭﺟﻭﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻻﺣﺗﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻅﻬﻭﺭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ (۱۱٥ =) Wi-Fi‬ﺃﻭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ )= ‪ (۳۳‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻛﺗﺷﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻬﺩ ﺍﻹﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻲ‪ ،‬ﺗﻧﺗﻘﻝ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ )= ‪ (۱٤۰‬ﻟﺷﺎﺷﺗﻲ ﻣﻛﺗﺷﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻬﺩ ﺍﻹﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ) ُﻳﺑﺎﻉ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻼً(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺗﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻁﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﺋﺔ‬
‫‪ .Speedlite EX‬ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪ Speedlite 320EX‬ﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ‪.LED‬‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻻﺕ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﻻ ﺗﻧﻁﻠﻕ ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ Canon‬ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻻ ﺗﻧﺗﻣﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﺋﺔ ‪ EX‬ﺑﺷﻛﻝ‬
‫ﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺩ ﻻ ﺗﻧﻁﻠﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻁﻼﻕ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﺩ ﻳﻌﻳﻕ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻏﻳﺭ ‪) Canon‬ﻭﺑﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺩ( ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻳﻌﻲ ﻟﻠﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﻗﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻔﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺳﻠﺳﻠﺔ ‪ Speedlite EX‬ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻉ ‪ A‬ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻪ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﻣﻳﺯﺍﺕ ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﺋﺔ ‪.EX‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۱٥٤‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺭ ّﻛﺏ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺛﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻵﻥ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺭﻣﺯ ] [ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺿﻲء ﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺟﻳﻬﻲ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻌﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ] [ ﺃﻭ ]‬
‫[ ﺃﻭ ]‬
‫[ ﺃﻭ ]‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﻓﻘﻁ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺗﻡ‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻭﺇﻁﻼﻗﻪ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‪ ،‬ﺣﺳﺑﻣﺎ‬
‫ﻳﻠﺯﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪(۱٥٥ =) .‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺗﻘﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ]ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ[ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪3‬‬
‫ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪:‬‬
‫● ﺍﻧﻁﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )= ‪(۷٥‬‬
‫● ﻗﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪(۷۷ =) E-TTL II‬‬
‫● ﺃﺑﻌِﺩ ﺍﻷﺳﻼﻙ )ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻭﺣﺩﺓ ‪ Macro Ring Lite‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ،Macro Twin Lite‬ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ‪ (Off-Camera Shoe Cord‬ﻋﻥ ﺭﺅﻭﺱ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺿﺑﻁ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﺭﺟﻝ ﻟﻣﻧﻊ ﺭﺅﻭﺱ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻣﻥ ﻟﻣﺳﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﺩ ﺗﻼﻣﺱ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﺣﺳﺏ ﻣﻭﺿﻌﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻟﻠﺣﻳﻠﻭﻟﺔ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ )= ‪(۱٥٥‬‬
‫● ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ )= ‪(۱٥٦‬‬
‫● ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺑﻁ )= ‪(۱٥۷‬‬
‫● ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ[‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺟﺎﻧﺏ ﺍﻷﻳﺳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪C‬‬
‫●‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫●‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫●‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫●‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﻣﺞ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻣﻥ ﺳﻠﺳﻠﺔ ‪Speedlite‬‬
‫‪ EX‬ﻷﻥ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻫﺫﻩ ﻟﻡ ﻳﻌﺩ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻳﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 320EX‬ﻓﻘﻁ‪ :‬ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ‪ LED‬ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻘﻁ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫ﻣﻧﺧﻔﺿﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻥ ﻳﻧﻁﻠﻕ ‪-AF‬ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ‪Speedlite‬‬
‫‪ُ ) 320EX‬ﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻠﺔ(‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ ‪ LED‬ﻟﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩﺓ ‪-AF‬ﺷﻌﺎﻉ ﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ] [] [] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ‬
‫] [ ﻟﺿﺑﻁﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﻣﻳﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻑ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﻣﻳﺽ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﺗﻧﺎﺳﺏ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻌﺗﺑﺭ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ]ﻗﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪ [E-TTL II‬ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﺋﺔ ‪ EX‬ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳُﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ]ﻓﻼﺵ ﻳﺩﻭﻱ[ ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ]ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺧﺭﺝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ[ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﻭﺣﺩﺓ ‪ Speedlite‬ﺑﻧﻔﺳﻙ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﻻﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ‬
‫‪۱٥٥‬‬
‫[ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ )= ‪(۳۲‬‬
‫● ﺗﺧﻔﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺭﺍء )= ‪(٤۷‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪/ Auto‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‬
‫● ﻭﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﻣﻳﺽ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ‪ Speedlite‬ﺫﻱ ﺍﻟﺻﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻲ )ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ( ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ .‬ﻋﻧﺩ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ”ﻗﻧﺎﺓ‬
‫ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻭ“ ﻭ”ﻗﻧﺎﺓ ﺑﺻﺭﻳﺔ“ ﻭ”ﺍﻧﻁﻼﻕ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺭﺋﻳﺳﻲ“‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫‪ Speedlite‬ﺫﻱ ﺍﻟﺻﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺯﻭﻡ ﻓﻼﺵ )ﺗﻐﻁﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫● ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ]‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪/ Auto‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺗﺯﺍﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪C‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﻓﻼﺵ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺧﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺗﺩﺭﺝ ﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺇﺣﺻﺎء ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﺗﺭﺩﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫‪ A:B‬ﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ‬
‫‪۱٥٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻑ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ‪ Speedlites‬ﺍﻟﻣﺯﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﺭﺃﺱ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻟﻠﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺗﻐﻁﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ .‬ﻳﺟﺏ ﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ ،[AUTO‬ﺣﺗﻰ ﺗﺳﺗﻁﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺗﻐﻁﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‬
‫ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﺑُﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺗﻭﻗﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻭﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪:‬‬
‫[ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻧﻁﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﻌﺩ ﻓﺗﺢ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻧﻁﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﺳﺗﺎﺭﺓ‬
‫● ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ‪ ۱/۱۰۰‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺭﻉ‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ”ﺗﺯﺍﻣﻥ ﺃﻭﻝ ﺳﺗﺎﺭ“ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺣﺗﻰ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ]ﺗﺯﺍﻣﻥ ﺛﺎﻧﻲ ﺳﺗﺎﺭ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻳﺢ ] [ ﻟﻙ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﺄﻱ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﻏﺎﻟﻕ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺅﺛﺭ ﺫﻟﻙ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﺧﺻﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻓﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻝء ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﺭﻏﺏ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻧﺢ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻭﻳﺔ ﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻳﺢ ﻟﻙ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻧﻁﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ”ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﻓﻼﺵ“ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ‪ ،Speedlite‬ﻻ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺿﺑﻁﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩﻩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﻭﺣﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻣﻌًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻭﻳﺔ ﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺧﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩﻩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﻭﺣﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻣﻌًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻭﻳﺔ ﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻔﻌﻳﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ‪) FEB‬ﺗﺩﺭﺝ ﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ( ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺛﻼﺙ ﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺇﺧﺭﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻕ ﻣﻊ ‪.FEB‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺇﺣﺻﺎء ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻭﺗﺭﺩﺩﻩ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺿﺑﻁ ]ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﻣﻳﺽ[ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫]‪.[MULTI‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ”ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺧﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ“ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻲ‬
‫)ﻓﻼﺵ ﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩ( ﺃﻭ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ‪.MR-14EX II‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ[ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺿﺑﻁ ﻭﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﻠﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ‪ Speedlite‬ﻭﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ﻟﻠﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺣﻭﻝ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪ ،Speedlite‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ‪) Speedlite‬ﻳُﺑﺎﻉ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻼً(‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﺋﺔ ‪ EX‬ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪،‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺃﻱ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺁﺧﺭ ﺑﺧﻼﻑ ]ﺕ‪ .‬ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ[‪) .‬ﻛﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ]ﺗﺯﺍﻣﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ[ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ‪ Speedlites‬ﻣﻌﻳﻧﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﺋﺔ ‪(.EX‬‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ﻟﻠﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ‪ ،Speedlite‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫‪) Speedlite‬ﻳُﺑﺎﻉ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻼً(‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ]ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪C.Fn‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﻓﻼﺵ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ[ )ﺿﻣﻥ ]ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ[ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪ ،([ 3‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ] [‬
‫ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪ .‬ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﻟﺿﺑﻁﻪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ]ﻭﺿﻊ ﻗﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [1:TTL‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﻗﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( ﻣﻥ‬
‫]ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ C.Fn‬ﻓﻼﺵ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ[ ﻹﻁﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﻛﺎﻣﻝ ﻁﺎﻗﺗﻪ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺗﻳﻥ ]ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ[ ﻭ]ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ C.Fn‬ﻓﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ[ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ]ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ[‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫)ﺿﻣﻥ ]ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ[ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪ ،([ 3‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ] [‬
‫ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪ .‬ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪/ Auto‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪C‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﻳﻛﺭﻭﻓﻭﻧﺎﺕ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۱٥۷‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺻِ ﻝ ﻣﻳﻛﺭﻭﻓﻭ ًﻧﺎ ﻣﺗﻭﻓﺭً ﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﻭﺍﻕ ﻣﺯﻭ ًﺩﺍ ﺑﻘﺎﺑﺱ ﺻﻐﻳﺭ )ﺑﻘﻁﺭ ‪ ۳٫٥‬ﻣﻡ( ﺑﻁﺭﻑ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺩﺧﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻳﻛﺭﻭﻓﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ )= ‪ .(۳‬ﻭﻋﻧﺩﺋﺫٍ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﻛﺭﻭﻓﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪ .‬ﺣﻳﺙ ﺇﻧﻪ ﻻ‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﻛﺭﻭﻓﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﻣﻳﻛﺭﻭﻓﻭﻥ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﻓﺗﺢ ﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺻِ ﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﻛﺭﻭﻓﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ[ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫● ﺗﻧﻁﺑﻕ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﻛﺭﻭﻓﻭﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﻔﻑ )= ‪.(٥۹‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﺿﺑﻭﻁﺎ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺩﺍﺋﻡ‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﻳﻛﺭﻭﻓﻭﻥ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ]ﻣﺭﺷﺢ ﻟﻠﻬﻭﺍء[ )= ‪(٥۹‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[‪.‬‬
‫˺‬
‫˻‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﺑﻳﺋﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻓﻳﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﺷﺭﺡ ﻟﻠﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﻓﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﺗﻧﺯﻳﻝ ﻣﻥ ﻣﻭﻗﻊ ‪ Canon‬ﻭﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﻭﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺩ ﺗﻧﺯﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ ﻣﻥ ﻣﻭﻗﻊ ‪ Canon‬ﻭﺗﺛﺑﻳﺗﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫● ‪EOS Utility‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﺍﺳﺗﻳﺭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻭﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫● ‪Digital Photo Professional‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﺍﺳﺗﻌﺭﺍﺽ ﺻﻭﺭ ‪ RAW‬ﻭﻣﻌﺎﻟﺟﺗﻬﺎ ﻭﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪C‬‬
‫● ‪Picture Style Editor‬‬
‫ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻭﺇﻧﺷﺎء ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻳﺔ ﻭﺣﻔﻅﻬﺎ‬‫● ‪Image Transfer Utility‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻣﺯﺍﻣﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ )= ‪ (۱۳۱‬ﻭﺍﺳﺗﻘﺑﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫● ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭﻫﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺟً ﺎ ﻳﺩﻋﻡ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻠﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ )ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺑﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺛﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﺛﺑﺕ ﻛﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻗﻳﺎﺳﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬
‫ﻣﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻋﺎﻡ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪Windows‬‬
‫‪Windows 8/8.1‬‬
‫‪Windows 7 SP1‬‬
‫ﻧﻅﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪/ Auto‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻣﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻣﺗﻁﻠﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﻭﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺍﻓﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻔﺻﻳﻝ‪،‬‬
‫ﺑﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺍﻟﺩﻋﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻧﻅﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﺩﻳﺛﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﻔﺿﻝ ﺑﺯﻳﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﻭﻗﻊ ‪ Canon‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﻣﻭﻗﻊ ‪ Canon‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ ﻟﻣﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﺃﺣﺩﺙ ﻣﺗﻁﻠﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻧﻅﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﺑﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﺻﺩﺍﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻅﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﻋﻭﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻧﺯﻳﻝ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ ﻣﻥ ﻣﻭﻗﻊ ‪.Canon‬‬
‫● ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻣﺗﺻﻝ ﺑﺎﻹﻧﺗﺭﻧﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺗﻘﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫”‪.“http://www.canon.com/icpd/‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺑﻠﺩﻙ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺗﻙ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻧﺯﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻣﺗﺻﻝ ﺑﺎﻹﻧﺗﺭﻧﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺗﻘﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫”‪.“http://www.canon.com/icpd/‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺑﻠﺩﻙ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺗﻙ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻧﺯﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ‬
‫‪Mac OS‬‬
‫‪Mac OS X 10.9‬‬
‫‪Mac OS X 10.8‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﻘﺭ ﻓﻭﻕ ]‪/Easy Installation‬ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺳﻬﻝ[‬
‫ﻭﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﻧﻘﺭ ﻓﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﻡ ﺗﻧﺯﻳﻠﻪ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻧﻘﺭ ﻓﻭﻕ ]‪Easy‬‬
‫‪/Installation‬ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺳﻬﻝ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻻﺳﺗﻛﻣﺎﻝ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﺩ ﻳﺳﺗﻐﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﺑﻧﺎ ًء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺩﺍء ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻭﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻧﺗﺭﻧﺕ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﻧﻘﺭ ﻓﻭﻕ ]‪/Finish‬ﺇﻧﻬﺎء[ ﺃﻭ ]‪/Restart‬ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ[‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱٥۸‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪/ Auto‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻛﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ )= ‪ (۲‬ﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺷﺧﺻﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳُﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ‪ Windows 7‬ﻭ‪ Mac OS X 10.8‬ﻫﻧﺎ ﺑﻬﺩﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺿﻳﺢ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺻِ ﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﻓﺗﺢ ﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء )‪ .(۱‬ﺃﺩﺧﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺱ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻓﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ )‪ (۲‬ﺑﻳﻧﻣﺎ‬
‫ﺗﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺱ ﺍﻟﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﻟﻠﻛﺑﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﺢ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺃﺩﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺱ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻝ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻧﻔﺫ ‪ USB‬ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻼﺕ ‪USB‬‬
‫ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪C‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۱٥۹‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺛﻡ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺓ ‪.EOS Utility‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[ ﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ‪ ،Windows‬ﺍﻧﻘﺭ ﻣﺭﺗﻳﻥ ﻓﻭﻕ ﺭﻣﺯ ‪EOS‬‬
‫‪ Utility‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺗﺏ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ‪ ،Mac OS‬ﺍﻧﻘﺭ ﻓﻭﻕ ﺭﻣﺯ ‪ EOS Utility‬ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺷﺭﻳﻁ ‪) Dock‬ﺍﻟﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺃﺳﻔﻝ ﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺗﺏ(‪.‬‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺑﺩﺃ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ‪EOS Utility‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻭﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﻳﺭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﻧﻘﺭ ﻓﻭﻕ ]‪/Download images to computer‬‬
‫ﺗﻧﺯﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻧﻘﺭ ﻓﻭﻕ ]‪Start‬‬
‫‪/automatic download‬ﺑﺩء ﺍﻟﺗﻧﺯﻳﻝ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﻣﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻭﺣﻔﻅﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻠﺩ ‪/Pictures‬ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺟﻠﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻠﺔ ﺗﺗﻡ‬
‫ﺗﺳﻣﻳﺗﻬﺎ ﺑﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﻌﺩﺋﺫٍ‪ ،‬ﻳﺑﺩﺃ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ‪Digital‬‬
‫‪ Photo Professional‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻭﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﻣﻳﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻛﺗﻣﺎﻝ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺗﺣﻣﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﺃﻏﻠﻕ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺓ ‪EOS‬‬
‫‪ ،Utility‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪ ON/OFF‬ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﻓﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻝ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﻣﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ‬
‫‪ ،Digital Photo Professional‬ﻭﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﻳﺭﺍﺩﻫﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺟً ﺎ ﻳﺩﻋﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ )ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺑﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺛﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﺛﺑﺕ ﻛﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻗﻳﺎﺳﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻋﺎﻡ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪/ Auto‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﻝ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪ ،‬ﻟﺫﻟﻙ ﻗﺩ‬
‫ﺗﻣﺭ ﻋﺩﺓ ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻕ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺭﻏﻡ ﻣﻥ ﺇﻣﻛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺑﺳﻬﻭﻟﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ‪ ،‬ﻏﻳﺭ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ ﻗﺩ ﺗﻣﺭ ﻋﺩﺓ ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻕ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﺩﺧﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬‫ ﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺭﺃﺳﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺃﻓﻘﻲ‪.‬‬‫ ﻗﺩ ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺣﻔﻅ ﺻﻭﺭ ‪) RAW‬ﺃﻭ ﺻﻭﺭ ‪ JPEG‬ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺻﻭﺭ ‪.(RAW‬‬‫ ﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻣﺳﺢ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻔﻭﻅﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪.‬‬‫ ﻗﺩ ﺗﺣﺩﺙ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻛﻼﺕ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ؛ ﺑﻧﺎ ًء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺻﺩﺍﺭ ﻧﻅﺎﻡ‬‫ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺣﺟﺎﻡ ﻣﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺑﺳﻬﻭﻟﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﻭﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺭ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﻁﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻭﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﻣﺭ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻷﻟﺑﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻁﺑﺎﻋﺗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺗﻭﻏﺭﺍﻓﻳﺔ ﺻﻐﻳﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺣﺟﻡ ﻁﺭﺍﺯ ‪ SELPHY CP‬ﻣﻥ ‪ Canon‬ﻫﻧﺎ‬
‫ﺑﻐﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺿﻳﺢ‪ .‬ﺗﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﻬﻠﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪C‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۱٦۰‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺑﺳﻬﻭﻟﺔ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﻳﺎﺭ ‪ُ ) PictBridge‬ﺗﺑﺎﻉ‬
‫ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻠﺔ( ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻛﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ )= ‪.(۲‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺻِ ﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﻓﺗﺢ ﻏﻁﺎء ﺃﻁﺭﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ‪ .‬ﺃﺩﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺱ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻓﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﻳﻧﻣﺎ ﺗﺣﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺱ ﺍﻟﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﻟﻠﻛﺑﻝ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺿﺢ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺻِ ﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺱ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﻟﻠﻛﺑﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫[ ﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪/ Auto‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫[‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ‬
‫ﻛﻼﻫﻣﺎ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻲ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻁﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ]‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫[‬
‫● ﺗﺑﺩﺃ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻵﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫● ﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪ ،‬ﻛﺭﺭ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺩءًﺍ ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ٥‬ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻬﺎء ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻬﺎء ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭﻗﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻓﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫ﻋﻳﻥ ﺣﻣﺭﺍء‪۱‬‬
‫ﺍﻟ ُﻧﺳﺦ‬
‫● ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ ‪ Canon‬ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﻳﺎﺭ ‪ُ ) PictBridge‬ﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻠﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ‬
‫”ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ“ )= ‪.(۱٥۰‬‬
‫‪۱٦۱‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ] [‬
‫ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ] [‪ ،‬ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‬
‫ﻟﻠﻌﻭﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪C‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﻣﻥ ‪ ۱‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٦‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﻬﻠﺔ“‬
‫)= ‪ (۱٦۰‬ﻟﻠﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ]‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻣﻁﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﻊ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪.‬‬
‫ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﻊ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﻊ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ٍ‬
‫–‬
‫ﻣﻁﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫–‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﻥ ﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻟﻠﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺛﻠﻰ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺭﺍء‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟ ُﻧﺳﺦ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻬﺫﻳﺏ‬
‫–‬
‫ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺗﻬﺎ )= ‪.(۱٦۲‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ‬
‫–‬
‫ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺧﻁﻳﻁ ﻭﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ )= ‪.(۱٦۲‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪/ Auto‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪C‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺧﻁﻳﻁ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻬﺫﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﻬﺫﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺑﺔ ﺑﺩﻻً ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﻬﺫﻳﺏ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻌﺭﺽ ﺣﻳﻧﺋ ٍﺫ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻬﺫﻳﺏ‪ ،‬ﻣﺷﻳﺭً ﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫● ﻟﺗﺣﺭﻳﻙ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ] [] []‬
‫● ﻟﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻬﺎء‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫[ ﺃﻭ‬
‫[]‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻬﺫﻳﺏ ﺣﺳﺑﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﺯﻡ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ]‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫[‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻁﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ]‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫[‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۷‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﻬﻠﺔ“ )= ‪ (۱٦۰‬ﻹﺟﺭﺍء‬
‫ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﺩ ﻻ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻬﺫﻳﺏ ﻣﻣﻛ ًﻧﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻷﺣﺟﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻐﻳﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻊ ﺑﻌﺽ ﻧﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺗﺧﻁﻳ ًﻁﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ]‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻋﺩﺩ ﻭﺃﻛﺛﺭ[‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪ .‬ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺗﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪۱٦۲‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۱‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ“‬
‫)= ‪ (۱٦۱‬ﻟﻠﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۱‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ“‬
‫)= ‪ (۱٦۱‬ﻟﻠﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﻬﺫﻳﺏ[‬
‫ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫[ ﺃﻭ ]‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻁﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪/ Auto‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺧﻁﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺣﺎﻁ ﺑﺣﺩﻭﺩ‬
‫ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﺣﺩﻭﺩ‬
‫ﻋﺩﺩ ﻭﺃﻛﺛﺭ‬
‫ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺣﺟﻡ ﺛﺎﺑﺕ‬
‫ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻣﻁﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﺧﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﺣﺩﻭﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺣﺎﻓﺔ ﻷﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺗﻬﺎ ﻟﻛﻝ ﻭﺭﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻷﻏﺭﺍﺽ ﺗﻌﺭﻳﻔﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻘﻁ ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺑﻛﺳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ‪ L‬ﻭﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ‪.3:2‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺑﻳﻥ ‪ ۱۳۰ x ۹۰‬ﻣﻡ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺭﻳﺩﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﻁﺑﻭﻋﺎﺕ ﻋﺭﻳﺿﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﻳﺔ[‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻁﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺟﺎﻧﺏ ﺍﻟﻁﻭﻳﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﺟﺎﻧﺏ ﺍﻟﻘﺻﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ] [‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ] [‪ ،‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﻭﻝ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ،۲‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺗﻬﺫﻳﺏ[‪.‬‬
‫[]‬
‫[ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۲‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺗﻬﺫﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ“‬
‫)= ‪ (۱٦۲‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻁﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ] [‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ] [‪ ،‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﻟﻠﺭﺟﻭﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﻣﻥ ‪ ۱‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٤‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺧﻁﻳﻁ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ“ )= ‪ ،(۱٦۲‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﻭﻳﺔ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﻣﻥ ‪ ۱‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٦‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﻬﻠﺔ“‬
‫)= ‪ (۱٦۰‬ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻓﻳﻠﻡ‪ .‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۱٦۳‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪C‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻁﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻣﻔﺭﺩ‬
‫ﻣﺗﺳﻠﺳﻝ‬
‫ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻬﺩ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﻲ ﻛﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺳﻠﺳﻠﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩ‪ ،‬ﻓﺗﺭﺓ ﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ ﻣﻘﺳﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺭﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ‬
‫ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻠﺩ‪ ،‬ﻭﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻘﺿﻲ ﻟﻺﻁﺎﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ‬
‫]ﺍﻟﺗﻌﻠﻳﻕ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ[‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫[ ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫● ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺟﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻛﻝ ﻣﻥ ]ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﻳﺔ[ ﻭ]ﻣﺗﺳﻠﺳﻝ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻁﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ ‪ Canon‬ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ‬
‫‪ PictBridge‬ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﺍﺯ ‪ CP720/CP730‬ﺃﻭ ُ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻁﺭﺯ ﺍﻷﻗﺩﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪C‬‬
‫ﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺎﺕ )= ‪ (۱٦٦‬ﻭﺗﺭﺗﻳﺑﺎﺕ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﺗﻁﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺻﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ۹۹۸‬ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻭﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺛﻝ ﻋﺩﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﺳﺦ‪ ،‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪ .‬ﺗﺗﻭﺍﻓﻕ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺈﻋﺩﺍﺩﻫﺎ ﺑﻬﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻳﺭ ‪DPOF‬‬
‫)‪.(Digital Print Order Format‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺿﻣﻳﻥ ﺻﻭﺭ ‪ RAW‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۱٦٤‬‬
‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬
‫‪DPOF‬‬
‫ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ‪.‬‬
‫–‬
‫ﻣﺳﺢ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫–‬
‫● ﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ DPOF‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﺗﻁﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ] [ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻟﺗﻧﺑﻳﻬﻙ ﺑﺄﻥ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻟﺩﻳﻬﺎ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺗﻣﺕ ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺗﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ‬
‫ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﺳﺑﺏ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ]ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ[ ﻓﻲ ﻗﻳﺎﻡ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﺑﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻣﺭﺗﻳﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻭﺍء ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺃﻭ ﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪ ،‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪ .‬ﺗﻧﻁﺑﻕ ﻫﺫﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪2‬‬
‫ﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ )‪(DPOF‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪/ Auto‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫[‬
‫ﻗﻳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﻓﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫ﻛﻼﻫﻣﺎ‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﻟﻛﻝ ﻭﺭﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﻋﺩﺓ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﻧﺳﺦ ﺻﻐﻳﺭﺓ ﻟﻛﻝ ﻭﺭﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻧﺳﻳﻘﻳﻥ ”ﻗﻳﺎﺳﻲ“ ﻭ”ﻓﻬﺭﺱ“‪.‬‬
‫ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫–‬
‫[ ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ[‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ] [‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ[‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺑﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ )= ‪.(۳۲‬‬
‫● ﺳﻳﻣﻧﻌﻙ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻓﻬﺭﺱ[ ﻣﻥ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ[ ﻟﻛﻝ ﻣﻥ ]ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ[ ﻭ]ﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ[ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﺫﺍﺗﻪ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ ﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺽ ﻁﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ ‪ Canon‬ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﻳﺎﺭ‬
‫‪ُ ) PictBridge‬ﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻠﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫● ﺗﺗﻡ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺑﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ ﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻕ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻓﻲ ]ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ[ ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ‬
‫]‪ (۱۸ =) [ 2‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ )= ‪.(۳۲‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﻣﺩﻯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺭﺩﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪/ Auto‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪C‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺩ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪2‬‬
‫[ ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ[‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ] [‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺣﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺩ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ‬
‫] [ )= ‪.(۳۲‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۱‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺭﺩﻳﺔ“‬
‫)= ‪ ،(۱٦٥‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﻯ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺗﻳﻥ ‪ ۲‬ﻭ‪ ۳‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻣﺩﻯ“ )= ‪(۱۰۳‬‬
‫ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ]‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[‬
‫● ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻣﻳﻳﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺭﻣﺯ ] [‪ .‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ] [‬
‫ﺑﻌﺩﺋﺫٍ‪.‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫[]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﺗﺭﺗﻳﺏ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ]‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻵﻥ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟ ُﻧﺳﺦ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۱‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺭﺩﻳﺔ“‬
‫)= ‪ ،(۱٦٥‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ]‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫[‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ﻋﺩﺩ ُﻧﺳﺦ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ] [‬
‫ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻋﺩﺩ ُﻧﺳﺦ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ )ﻣﺎ ﻳﺻﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ۹۹‬ﻧﺳﺧﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫● ﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻭﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻋﺩﺩ ُﻧﺳﺦ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﻛﺭّ ﺭ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺗﻳﻥ ‪ ۲‬ﻭ‪.۳‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻋﺩﺩ ُﻧﺳﺦ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑ ُﻧﺳﺦ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻓﻘﻁ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺗﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪.۲‬‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻬﺎء‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱٦٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫[ ﻟﻠﻌﻭﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﻣﺳﺢ ﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﻥ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻭﺓ ‪ ۱‬ﻓﻲ ”ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺭﺩﻳﺔ“‬
‫)= ‪ ،(۱٦٥‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﻛﻝ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ]‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫[‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻟﺑﻭﻡ ﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪/ Auto‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻓﺭﺩﻱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺃﻟﺑﻭﻡ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﻛﻳﻔﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ[ ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪2‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۱٦٦‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ]‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ]‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪C‬‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﺍﻹﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ“‬
‫)= ‪ ،(۱٦٦‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺃﻟﺑﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺻﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ۹۹۸‬ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺳﺗﻳﺭﺍﺩﻫﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻣﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪ ،‬ﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺧﺯﻳﻧﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺟﻠﺩ ﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻣﻼﺋﻣًﺎ ﻋﻧﺩ‬
‫ﺷﺭﺍء ﺃﻟﺑﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﺑﻭﻋﺔ ﻋﺑﺭ ﺍﻹﻧﺗﺭﻧﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺃﻟﺑﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻙ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫[‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻟﺑﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪ .‬ﻟﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ] [ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺫﻟﻙ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ] [ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻟﺗﻧﺑﻳﻬﻙ ﺑﺄﻥ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻟﺩﻳﻬﺎ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺗﻣﺕ ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺗﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ‬
‫ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫[‬
‫● ﻛﺭّ ﺭ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺻﻭﺭ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻻﻧﺗﻬﺎء‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻟﻠﻌﻭﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻟﺑﻭﻡ ﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﺍﻹﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ“‬
‫)= ‪ ،(۱٦٦‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ]‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫[‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪/ Auto‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪C‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۱٦۷‬‬
‫ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻟﺑﻭﻡ ﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﺍﻹﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻓﻲ ”ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ“‬
‫)= ‪ ،(۱٦٦‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ]ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﻛﻝ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﺍﺕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ]‬
‫ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]ﻣﻭﺍﻓﻕ[‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫[‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪/ Auto‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﻔﻳﺩﺓ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﻛﺷﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﻁﺎء ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻧﺕ ﺗﻌﺗﻘﺩ ﺑﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻣﺷﻛﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻡ ﺃﻭﻻً ﺑﻔﺣﺹ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﺗﺅ ﱢﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺣﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻛﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺗﺻﻝ ﺑﺄﺣﺩ ﻣﻛﺎﺗﺏ ‪ Canon‬ﻟﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﺩﻋﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻼء‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﻋﺩﻡ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺃﻱ ﺷﻲء ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ‪.ON/OFF‬‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺷﺣﻭﻧﺔ )= ‪.(۱٦‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻭﺟﻳﻬﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺻﺣﻳﺢ )= ‪.(۱۷‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﻏﻁﺎء ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ )= ‪.(۱۷‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻧﻬﺎﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻓﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺳﺧﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﻔﺽ ﺃﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﺟﺭﺏ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﻧﻬﺎﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻓﻳﺔ ﺑﻘﻁﻌﺔ ﻗﻁﻥ‬
‫ﻭﺃﻋﺩ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﺩﺓ ﻣﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻧﻔﺩ ﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪C‬‬
‫● ﻳﻧﺧﻔﺽ ﺃﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺧﻔﺿﺔ‪ .‬ﺟﺭﺏ ﺗﺩﻓﺋﺔ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻗﻠﻳﻼً ﺑﻭﺿﻌﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻳﺑﻙ ﻣﺛﻼً‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﻋﺩﻡ ﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﻧﻬﺎﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻓﻳﺔ ﻷﻳﺔ ﺃﺟﺳﺎﻡ ﻣﻌﺩﻧﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻧﻬﺎﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻓﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺳﺧﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﻔﺽ ﺃﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﺟﺭﺏ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﻧﻬﺎﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻓﻳﺔ ﺑﻘﻁﻌﺔ ﻗﻁﻥ‬
‫ﻭﺃﻋﺩ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﺩﺓ ﻣﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﺗﺳﺎﻋﺩ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻹﺟﺭﺍءﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻛﻠﺔ ﻭﺍﺳﺗﻣﺭ ﻧﻔﺎﺩ ﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ‪ ،‬ﻓﻬﺫﺍ ﻳﻌﻧﻲ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻬﺎ ﻭﺻﻠﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﻋﻣﺭﻫﺎ‪ .‬ﺍﺷﺗﺭ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺟﺩﻳﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻧﺗﻔﺧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫● ﺍﻧﺗﻔﺎﺥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻫﻭ ﺃﻣﺭ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ ﻭﻻ ﻳﻣﺛﻝ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﺧﺎﻭﻑ ﺗﺗﻌﻠﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﺳﻼﻣﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺩﻯ ﺍﻧﺗﻔﺎﺥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺩﻡ‬
‫ﻣﻧﺎﺳﺑﺔ ﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺗﺻﻝ ﺑﺄﺣﺩ ﻣﻛﺎﺗﺏ ‪ Canon‬ﻟﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﺩﻋﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻼء‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺳﻣﺎﻉ ﺻﻭﺕ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻋﺩﺳﺔ ‪.EF-M‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۱٦۸‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺑﺳﻳﻁﺎ ﻭﺗﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﻟﻠﺣﻳﻠﻭﻟﺔ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺩﺧﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﻭء ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﺗﺻﺩﺭ ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺻﻭ ًﺗﺎ‬
‫ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻛﻭﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﻣﺷﻭﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺳﻠﻳﻡ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ ﻟﻠﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ‪ .‬ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﺿﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ )= ‪ ،(۹۳‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ )= ‪.(۲۸‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﻌﺗﺎﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺧﻔﺿﺔ )= ‪.(۳۰‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪/ Auto‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﻌﺗﺎﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪C‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫● ﻻﺣﻅ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻣﺷﺎﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ﻭﻟﻛﻥ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪ -‬ﻗﺩ ﺗﻭﻣﺽ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﻗﺩ ﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﺃﻓﻘﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻠﻭﺭﻳﺳﻧﺕ ﺃﻭ ‪.LED‬‬
‫ﻳﻭﻣﺽ ] [ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ‪ ،‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ )= ‪.(۳۸‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ]‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻣﺛﺑﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ )= ‪.(۷۸‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻭﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ ] [ )= ‪.(۷٥‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪.(٦۲ =) ISO‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺗﺧﺫ ﺗﺩﺍﺑﻳﺭ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻟﻠﻣﺣﺎﻓﻅﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺛﺑﺎﺗﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻙ‪،‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻧﺑﻐﻲ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﺛﺑﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﺛﺑﺗﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﺷﻲء ﺁﺧﺭ‪ ،‬ﻟﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫)= ‪.(۷۸‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪.‬‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫[ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ )= ‪.(۳۸‬‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ ﻟﻠﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻳﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ )= ‪.(۲۸‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺭﻛﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻻﻗﺗﺭﺍﺏ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺃﺩﻧﻰ ﻣﺳﺎﻓﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ‪ .‬ﺍﻓﺣﺹ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﻟﻣﻌﺭﻓﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﻟﻣﺳﺎﻓﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻗﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﻟﻣﺳﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ]‬
‫[ )ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ( ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ]ﺍﻧﻁﻼﻕ ﺷﻌﺎﻉ)‪ (LED‬ﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩﺓ ‪ [AF‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪:0‬ﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ[ )= ‪.(۸۸‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺄﻛﻳﺩ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺿﺭﻭﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺛﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ”ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻳﺩﻭﻱ“‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﺭّ ﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻗﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺃﻭ ‪.(۷۱ = ،۷۰ =) AF‬‬
‫● ﻗﺩ ﻳﺣﺩﺙ ﺗﺷﻭﻳﺵ ﻏﺎﻟﺑًﺎ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻣﺱ ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﻧﺎ ًء ﻋﻠﻰ ﻅﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ .‬ﺣﺎﻓﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺛﺑﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ‪ AF‬ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭﻻ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺇﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪ AF‬ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﺿﺭ ﻭﺿﺑﻁ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺻﺣﻳﺢ‪ ،‬ﺟﺭّ ﺏ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﺑﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺑﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺃﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﻋﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺎﻳﻥ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﺩﻻً ﻣﻥ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﺟﺭّ ﺏ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺟﺯﺋﻳًﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﺗﻛﺭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺑﺩﻭ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﺩﺍﻛﻧﺔ ﺟ ًﺩﺍ‪.‬‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻭﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ ] [ )= ‪.(۷٥‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ )= ‪.(٦۱‬‬
‫ﺃﺻﻠﺣﻪ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣُﺣﺳﻥ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )= ‪.(٦٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻗﻔﻝ ‪ AE‬ﺃﻭ ﻗﻳﺎﺱ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ )= ‪.(٦۲ = ،٦۱‬‬
‫ﺗﺑﺩﻭ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺳﺎﻁﻌﺔ ﺟ ًﺩﺍ‪ ،‬ﺑﻳﻧﻣﺎ ﺗﺑﺩﻭ ﺍﻷﺟﺯﺍء ﺍﻟﺳﺎﻁﻌﺔ ﺑﺎﻫﺗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺧﻔﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻭﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ ] [ )= ‪.(۳٦‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ )= ‪.(٦۱‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻗﻔﻝ ‪ AE‬ﺃﻭ ﻗﻳﺎﺱ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ )= ‪.(٦۲ = ،٦۱‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﻔﺽ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻬﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺑﺩﻭ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺩﺍﻛﻧﺔ ﺟ ًﺩﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺭﻏﻡ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻧﻁﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )= ‪.(۳۸‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )= ‪.(۱۹٦‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺧﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )= ‪.(۸٥ = ،۷٦‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪.(٦۲ =) ISO‬‬
‫ﺗﺑﺩﻭ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺳﺎﻁﻌﺔ ﺟ ًﺩﺍ‪ ،‬ﺑﻳﻧﻣﺎ ﺗﺑﺩﻭ ﺍﻷﺟﺯﺍء ﺍﻟﺳﺎﻁﻌﺔ ﺑﺎﻫﺗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )= ‪.(۱۹٦‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺧﻔﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻭﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ ] [ )= ‪.(۳٦‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺧﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )= ‪.(۸٥ = ،۷٦‬‬
‫ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺑﻳﺿﺎء ﻓﻲ ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﺣﺩﺙ ﻫﺫﺍ ﻧﺗﻳﺟﺔ ﻻﻧﻌﻛﺎﺱ ﺿﻭء ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺟﺯﺋﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻣﻭﻟﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﺍء‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺑﺩﻭ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﻣﺣﺑﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺧﻔﺽ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪.(٦۲ =) ISO‬‬
‫● ﻗﺩ ﺗﺅﺩﻱ ﺳﺭﻋﺎﺕ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺣﺑﺏ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ )= ‪.(٥۱‬‬
‫‪۱٦۹‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪/ Auto‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﻳﻭﺟﺩ ﺗﺷﻭﺵ ﺧﻁﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻣﻭﺝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫● ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻬﺩﻑ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﻳﻅﻬﺭ ﺗﺷﻭﺵ ﺧﻁﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻣﻭﺝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺣﺩﺙ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ ﺃﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺧﻁﻭﻁ ﺃﻓﻘﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺭﺑﻌﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻙ‪.‬‬‫ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻣﺻﺎﺩﺭ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺷﺩﻳﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻣﺛﻝ ﺿﻭء ﺍﻟﺷﻣﺱ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺭﺏ ﻣﻧﻬﺎ‪.‬‬‫ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻻﺕ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺧﻔﺽ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻭﺵ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﻭﺝ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﺍﻹﺟﺭﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺎﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‪.‬‬‫ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺔ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻻ ﺗﺻﻝ ﻣﺻﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺷﺩﻳﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬‫ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻻ ﺗﺻﻝ ﻣﺻﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺷﺩﻳﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪.‬‬‫● ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻣﺎﻟﺗﻬﺎ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻋﺩﺳﺔ ‪ ،TS-E‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻅﻬﻭﺭ ﺗﺷﻭﺵ ﺧﻁﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻣﻭﺝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺗﻘﻁﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺗﺄﺛﺭ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺭﺍء‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻘﺿﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺽ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺻﺣﻳﺢ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﻣﺕ ﻣﻘﺎﻁﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻟﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺗﺩﻋﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻻﺣﻅ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻘﺿﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺽ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺻﺣﻳﺢ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﻁﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻳﻁﺎﺑﻕ ﻣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﻘﻳﻘﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺗﺣﺫﻳﺭ ”ﺍﻣﺗﻼء ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺅﻗﺕ“ )= ‪ (۱۷٤‬ﻭﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻳﻣﺗﻠﺊ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺅﻗﺕ ﻟﻠﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺳﺑﺏ ﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﺭّ ﺏ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺍﻹﺟﺭﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻹﺟﺭﺍء ﻣﺳﺢ ﻣﻧﺧﻔﺽ ﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ )= ‪.(۱۳۸‬‬‫=‬
‫ ﻗﻡ ﺑﺧﻔﺽ ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ) ‪.(٤٥‬‬‫‪ -‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺗﺩﻋﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫● ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ]ﺧﻔﺽ ﻋﻳﻥ ﺣﻣﺭﺍء[ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ[ )= ‪ .(٤۷‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ ﺧﻔﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺭﺍء )= ‪ (۳‬ﻓﻲ ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺣﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻓﺿﻝ ﺍﻟﻧﺗﺎﺋﺞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺟﻌﻝ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺗﻧﻅﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ ﺧﻔﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺭﺍء‪ .‬ﻭﺟﺭﺏ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺃﻗﺭﺏ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺭﺍء )= ‪.(۱۱۲‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪C‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﻐﺭﺍﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻭﻗ ًﺗﺎ ﻁﻭﻳﻼً‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ ﺑﻁﻲء‪.‬‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﺑﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺑﺩﻭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺧﻼﻟﻬﺎ ﻣﺗﻭﻗﻔﺔ ﻟﻠﺣﻅﺎﺕ ﺑﺳﺑﺏ ﺗﻐﻳﺭ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﻭﻉ‬
‫ﺑﺷﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫● ﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ‪ ۱۰۰۰‬ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻟﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ‪ .‬ﺍﺭﻓﻊ ﺇﺻﺑﻌﻙ‬
‫ﻋﻥ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﻣﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺳﺗﺄﻧﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻳﻊ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺗﻭﻓﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫● ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻹﺟﺭﺍء ﻣﺳﺢ ﻣﻧﺧﻔﺽ ﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ )= ‪.(۱۳۸‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫ﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ ﻓﺟﺄﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺗﺧﺗﻠﻑ ﻋﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﺑﺎﺧﺗﻼﻑ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ .‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ”ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻝ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ“‬
‫ﻭ”ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻳﻌﺔ“ ﻭ”ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ“ ﻭ”ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ‪ “C.Fn‬ﻭ”ﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺳﺭﻳﻊ ﺑـ ‪ “INFO.‬ﻭ”ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ“ )= ‪.(۱۸۷ = – ۱۷۷‬‬
‫ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ‪ AF‬ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻣﺱ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻣﺱ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻣﻝ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ‪ AF‬ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻣﺱ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻣﺱ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻟﻣﺱ ﺣﻭﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺃﻗﺭﺏ ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﻭﺳﻁ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺑﺩﻭ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﻣﺷﻭﻫﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﺩ ﺗﺑﺩﻭ ﺍﻷﻫﺩﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻣﺭ ﺃﻣﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﻣﺷﻭﻫﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻳﺱ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺧﻠﻼً ﻭﻅﻳﻔﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺑﺩﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﻣﺗﻭﻗ ًﻔﺎ ﻟﻠﺣﻅﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺳﻣﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻫﻳﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻠﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺧﻁﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺈﺟﺭﺍء ﻣﺳﺢ ﻣﻧﺧﻔﺽ ﻟﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ )= ‪.(۱۳۸‬‬
‫● ﻗﺩ ﺗﺣﺩﺙ ﻣﻘﺎﻁﻌﺎﺕ ﻗﺻﻳﺭﺓ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﻧﺳﺧﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺗﺳﻡ ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺎﺕ ﻗﺭﺍءﺓ‬
‫ﻣﻧﺧﻔﺿﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﺗﺳﻘﻁ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺧﻁﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺃﺩﺍء ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‬
‫ﻏﻳﺭ ﻛﺎﻑٍ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ )= ‪ (۹۳‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺻﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ ﺿﻌﻳ ًﻔﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺃﻱ ﺻﻭﺕ ﻟﻸﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱۷۰‬‬
‫[ )= ‪ (٥٥‬ﻧﻅﺭً ﺍ ﻟﻌﺩﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪/ Auto‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪C‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‪/‬ﻭﺟﻬﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۱۷۱‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫● ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ .‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻭﺃﻋﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺎﻭﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺑﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‪ .‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺭﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﺃﻋﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺎﻭﻟﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﺎﻟﻣﺛﻝ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻓﻲ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺷﺣﺔ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ‪ .‬ﺃﻟﻎ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺷﺣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﻓﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻝ‪.‬‬
‫●‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫●‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﻣﺣﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻋﺑﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻝ‪ ،‬ﺟﺭﺏ ﺧﻔﺽ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﻝ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻟﻠﺩﺧﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬‫[ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [ ﻭ] [ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺱ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ]‪ ،[B‬ﺛﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪.‬‬
‫‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ‪ ۲۰‬ﻋﻧﺻﺭً ﺍ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺇﺟﻣﺎﻟﻲ ﻣﻥ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ .‬ﺍﻣﺳﺢ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﻏﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺿﺭﻭﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﻭﻻً‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺃﺿﻑ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺟﺩﻳﺩﺓ )= ‪.(۱۳٥‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻫﺎﺗ ًﻔﺎ ﺫﻛ ًّﻳﺎ ﻟﻠﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ )= ‪.(۱۲۲‬‬
‫ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻫﺎﺗﻑ ﺫﻛﻲ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺃﻭﻻً ﺑﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻙ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ )= ‪.(۱۱٦‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺭﺏ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﺻﺎﺩﺭ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺗﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﻣﻊ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪ ،Wi-Fi‬ﻣﺛﻝ ﺃﻓﺭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﻛﺭﻭﻭﻳﻑ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺟﻬﺯﺓ‬
‫‪ Bluetooth‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺃﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﺑﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﻣﻭﺟﻲ ‪ ۲٫٤‬ﺟﻳﺟﺎ ﻫﺭﺗﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻵﺧﺭ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ )ﻣﺛﻝ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ(‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﻋﺩﻡ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺃﺟﺳﺎﻡ ﺑﻳﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯﻳﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻗﻧﺎﺓ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻧﺎﺓ ﻣﺩﻋﻭﻣﺔ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ )= ‪ .(۱۹٤‬ﻻﺣﻅ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﻧﺻﺢ ﺑﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻗﻧﺎﺓ‬
‫ﻣﺩﻋﻭﻣﺔ ﻳﺩﻭﻳًﺎ ﺑﺩﻻً ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻧﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ ﻛﺎﻓﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻬﺩﻑ‪ .‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻬﺩﻑ‪ ،‬ﻭﺃﻋﺩ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻡ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻟﺳﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺗﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻬﺩﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻝ‪ .‬ﺣﺭّ ﻙ ﻟﺳﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺗﺎﺑﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﺗﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﻳﺭﺍﺩ ﺻﻭﺭ ‪ RAW‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺭﺿﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ‪ RAW‬ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻑ ﺍﻟﺫﻛﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻧﻪ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﻳﺭﺍﺩﻫﺎ ﻛﻣﻠﻑ ‪ .JPEG‬ﺃﺭﺳﻝ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ‪ RAW‬ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﻣﺯﺍﻣﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ CANON iMAGE GATEWAY‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻧﻘﻝ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺳﻣﻳﺔ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻠﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺯﻧﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺳﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻳﻪ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﻣﺯﺍﻣﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻋﺑﺭ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ )= ‪ .(۱۳۱‬ﻗﺑﻝ ﻧﻘﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺳﻣﻳﺔ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻠﺩﺍﺕ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺯﻧﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ CANON iMAGE GATEWAY‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻳﺏ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻟﻺﺭﺳﺎﻝ‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺩﻗﺔ ﺃﻛﺑﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺣﺟﻣﻬﺎ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺳﺗﻐﺭﻕ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻭﻗ ًﺗﺎ ﻁﻭﻳﻼً‪/‬ﺗﺗﻡ ﻣﻘﺎﻁﻌﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻲ‪.‬‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﻗﺩ ﻳﺳﺗﻐﺭﻕ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻋﺩﺓ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻭﻗ ًﺗﺎ ﻁﻭﻳﻼً‪ .‬ﺟﺭﺏ ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ]‬
‫)= ‪.(۱۳۱‬‬
‫ﻗﺩ ﻳﺳﺗﻐﺭﻕ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻭﻗ ًﺗﺎ ﻁﻭﻳﻼً‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺭﺏ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﺻﺎﺩﺭ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺗﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﻣﻊ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪ ،Wi-Fi‬ﻣﺛﻝ ﺃﻓﺭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﻛﺭﻭﻭﻳﻑ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺟﻬﺯﺓ‬
‫‪ Bluetooth‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺃﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﺑﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﻣﻭﺟﻲ ‪ ۲٫٤‬ﺟﻳﺟﺎ ﻫﺭﺗﺯ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻅ ﺃﻥ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻗﺩ ﻳﺳﺗﻐﺭﻕ ﻭﻗ ًﺗﺎ‬
‫ﻁﻭﻳﻼً ﺣﺗﻰ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻋﺭﺽ ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻵﺧﺭ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ )ﻣﺛﻝ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ(‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﻋﺩﻡ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺃﺟﺳﺎﻡ ﺑﻳﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯﻳﻥ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﺃﻭ ]‬
‫[ ﻟﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺃﺭﻏﺏ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺳﺢ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺧﻠﺹ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﻁﺎﺋﻬﺎ ﻟﺷﺧﺹ ﺁﺧﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪.(۱۳٦ =) Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺭﺳﺎﺋﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺧﻁﺄ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺳﺗﺟﺏ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻭﺟﺩ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪/ Auto‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫● ﻗﺩ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﺭﻛﺑﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻭﺟﻳﻬﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﺣﻳﺢ‪ .‬ﺃﻋﺩ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻭﺟﻳﻬﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺟﺎﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﺣﻳﺢ )= ‪.(۱۷‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻣﻘﻔﻠﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫● ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻟﺳﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺗﺎﺑﺔ ﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻝ‪ .‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﻟﺳﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺗﺎﺑﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻝ )= ‪.(۱۷‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ!‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪C‬‬
‫● ﺗﻣﺕ ﻣﺣﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻭﺟﻳﻬﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺻﺣﻳﺢ )= ‪.(۱۷‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺧﻁﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ )= ‪(۱۳۸‬‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫● ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﺄ ﺫﺍﺗﻬﺎ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻣﺩﻋﻭﻣﺔ )= ‪ (۲‬ﻭﺑﻌﺩ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺑﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺻﺣﻳﺢ‬
‫)= ‪ ،(۱۷‬ﻓﺎﺗﺻﻝ ﺑﺄﺣﺩ ﻣﻛﺎﺗﺏ ‪ Canon‬ﻟﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﺩﻋﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻼء‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻭﺟﺩ ﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫● ﻻ ﺗﻭﺟﺩ ﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﻳﺔ ﺧﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ )= ‪ (٦۰ = ،٤۸ = ،۳٥‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫)= ‪ .(۱۰۹‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﻣﺳﺢ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺿﺭﻭﺭﻳﺔ )= ‪ (۱۰٥‬ﺃﻭ ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﺧﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﻳﺔ‬
‫)= ‪.(۱۷‬‬
‫ﺗﻡ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ‪ AF‬ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻣﺱ‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﻟـ ‪ AF‬ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻣﺱ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻵﻥ )= ‪.(۷۱‬‬
‫ﺍﺷﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ )= ‪(۱٦‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻭﺟﺩ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﺗﺣﺗﻭﻱ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺻﻭﺭ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻋﺭﺿﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺣﻣﻲ! )= ‪(۱۰۲‬‬
‫ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﻌﺭﻭﻓﺔ‪ JPEG/‬ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻕ‪/‬ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﺟ ًﺩﺍ‪/.‬ﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﻋﺭﺽ ‪/MOV‬ﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﻋﺭﺽ ‪MP4‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﻋﻭﻣﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭﻫﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺳﻣﻳﺗﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱۷۲‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ!‪/‬ﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ‪/‬ﻻﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪/‬ﻻﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ‪/‬ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﺩ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻣﺕ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺳﻣﻳﺗﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪ .‬ﻭﻻﺣﻅ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﺑﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻧﺟﻣﺔ )*( ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﻟﻸﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ )= ‪ ،*(۱۰۰‬ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ )= ‪ /*(۱۰۷‬ﺗﺻﻧﻳﻑ )= ‪ ،(۱۰۸‬ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ )= ‪ ،*(۱۰۹‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ )= ‪،*(۱٦٤‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺃﻟﺑﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ )= ‪*(۱٦٦‬‬
‫ﻣﺩﻯ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺻﺎﻟﺢ‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﻟﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ )= ‪ ،(۱٦٥ = ،۱۰٦ = ،۱۰۳‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﻣﺣﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺃﻭﻟﻳﺔ ﺗﻠﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺧﻳﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﻛﺱ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺩ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺯﺍﺋﺩ‬
‫● ﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﻣﻥ ‪ ۹۹۸‬ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ )= ‪ (۱٦٤‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺃﻟﺑﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ )= ‪ .(۱٦٦‬ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ‪ ۹۹۸‬ﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﻝ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﺣﻔﻅ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ )= ‪ (۱٦٤‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺃﻟﺑﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ )= ‪ (۱٦٦‬ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺻﺣﻳﺢ‪ .‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﻋﺩﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ ﻭﺃﻋﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺎﻭﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﻘﺩ ﺣﺎﻭﻟﺕ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﻣﻥ ‪ ٥۰۰‬ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ )= ‪ (۱۰۲‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﺳﺢ )= ‪ (۱۰٥‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﺻﻧﻳﻑ )= ‪ (۱۰۸‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ )= ‪ (۱٦٤‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺃﻟﺑﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ )= ‪.(۱٦٦‬‬
‫ﺧﻁﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﻣﻳﺔ!‬
‫● ﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﺇﻧﺷﺎء ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻠﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﻷﻧﻪ ﻗﺩ ﺗﻡ ﺑﻠﻭﻍ ﺃﻛﺑﺭ ﻋﺩﺩ ﻣﺩﻋﻭﻡ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻠﺩﺍﺕ )‪ (999‬ﻟﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﺩ ﺗﻡ ﺑﻠﻭﻍ ﺃﻛﺑﺭ ﻋﺩﺩ ﻣﺩﻋﻭﻡ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ )‪ (9999‬ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻠﺩﺍﺕ‪ .‬ﻗﻡ‬
‫ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ )= ‪ (۱۳۸‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻧﺗﻘﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ )= ‪ ،(۳۲‬ﻭﺣﺩﺩ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪ ،[ 1‬ﺛﻡ ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ]ﺗﺭﻗﻳﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ[ )= ‪.(۱۳۷‬‬
‫ﺧﻁﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‬
‫● ﻋﻁﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪ .‬ﱢ‬
‫ﻧﻅﻑ ﺃﻁﺭﺍﻑ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻭﺭﻛﺑﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺳﻠﻳﻡ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﺩ ﻳﺷﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻛﺭﺭ ﻟﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﺄ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺻﻝ ﺑﺄﺣﺩ ﻣﻛﺎﺗﺏ ‪Canon‬‬
‫ﻟﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﺩﻋﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻼء‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺙ ﺧﻁﺄ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ )ﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﺄ(‬
‫● ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﺄ ﻫﺫﻩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺭ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺇﺣﺩﻯ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺣﻔﻭﻅﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻟﻠﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻗﺩ ﻳﺷﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻛﺭﺭ ﻟﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﺄ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺩﻭﻳﻥ ﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﺄ )‪(Exx‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﺗﺻﻝ ﺑﺄﺣﺩ ﻣﻛﺎﺗﺏ ‪ Canon‬ﻟﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﺩﻋﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻼء‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﻁﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ‬
‫● ﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ )= ‪ (۱٦۰‬ﻟﻠﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ ﺑﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻠﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪ ،‬ﺣﺗﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﺗﺻﻠﺔ ﺑﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺧﻁﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫● ﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﻭﺭﻕ )= ‪ .(۱٦۲‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﺄ ﻫﺫﻩ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺻﺣﻳﺣً ﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﺄﻋﺩ‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺃﻛﻣﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﺭ ًﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻣﺗﺻﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﺣﺑﺭ ﻣﻣﺗﻠﺋﺔ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫● ﺍﺗﺻﻝ ﺑﺄﺣﺩ ﻣﻛﺎﺗﺏ ‪ Canon‬ﻟﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﺩﻋﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻼء ﻟﻁﻠﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻝ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻣﺗﺻﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﺣﺑﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪/ Auto‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺧﻁﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫● ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ‪ .‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ )= ‪.(۱۲۰‬‬
‫● ﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺛﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‪ .‬ﺃﻭﻗﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺛﻡ ﺃﻋﺩ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻠﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺟﺎﻫﺯ ﻟﻼﺗﺻﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻌﺫﺭ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪C‬‬
‫ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺛﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫● ﺗﻡ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﻟﺳﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺗﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ ﻻﺳﺗﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺭّ ﻙ ﻟﺳﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺗﺎﺑﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﺗﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺷﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺧﻁﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﻣﻳﺔ!‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻛﺑﺭ ﻋﺩﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻠﺩﺍﺕ )‪ (999‬ﻭﺃﻛﺑﺭ ﻋﺩﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ )‪ (9999‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﺗﺳﻠﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﻓﻼ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺳﻠﻡ ﻣﺯﻳﺩًﺍ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻛﺎﻓﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺩﻡ‬
‫● ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﻳﺩﻭﻳًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣُﻌﺭﱢ ﻑ ‪ SSID‬ﺍﻟﺻﺣﻳﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ‬
‫ﻛﻠﻣﺔ ﻣﺭﻭﺭ ﺧﺎﻁﺋﺔ‪/‬ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻏﻳﺭ ﺻﺣﻳﺣﺔ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﻋﻧﻭﺍﻥ ‪ IP‬ﻣﺗﻌﺎﺭﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺗﻡ ﻗﻁﻊ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ‪/‬ﻓﺷﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻼﻡ‪/‬ﻓﺷﻝ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ‬
‫● ﺃﻋﺩ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻋﻧﻭﺍﻥ ‪ IP‬ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻻ ﻳﺗﻌﺎﺭﺽ ﻣﻊ ﻋﻧﻭﺍﻥ ﺁﺧﺭ‪.‬‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫●‬
‫ﻗﺩ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻳﺋﺔ ُﺗﺣﺟﺏ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪.Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺗﺟﻧﺏ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻘﺭﺑﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻓﺭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﻳﻛﺭﻭﻭﻳﻑ‪ ،‬ﻭﺃﺟﻬﺯﺓ‬
‫‪ ،Bluetooth‬ﻭﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﺑﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﻣﻭﺟﻲ ‪ ۲٫٤‬ﺟﻳﺟﺎ ﻫﺭﺗﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻵﺧﺭ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ )ﻣﺛﻝ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ(‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﻋﺩﻡ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺃﺟﺳﺎﻡ ﺑﻳﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯﻳﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺻﻝ ﻟﻠﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﻋﺩﻡ ﻣﻭﺍﺟﻬﺗﻪ ﻷﻱ ﺃﺧﻁﺎء‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﺷﻝ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺧﻁﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‬
‫● ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﺄ ﺫﺍﺗﻬﺎ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻣﻬﻳﺄﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺻﺣﻳﺢ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺗﺻﻝ ﺑﺄﺣﺩ ﻣﻛﺎﺗﺏ‬
‫‪ Canon‬ﻟﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﺩﻋﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻼء‪.‬‬
‫‪۱۷۳‬‬
‫ﻓﺷﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻼﻡ‬
‫ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻣﻘﻔﻠﺔ‬
‫● ﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ‪ WPS‬ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺱ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪ .‬ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫● ﻻ ﺗﻭﺟﺩ ﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﺧﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻬﺩﻓﺔ ﺗﻛﻔﻲ ﻻﺳﺗﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪ .‬ﺍﻣﺳﺢ ﺻﻭﺭً ﺍ ﻹﺧﻼء‬
‫ﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺧﻝ ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻓﺎﺭﻏﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺣﺫﻑ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺿﺭﻭﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻓﻭﻋﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ CANON iMAGE GATEWAY‬ﻹﺧﻼء ﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﻣﺯﺍﻣﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ )= ‪ (۱۳۱‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ )= ‪.(۱۱۹‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﻓﺷﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻭﺟﺩ ﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫● ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺇﻣﻛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺑﺎﻹﻧﺗﺭﻧﺕ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪/ Auto‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫˽˼‬
‫̂˺‬
‫́˺‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪C‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫˿˺‬
‫˽˺‬
‫˺‬
‫˻‬
‫˼‬
‫˽‬
‫˾‬
‫̀ ˿‬
‫́‬
‫̂‬
‫˹˺‬
‫˺˺‬
‫˻˺‬
‫̀˻‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫˺˽‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫˻˽‬
‫˼˽‬
‫‪۱۷٤‬‬
‫˾˺‬
‫˹˻‬
‫˺˻‬
‫˻˻‬
‫˼˻‬
‫˽˻‬
‫˾˻‬
‫˿˻‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫̀˺‬
‫˼˺‬
‫˼˼ ˻˼ ˺˼‬
‫)‪(۱‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ )= ‪ ،(۱۷۷‬ﺭﻣﺯ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻬﺩ‬
‫)= ‪(۳۹‬‬
‫)‪(۲‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﻣﻳﺽ )= ‪ ،(۷٥‬ﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ ‪LED‬‬
‫)= ‪(۱٥٥‬‬
‫)‪(۳‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ /‬ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺧﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫)= ‪(۸٥ = ،۷٦‬‬
‫)‪(٤‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ )= ‪(٦۲‬‬
‫)‪(٥‬‬
‫ﺗﺧﻔﻳﺽ ﺗﺷﻭﻳﺵ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻋﺎﻟﻳﺔ )= ‪(۸۰‬‬
‫˹˼‬
‫̂˻‬
‫)‪ (۱۳‬ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺷﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ )= ‪(۱۷٤‬‬
‫)‪ (۲۸‬ﻗﻔﻝ ‪(٦۱ =) AE‬‬
‫)‪ (۱٤‬ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ )ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺩﻗﺔ( )= ‪(٤۳‬‬
‫)‪ (۲۹‬ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ )= ‪(۸۲‬‬
‫)‪ (۱٥‬ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‬
‫)‪ (۳۰‬ﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ )= ‪(۸۳‬‬
‫)‪ (۱٦‬ﺍﻟﺣﺩ ﺍﻷﻗﺻﻰ ﻟﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‬
‫)‪ (۳۱‬ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ )= ‪(٦۱‬‬
‫)‪ (۱۷‬ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ )ﺍﻟﺩﻗﺔ‪/‬ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ( )= ‪(٤٥‬‬
‫)‪ (۳۲‬ﺃﻭﻟﻭﻳﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﻭﻥ ﺳﺎﻁﻊ )= ‪(٦٤‬‬
‫)‪ (۱۸‬ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺑﻘﻲ‬
‫)‪ (۳۳‬ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪(٦۲ =) ISO‬‬
‫)‪ (۱۹‬ﺭﺳﻡ ﺗﻭﺿﻳﺣﻲ )= ‪(۹٦‬‬
‫)‪ (۳٤‬ﺗﺣﺫﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﺩﻣﺎﺕ )= ‪(۱۷۰‬‬
‫)‪ (۲۰‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻳﻊ )= ‪(۳۱‬‬
‫)‪ (۳٥‬ﺗﺣﺫﻳﺭ ﺍﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ )= ‪(۳۸‬‬
‫)‪ (۲۱‬ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻳﺩﻭﻱ )= ‪(۷٤‬‬
‫)‪ (۳٦‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ )= ‪(٥۹‬‬
‫)‪ (۲۲‬ﺧﻁﻭﻁ )= ‪(۳۰‬‬
‫)‪ (۳۷‬ﻣﺧﻔﻑ )= ‪(٥۹‬‬
‫)‪ (۲۳‬ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ‪(٦۹ =) AF‬‬
‫)‪ (۳۸‬ﻣﺭﺷﺢ ﻟﻠﻬﻭﺍء )= ‪(٥۹‬‬
‫)‪ (۲٤‬ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﻧﻘﻁﺔ ‪(٦۲ =) AE‬‬
‫)‪ (۳۹‬ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺯﻣﻧﻳﺔ )= ‪(۱٤۱‬‬
‫)‪ (۲٥‬ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﺗﻲ )= ‪(٤۰‬‬
‫)‪ (٤۰‬ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻗﺗﺻﺎﺩﻱ )= ‪(۱۳۹‬‬
‫)‪ (۲٦‬ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺇﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻲ )= ‪(٤٦‬‬
‫)‪ (٤۱‬ﻗﻔﻝ ‪) AE‬ﻓﻳﻠﻡ( )= ‪(٥۸‬‬
‫)‪ (۲۷‬ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ )= ‪(۷٤‬‬
‫)‪ (٤۲‬ﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ‪(٥۷ =) AF/MF‬‬
‫)‪(٥۷ =) Movie Servo AF (٤۳‬‬
‫ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺷﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻳﺷﻳﺭ ﺭﻣﺯ ﺃﻭ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺷﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫́˻‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ ﻛﺎ ٍ‬
‫ﻑ‬
‫˹˽ ̂˼ ́˼ ̀˼ ˿˼‬
‫)‪(٦‬‬
‫˾˼‬
‫ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ )= ‪(٤۲‬‬
‫)‪(۷‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ )= ‪(٦۷‬‬
‫)‪(۸‬‬
‫‪(٦۳ =) AEB‬‬
‫)‪(۹‬‬
‫ﻣُﺣﺳﻥ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )= ‪(٦٤‬‬
‫)‪ (۱۰‬ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ )= ‪(٦٥‬‬
‫)‪ (۱۱‬ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ )= ‪(٦٦‬‬
‫)‪ (۱۲‬ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻣﺱ )= ‪(٤۱‬‬
‫ﻣﺳﺗﻧﻔﺩ ﻗﻠﻳﻼً‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻛﻧﻪ ﻛﺎﻑٍ‪.‬‬
‫)ﻭﻣﻳﺽ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻣﺭ(‬
‫]ﺍﺷﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ[‬
‫ﻣﺳﺗﻧﻔﺩ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‪ .‬ﺃﻋﺩ ﺷﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻔﺩ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ‪ .‬ﺃﻋﺩ ﺷﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ‪۲‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫́‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ‪۱‬‬
‫̀‬
‫˾‬
‫˿‬
‫˼‬
‫˽‬
‫˻ ˺‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫̂‬
‫̀ ˾‬
‫́ ˿‬
‫˽‬
‫˺‬
‫˼ ˻‬
‫˼˺ ˻˺‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪/ Auto‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫˾˺‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪C‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫˺˺‬
‫́˺ ̀˺‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫˽˺ ˼˺ ˻˺ ˺˺ ˹˺‬
‫)‪(۱‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ‪/‬ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻬﺩﻑ‬
‫)‪(۸‬‬
‫ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ‬
‫)‪(۲‬‬
‫ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺷﺣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫)‪(۹‬‬
‫ﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻠﺩ ‪ -‬ﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ‬
‫)‪(۳‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫)‪ (۱۰‬ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‬
‫)‪(٤‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ]‬
‫)‪(٥‬‬
‫ﺗﻡ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺯﺍﻣﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫)‪ (۱۲‬ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫)‪(٦‬‬
‫ﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ*‪۱‬‬
‫)‪ (۱۳‬ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ISO‬‬
‫)‪(۷‬‬
‫ﺗﺻﻧﻳﻑ‬
‫)‪ (۱٤‬ﺃﻭﻟﻭﻳﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﻭﻥ ﺳﺎﻁﻊ‬
‫[‬
‫)‪ (۱۱‬ﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‬
‫)‪ (۱٥‬ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫*‪۲‬‬
‫*‪ ۱‬ﻳﻌﺭﺽ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ”ﻣﺭﺷﺣﺎﺕ ﺇﺑﺩﺍﻋﻳﺔ“ ﺃﻭ ”ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﺟﻡ“ ﺃﻭ ”ﺗﻬﺫﻳﺏ“ ﺃﻭ ”ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺭﺍء“ ﻋﻠﻳﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫*‪ ۲‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ] [ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺻﻭﺻﺔ‪.‬‬
‫˹˺ ̂‬
‫˿˺‬
‫˾˺‬
‫˽˺‬
‫)‪ (۱‬ﻭﻗﺕ‪/‬ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫)‪ (۱۰‬ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ‬
‫)‪ (۲‬ﺭﺳﻡ ﺗﻭﺿﻳﺣﻲ‬
‫)‪ (۱۱‬ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫)‪ (۳‬ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫)‪ (۱۲‬ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﻓﻼﺵ‬
‫)‪ (٤‬ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‬
‫)‪ (۱۳‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ‬
‫)‪ (٥‬ﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‬
‫)‪ (۱٤‬ﻣُﺣﺳﻥ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫)‪ (٦‬ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫)‪ (۱٥‬ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺭﺍء‬
‫)‪ (۷‬ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ISO‬‬
‫)‪ (۱٦‬ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ*‬
‫)‪ (۸‬ﺃﻭﻟﻭﻳﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﻭﻥ ﺳﺎﻁﻊ‬
‫)‪ (۱۷‬ﺍﻟﺩﻗﺔ‬
‫)‪ (۹‬ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ‬
‫)‪ (۱۸‬ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫* ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ]‬
‫[ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺻﻭﺻﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ‪۳‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻭﻣﺳﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻭﺭﺳﻡ ﺗﻭﺿﻳﺣﻲ ﻟـ ‪ .RGB‬ﻭﻗﺩ ﻻ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﺗﺳﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﻳًﺎ‬
‫ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻼً‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻁﺎﺑﻕ ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ‪.۲‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ‪٤‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻁﺎﺑﻕ ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ‪.۲‬‬
‫‪۱۷٥‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪/ Auto‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪C‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ‪٥‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻭﺵ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺑﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﻟﻠﺿﻭء‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻁﺎﺑﻕ ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ‪.۲‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ‪٦‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻭﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻓﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻻﻧﺣﺭﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﻧﻲ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻁﺎﺑﻕ‬
‫ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ‪.۲‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﺧﺹ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫ﻓﻳﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻠﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺭﻭﺿﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺳﻡ ”ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ“ )= ‪.(۹۳‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺣﺭﻛﺔ ﺑﻁﻳﺋﺔ )ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺃﻱ ﺻﻭﺕ‪(.‬‬
‫)ﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ] [‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺃﻱ ﺻﻭﺕ‪(.‬‬
‫ﺗﺧﻁﻲ ﻟﻠﺧﻠﻑ* ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﻁﻊ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻕ )= ‪) (۱۱٤‬ﻟﻼﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﺧﻁﻲ ﻟﻠﺧﻠﻑ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪(.‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻕ )ﻟﻠﺗﺭﺟﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻳﻊ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ )ﻟﻠﺗﻘﺩﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻳﻊ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ]‬
‫[‪(.‬‬
‫[‪(.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺗﺧﻁﻲ ﻟﻸﻣﺎﻡ* ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﻁﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ )= ‪) (۱۱٤‬ﻟﻼﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﺧﻁﻲ ﻟﻸﻣﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻣﺭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭ ] [‪(.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﻣﺣﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﻁﻊ )ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺧﻳﺎﺭ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻣﻠﺧﺹ ﻓﻳﻠﻡ‪((۱۱٤ =) ،‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ )= ‪(۱۱۳‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺿﻪ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﻁﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﻳﺎﺭ ‪.(۱٦۰ =) PictBridge‬‬
‫ﺛﻭﺍﻥ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻌﺩﻩ‪.‬‬
‫* ﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ‪٤‬‬
‫ٍ‬
‫‪۱۷٦‬‬
‫● ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﺧﻁﻲ ﻟﻠﺧﻠﻑ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻸﻣﺎﻡ )ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﻁﻊ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ( ﺑﺎﻟﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺯﺭﻳﻥ ] [] [‪.‬‬
‫● ﻟﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺍﻹﻁﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻣﺭﻳﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺣﺏ ﻟﻠﻳﺳﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻳﻣﻳﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﻭﺟﺩﺍﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﺋﻡ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻝ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪/ Auto‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫*‪۱‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪AUTO‬‬
‫*‪۲‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪6400 – 100‬‬
‫*‪۲‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪12800 ،10000 ،8000‬‬
‫*‪۲‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫*‪۲‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫*‪۲‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫ﺗﺯﺍﻣﻥ ﺑﻁﺊ‬
‫*‪۲‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫*‪۳‬‬
‫*‪۳‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫*‪۳‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫*‪۲‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﻁﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ )= ‪(۱٥٤‬‬
‫*‪۲‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﻓﻼﺵ )= ‪(۷٦‬‬
‫*‪۲‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫*‪٤‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫ﺇﺧﺭﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )= ‪(۸٥‬‬
‫*‪۲‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫ﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ )= ‪(۸۳‬‬
‫*‪۲‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ )= ‪(۸۲‬‬
‫*‪۲‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ )= ‪(٦۱‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪C‬‬
‫ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪(٦۲ =) ISO‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻓﻼﺵ )= ‪(۷٥‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۱۷۷‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ )= ‪(۸٥‬‬
‫*‪۲‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫ﺗﺣﻭﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ )= ‪(٦۲‬‬
‫*‪۲‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ‬
‫ﻗﻔﻝ ‪ ،(٦۱ = ،٥۸ =) AE‬ﻗﻔﻝ ‪(۷٦ =) FE‬‬
‫*‪۲‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫*‪٥‬‬
‫*‪٥‬‬
‫ﻗﻔﻝ ‪ AE‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ )= ‪(٥۸‬‬
‫*‪۲‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫*‪٥‬‬
‫*‪۲‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺍﻟﻳﺩﻭﻱ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ )= ‪(٥۷‬‬
‫*‪۲‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﺭﻳﻙ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ‪(۷۱ =) AF‬‬
‫*‪۲‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪ AF‬ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻣﺱ )= ‪(۷۱‬‬
‫*‪۲‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻭﺟﻪ )= ‪(۷۱‬‬
‫*‪۲‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣُﻛﺑﱠﺭ )= ‪(۷٤‬‬
‫*‪۲‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻣﺱ )= ‪(٤۱‬‬
‫*‪۲‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫*‪۷‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺩ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ )= ‪*(٥۸‬‬
‫*‪۲‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪/ Auto‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪C‬‬
‫ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻳﺩﻭﻱ )= ‪*(۷٤‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ )= ‪(٦۱ = ،۳۰‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۱۷۸‬‬
‫*‪۱‬‬
‫*‪۲‬‬
‫*‪۳‬‬
‫*‪٤‬‬
‫*‪٥‬‬
‫*‪٦‬‬
‫*‪۷‬‬
‫*‪۸‬‬
‫‪۸‬‬
‫ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ‪/۱‬‬
‫ﺗﺧﺻﻳﺹ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ‪/۲‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺑﻼ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫*‪۲‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺳﺭﻳﻊ ﺑـ ‪INFO.‬‬
‫*‪۲‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ]ﺳﻁﻭﻉ[‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺣﺗﻭﻯ ﻗﺎﺑﻝ ﻟﻠﺿﺑﻁ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﺎﻓﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ] [ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻻﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺭﺗﺑﻁ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺑﺎﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ]ﺳﻁﻭﻉ[‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻔﻝ ‪ AE‬ﻓﻘﻁ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﻳﺩﻭﻱ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ M‬ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺩﺳﺔ ‪ EF‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﺩﺳﺔ ‪.EF-S‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻓﻘﻁ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻧﻔﺱ ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪ O‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻧﻪ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪ – .‬ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺫﻟﻙ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻳﻌﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪/ Auto‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﻁﺭﻕ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺑﺅﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )= ‪(٦۹‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺑﺅﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )= ‪(۷۲‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ )= ‪(٤۳‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫]‪[NTSC‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫]‪[PAL‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫ﺣﺟﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ )= ‪(٤٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫‪(٤۲ =) Drive Mode‬‬
‫ﻣﺅﻗﺕ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ‪/‬ﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺑﻌﻳﺩ )= ‪(٤۰‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ )= ‪(٦٥‬‬
‫‪/ /‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ )= ‪(٦٦‬‬
‫‪۱۷۹‬‬
‫*‪۱‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫*‪۲‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫*‪۱‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫*‪۲‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫*‪۱‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫*‪۱‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫*‪۲‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ“ )= ‪.(۱۸۱‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪C‬‬
‫*‪۱‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫*‪۲‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫*‪۳‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫*‪۱‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫*‪۳‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫*‪٤‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫*‪۱‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫*‪۳‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫*‪۱‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫*‪۳‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫*‪٤‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫*‪۱‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫*‪۱‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫*‪۱‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫*‪۱‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫*‪۱‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫*‪۱‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫*‪۱‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫*‪۱‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪/ Auto‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ )= ‪(٦۷‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﻣُﺣﺳﻥ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )= ‪(٦٤‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪C‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ )= ‪(٦۲‬‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫)= ‪(٤٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۱۸۰‬‬
‫*‪۱‬‬
‫*‪۲‬‬
‫*‪۳‬‬
‫*‪٤‬‬
‫*‪٥‬‬
‫*‪٦‬‬
‫*‪۷‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫*‪۱‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫*‪۱‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫*‪۱‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫*‪۱‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫*‪٥‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫*‪۱‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫*‪۱‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫*‪۱‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫*‪۱‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫*‪۱‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫*‪۱‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫*‪٦‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫*‪۱‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫*‪٦‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫*‪۷‬‬
‫*‪۷‬‬
‫*‪۱‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫*‪٦‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫ﻣﺣﺗﻭﻯ ﻗﺎﺑﻝ ﻟﻠﺿﺑﻁ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﺎﻓﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ]‪.[ 2‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ]‪.[ 5‬‬
‫=‬
‫ﻟﻠﻣﺯﺍﻣﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻧﻪ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ) ‪.(٥٥‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ ]ﻟﻭﻥ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ[ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺁﺧﺭ ﺑﺧﻼﻑ ] [‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﻳﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁﻪ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻣﺔ ]‪.[ 1‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﻭﻣﻁﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺑﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺣﺟﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪ O‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻧﻪ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪ – .‬ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺫﻟﻙ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ )= ‪(٤۳‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪/ Auto‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫–‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫–‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪C‬‬
‫ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ )= ‪(٤٥‬‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﺟﻌﺔ )= ‪*(٤۷‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۱۸۱‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻣﺱ )= ‪(٤۱‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ )= ‪*(۱٥۳‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫*‪۱‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫*‪۱‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻳﻌﺔ“ )= ‪.(۱۷۹‬‬
‫*‪۱‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫*‪۱‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﻟﺗﻘﺎﻁ )= ‪(۸۷‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﻋﻛﺳﻲ )= ‪(۲۹‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫*‪۱‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫*‪۱‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪JPEG‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪/‬‬
‫‪RAW‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫*‪۱‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪/‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺗﺎﻥ‪/‬‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺛﻭﺍﻥ‪/‬‬
‫‪ ۸‬ﺛﻭﺍﻥ‪/‬ﺍﺣﻔﻅ‬
‫*‪۱‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫ﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ‬
‫*‪۱‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ‬
‫*‪۱‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫ﺗﻭﻓﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫*‪۱‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫ﺳﻠﺱ‬
‫*‪۱‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺑﺅﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )= ‪(۷۲‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻳﻌﺔ“ )= ‪.(۱۷۹‬‬
‫ﻁﺭﻕ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ ﺑﺅﺭﻱ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )= ‪(٦۹‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻳﻌﺔ“ )= ‪.(۱۷۹‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫‪ AF‬ﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ )= ‪(۷۳‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪/ Auto‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫‪(۷۳ =) AF+MF‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۱۸۲‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫*‪۱‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫*‪۱‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫*‪۱‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺣﻭﺍﻑ ‪(۷٤ =) MF‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪C‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫*‪۱‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ‪*IS‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪IS‬‬
‫)= ‪(۷۸‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﻣﺛﺑﺕ ﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫ﻧﺷﻁ*‬
‫ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻧﺣﺭﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ )= ‪(۷۹‬‬
‫*‪۱‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫*‪۱‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫ﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ‬
‫*‪۱‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫*‪۱‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫*‪۱‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫*‪۱‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ‬
‫‪(٦۳ =) AEB‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ISO‬‬
‫)= ‪(٦۲‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪/ Auto‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪C‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۱۸۳‬‬
‫*‬
‫*‪۱‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫*‪۱‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫ﻣُﺣﺳﻥ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )= ‪(٦٤‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ )= ‪(٦۲‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻳﻌﺔ“ )= ‪.(۱۷۹‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ ISO‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺃﻭﻟﻭﻳﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﻭﻥ ﺳﺎﻁﻊ)= ‪(٦٤‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ISO‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻝ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ“ )= ‪.(۱۷۷‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻳﻌﺔ“ )= ‪.(۱۷۹‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﻁﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ)= ‪(۷٥‬‬
‫ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ”ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻝ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ“ )= ‪.(۱۷۷‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ‪.E-TTL II‬‬
‫)= ‪(۷۷‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﺩﻳﺭﻱ‪/‬ﻣﺗﻭﺳﻁ‬
‫*‪۱‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫ﺧﻔﺽ ﻋﻳﻥ ﺣﻣﺭﺍء )= ‪(٤۷‬‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫*‪۱‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫*‪۱‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﻣﻳﺽ‬
‫)= ‪(۸٥‬‬
‫ﺗﺯﺍﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ‬
‫)= ‪(۷۷‬‬
‫‪E-TTL II‬‬
‫*‪۱‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫ﻓﻼﺵ ﻳﺩﻭﻱ‬
‫*‪۱‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫ﺃﻭﻝ ﺳﺗﺎﺭ‬
‫*‪۱‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫ﺛﺎﻧﻲ ﺳﺗﺎﺭ‬
‫*‪۱‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫ﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ‬
‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻝ ﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ“ )= ‪.(۱۷۷‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ )= ‪(۱٥٥‬‬
‫*‪۱‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ C.Fn‬ﻓﻼﺵ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ )= ‪(۱٥٦‬‬
‫*‪۱‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ )= ‪(۱٥۷ = ،۷۷‬‬
‫*‪۱‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫*‪۷‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺃﺑﻳﺽ ﻣﺧﺻﺹ )= ‪(٦٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ )= ‪(٦٦‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻳﻌﺔ“ )= ‪.(۱۷۹‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ )= ‪(٦۷‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻳﻌﺔ“ )= ‪.(۱۷۹‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪/ Auto‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺗﺧﻔﻳﺽ ﺗﺷﻭﻳﺵ ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻋﺎﻟﻳﺔ‬
‫)= ‪(۸۰‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪C‬‬
‫*‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۱۸٤‬‬
‫ﻗﻳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫*‪۱‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ‪/‬ﻣﻧﺧﻔﺽ‪/‬‬
‫ﻋﺎﻟﻲ‪/‬ﺗﺧﻔﻳﺽ‬
‫ﺿﻭﺿﺎء ﻟﻘﻁﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻣﺗﻌﺩﺩﺓ‬
‫*‪۱‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪۸‬‬
‫ﺗﺧﻔﻳﺽ ﺗﺷﻭﻳﺵ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻁﻭﻳﻝ )= ‪(۸۱‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫*‪۱‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫ﻧﻭﻉ ﻣﻠﺧﺹ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ )= ‪(۳۷‬‬
‫ﺑﺩﻝ ‪ AF‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )= ‪(٤۰‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺗﻔﻅ‬
‫ﺑﺈﻋﺩﺍﺩ )=‪(٤۸‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ‬
‫*‪۱‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪/‬ﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ‬
‫*‪۱‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫ﺗﺿﻣﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‪/‬ﺑﻼ ﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺛﺎﺑﺗﺔ‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫ﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ‪/‬ﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ‬
‫ﺣﺟﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ )= ‪(٤٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺻﻭﺕ )= ‪(٥۹‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪/ Auto‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺻﻭﺕ‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪C‬‬
‫ﻣﺭﺷﺢ ﻟﻠﻬﻭﺍء‬
‫ﻣﺧﻔﻑ‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪(٥۷ =) Movie Servo AF‬‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫‪ AF‬ﻣﻊ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء‬
‫)= ‪(٥۸‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۱۸٥‬‬
‫*‪۱‬‬
‫*‪۲‬‬
‫*‪۳‬‬
‫*‪٤‬‬
‫*‪٥‬‬
‫*‪٦‬‬
‫*‪۷‬‬
‫*‪۸‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ”ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻳﻌﺔ“ )= ‪.(۱۷۹‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪/‬ﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ‬
‫*‪۱‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫ﻳﺩﻭﻱ‬
‫*‪۱‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ‬
‫*‪۱‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻣﺭﺷﺢ ﺍﻟﺭﻳﺎﺡ‪/‬ﻣﺧﻔﻑ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫*‪۱‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫*‪۱‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫*‪۱‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫*‪۱‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫*‪۱‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫ﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ‬
‫*‪۱‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ‬
‫*‪۱‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪/ONE SHOT‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ‬
‫*‪۱‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫ﻣﺣﺗﻭﻯ ﻗﺎﺑﻝ ﻟﻠﺿﺑﻁ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﺎﻓﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ[ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﻛﻝ ﻣﻥ ] [ ﻭ]‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻻ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻣﻛﺗﺷﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻬﺩ ﺍﻹﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻋﺩﺳﺎﺕ ‪ EF‬ﺃﻭ ‪ EF-S‬ﺃﻭ ‪ EF-M‬ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻻ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻋﺩﺳﺎﺕ ﺗﺩﻋﻡ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ] [‪ ،‬ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﻋﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪ [ 5‬ﻓﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪.[ 3‬‬
‫]ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ[ ﻓﻘﻁ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻭ] [ ﻭ] [ ﻭ] [ ﻭ] [ ﻭ] [ ﻭ] [ ﻭ] [ ﻭ]‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ]‬
‫[ ﻭ] [ ﻭ] [‪،‬‬
‫ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﻋﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﻣﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪ [ 5‬ﻓﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ]‪.[ 4‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪ O‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻧﻪ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪ – .‬ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺫﻟﻙ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪/ Auto‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪C‬‬
‫ﺗﻣﺩﻳﺩ ‪ISO‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ‪:۱‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬
‫)= ‪(۸۸‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ‪:۲‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺑﺅﺭﺓ )= ‪(۸۸‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﻁﻼﻕ‬
‫ﺷﻌﺎﻉ)‪(LED‬‬
‫ﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩﺓ ‪AF‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ ﺗﺣﻛﻡ‬
‫ﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ‪:۳‬‬
‫ﺃﺧﺭﻯ )= ‪(۸۸‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺑﺩﻭﻥ‬
‫ﻋﺩﺳﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪:0‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫‪:1‬ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪:0‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫*‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪:1‬ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫*‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪:0‬ﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ‬
‫*‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪:1‬ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ‬
‫*‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫ﻏﺎﻟﻕ‪/‬ﻗﻔﻝ ‪AE‬‬
‫*‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫ﺃﻗﺭﺍﺹ‬
‫*‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫*‬
‫ﺯﺭ ‪M-Fn‬‬
‫*‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ‬
‫*‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ‬
‫*‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪:0‬ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ‬
‫*‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪:1‬ﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ‬
‫*‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪:0‬ﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ‬
‫*‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪:1‬ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ‬
‫*‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫*‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ )‪(۸۹ =) (C.Fn‬‬
‫* ﻣﺣﺗﻭﻯ ﻗﺎﺑﻝ ﻟﻠﺿﺑﻁ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﺎﻓﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱۸٦‬‬
‫*‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪ O‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻧﻪ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪ – .‬ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺫﻟﻙ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪/ Auto‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪C‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ”ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ“‬
‫ﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺳﺭﻳﻊ ﺑـ ‪INFO.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ )= ‪ (٦۱‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ]‬
‫ﻭ] [ ﻭ] [ ﻭ] [ ﻭ] [ ﻭ] [ ﻭ] [ ﻭ] [ ﻭ] [ ﻭ] [ ﻭ] [ ﻭ]‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‬
‫*‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺻﺭ‬
‫ﺇﻧﺷﺎء ﻣﺟﻠﺩ‬
‫= ‪۱۳۷‬‬
‫ﺗﺭﻗﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻑ‬
‫= ‪۱۳۷‬‬
‫ﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ‬
‫= ‪۱۳۸‬‬
‫ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﺩﻳﻭ‬
‫= ‪۱۳۹‬‬
‫ﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‬
‫*‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺭﺽ *‬
‫ﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪ISO‬‬
‫*‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺇﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻲ‬
‫= ‪٤٦‬‬
‫‪AEB‬‬
‫*‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻗﺗﺻﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫= ‪۱۳۹‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻭﻳﺽ ﺗﻌﺭﻳﺽ ﻓﻼﺵ‬
‫*‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫ﺗﻭﻓﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫= ‪۲۸‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﻁﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬
‫*‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫ﺳﻁﻭﻉ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‬
‫= ‪۱٤۰‬‬
‫ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺻﻭﺕ‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺯﻣﻧﻳﺔ‬
‫= ‪۱٤۱‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫*‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬
‫= ‪۱٤۱‬‬
‫ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ‬
‫*‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‬
‫= ‪۱٤۱‬‬
‫ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺗﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻳﺽ‬
‫*‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫ﺻﻔﻳﺭ‬
‫= ‪۱٤۲‬‬
‫ﻣُﺣﺳﻥ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫*‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫ﻧﺻﺎﺋﺢ ﻭﺗﻠﻣﻳﺣﺎﺕ‬
‫= ‪۱٤۲‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ‬
‫*‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ‬
‫*‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫= ‪۱٥٤‬‬
‫‪۱‬‬
‫ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻣﺱ‬
‫= ‪۱٤۲‬‬
‫ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ‬
‫= ‪۱٤۲‬‬
‫‪Drive Mode‬‬
‫*‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫= ‪۱۱٥‬‬
‫ﻣﺭﺷﺢ ﻟﻠﻬﻭﺍء‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺷﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺷﻬﺎﺩﺓ‬
‫ﻣﺧﻔﻑ‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫–‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫ﻣﺅﻗﺕ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ‪/‬ﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺑﻌﻳﺩ‬
‫*‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫ﺣﺟﻡ ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‬
‫*‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫*‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫* ﻣﺣﺗﻭﻯ ﻗﺎﺑﻝ ﻟﻠﺿﺑﻁ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﺎﻓﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪۱۸۷‬‬
‫[ ﻭ] [ ﻭ] [ ﻭ] [‬
‫[ ﻭ] [ ﻭ] [‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺟﻊ‬
‫‪ O‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﻳﻳﻧﻪ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪ – .‬ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺫﻟﻙ‪.‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫= ‪۱٤٤‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﻣﺧﺻﺹ )‪* (C‬‬
‫= ‪۹۰‬‬
‫‪۲‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻘﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻁﺑﻊ‬
‫ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻛﻝ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ *‬
‫= ‪۱٤٤‬‬
‫= ‪۱٤٥‬‬
‫‪۳‬‬
‫ﺇﺻﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺛﺎﺑﺕ‪*.*.* :‬‬
‫*‪ ۱‬ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻻ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻣﻛﺗﺷﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﻬﺩ ﺍﻹﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻲ‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻭ]‬
‫[ ﻭ]‬
‫*‪ ۲‬ﻻ ﻳﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻻ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ] [ ﻭ] [ ﻭ]‬
‫*‪ ۳‬ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺗﺎﺡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ] [‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻭ]‬
‫[ ﻭ]‬
‫*‪ ٤‬ﻻ ﻳﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻻ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ] [ ﻭ] [ ﻭ]‬
‫*‬
‫= ‪۱٤٥‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫[ ﻭ]‬
‫[ ﻭ]‬
‫[‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪/ Auto‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ”ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺗﻲ“‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺻﺭ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺟﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺻﺭ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺟﻊ‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺗﻲ‬
‫= ‪۹۱‬‬
‫ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ‬
‫= ‪۱۰۲‬‬
‫ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫= ‪۱۰۷‬‬
‫ﺗﺻﻧﻳﻑ‬
‫= ‪۱۰۸‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ ”ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ“‬
‫ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﻭﻳﺏ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪C‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪۱۸۸‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻳﻌﺔ ﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺑﺣﺙ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫= ‪۹۸‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺻﺭ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺟﻊ‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻳﻠﻡ‬
‫ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ‬
‫= ‪۱۰۲‬‬
‫= ‪۹٤‬‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻣﻠﺧﺹ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﻣﺭﺗﺑﻁ‬
‫ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ‬
‫= ‪۱۰۷‬‬
‫= ‪۹٦‬‬
‫ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺳﺢ‬
‫= ‪۱۰٥‬‬
‫= ‪۱٦۰‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﺟﻡ‬
‫ﺗﺻﻧﻳﻑ‬
‫= ‪۱۰۸‬‬
‫= ‪۱۰۹‬‬
‫ﺗﻬﺫﻳﺏ‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺷﺭﺍﺋﺢ‬
‫= ‪۱۰۱‬‬
‫= ‪۱۱۰‬‬
‫ﻣﺭﺷﺣﺎﺕ ﺇﺑﺩﺍﻋﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺇﺩﺭﺍﺝ‪/‬ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻣﻠﺧﺻﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬
‫= ‪۹٦‬‬
‫= ‪۱۱۱‬‬
‫ﺑﺣﺙ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫= ‪۹۸‬‬
‫= ‪٥۰‬‬
‫ﻣﺭﺷﺣﺎﺕ ﺇﺑﺩﺍﻋﻳﺔ‬
‫= ‪۱۱۱‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﺟﻡ‬
‫= ‪۱۰۹‬‬
‫ﺗﻬﺫﻳﺏ‬
‫= ‪۱۱۰‬‬
‫ﺗﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﺭﺍء‬
‫= ‪۱۱۲‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻁﺑﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫= ‪۱٦۱‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺃﻟﺑﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫= ‪۱٦٦‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﺍﻧﺗﻘﺎﻝ‬
‫= ‪۹٤‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﺛﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫= ‪۹۷‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﻗﺻﺎﺻﺎﺕ‬
‫= ‪۹٤‬‬
‫ﺗﺩﻭﻳﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫= ‪۱۰۸‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺋﻧﺎﻑ‬
‫= ‪۹٤‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫= ‪۹٥‬‬
‫ﺗﻛﺑﻳﺭ )ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑﻲ(‬
‫= ‪۱۰۰‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺎﻣﻝ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪/ Auto‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻋﺑﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻥ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺇﻟﻛﺗﺭﻭﻧﻲ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺩﻗﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﺗﺟﻧﺏ ﺇﺳﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺭﻳﺿﻬﺎ ﻟﺻﺩﻣﺔ ﻗﻭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﺗﺗﺭﻙ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﻁﻠ ًﻘﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺭﺏ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻱ ﺷﻲء ﻳﺻﺩﺭ ﻣﺟﺎﻻً ﻣﻐﻧﺎﻁﻳﺳﻳًﺎ ﻗﻭﻳًﺎ ﻛﺎﻟﻣﻐﻧﺎﻁﻳﺱ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺭﻙ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎﺋﻲ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﺗﺗﺳﺑﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻐﻧﺎﻁﻳﺳﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻌﻁﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻘﺩ ﺑﻳﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﺎﻕ ﻗﻁﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻭﺳﺎﺥ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﻣﺳﺣﻬﺎ ﺑﻘﻁﻌﺔ ﻗﻣﺎﺵ ﻧﺎﻋﻣﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺟﺎﻓﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺛﻝ ﻗﻁﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻣﺎﺵ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻧﻅﺎﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﻻ ﺗﻘﻡ ﺑﻔﺭﻛﻬﺎ ﺑﻘﻭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺳﺣﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﻧﻑ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻣﻁﻠ ًﻘﺎ ﻣﻧﻅﻔﺎﺕ ﺗﺣﺗﻭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺫﻳﺑﺎﺕ ﻋﺿﻭﻳﺔ ﻟﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫● ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻓﺭﺷﺎﺓ ﻣﻧﻔﺎﺥ ﺃﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻷﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺻﻌﻭﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺻﻝ ﺑﺄﺣﺩ‬
‫ﻣﻛﺎﺗﺏ ‪ Canon‬ﻟﻣﺳﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﺩﻋﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻼء‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫● ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﻧﻘﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻣﻥ ﻏﺭﻓﺔ ﺑﺎﺭﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﺩﺍﻓﺋﺔ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻔﺎﺟﺊ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺗﻛﺎﺛﻑ ﻟﺑﺧﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺎء‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ .‬ﻟﻣﻧﻊ ﺗﻛﺎﺛﻑ ﺑﺧﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺎء‪ ،‬ﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﻭﻻً ﻓﻲ ﻛﻳﺱ ﺑﻼﺳﺗﻳﻛﻲ ﻣﺣﻛﻡ ﺍﻟﻐﻠﻕ ﻭﺩﻋﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺗﺗﻛﻳﻑ ﻣﻊ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺇﺧﺭﺍﺟﻬﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﻳﺱ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪C‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫● ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﻘﻳﺑﺔ ﺑﻼﺳﺗﻳﻛﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺎﻭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻗﻳﺔ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻔﺗﺭﺓ ﺯﻣﻧﻳﺔ ﻁﻭﻳﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻧﺑﻐﻲ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺷﺣﻧﻬﺎ ﻣﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﻛﻝ ﻋﺎﻡ ﺛﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ ﺗﻣﺎﻣًﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺗﺧﺯﻳﻧﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺣﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻔﺎءﺗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻛﺛﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﻋﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺭ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﺗﺅﺩﻱ ﻣﻭﺍﺻﻠﺔ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻔﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻟﺫﺍ‪ ،‬ﺃﺯﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻭﺣﺯﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺑﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻧﺗﻅﺭ ﺣﺗﻰ‬
‫ﺗﺗﺑﺧﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﻁﻭﺑﺔ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﺳﺗﺋﻧﺎﻑ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﺗﻠﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻁﺭﺍﻑ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻌﻁﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۱۸۹‬‬
‫● ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻣﺷﺎﻫﺩﺓ ﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﻠﻣﺱ ﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ؛ ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺭﺿﻪ ﻟﻠﺧﺩﺵ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻻ ﺗﻘﻡ ﺑﺳﺩ ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻕ ﺑﺈﺻﺑﻌﻙ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﻋﻁﻝ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﻌﺩ ﻓﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻁﺭﻓﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻔﻲ ﻣﺗﺟﻬًﺎ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﻗﻡ‬
‫ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺃﻏﻁﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻟﺗﺟﻧﺏ ﺧﺩﺵ ﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﻭﺃﻁﺭﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺑﺟﺎﻧﺏ ﺩﺧﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﺗﻠﺗﺻﻕ ﻣﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺯﻳﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻷﺟﺯﺍء ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺑﻣﻘﺩﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﻧﺎﺩﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺳﺗﻣﺭ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺑﻘﻊ ﻣﺭﺋﻳﺔ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ‬
‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﻳﻭﺻﻰ ﺑﺈﺟﺭﺍء ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﻣﺭﻛﺯ ﺍﻟﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻟﺷﺭﻛﺔ ‪.Canon‬‬
‫● ﻳﻭﺻﻰ ﺑﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﺟﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﻭﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻗﻁﻌﺔ ﻗﻣﺎﺵ ﻧﺎﻋﻣﺔ ﻟﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺎﺕ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﻱ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻘﺩﻡ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫‪٧‬‬
‫‪٨‬‬
‫‪٩‬‬
‫‪١٠‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪/ Auto‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻉ‬
‫ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺣﺟﻡ ﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻣﻁ ‪P‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻣﺎﻁ ‪ ،Tv‬ﻭ‪ ،Av‬ﻭ‪M‬‬
‫ﻭ‪ ،M‬ﻭ‪C‬‬
‫ﻧﻣﻁ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺭﺱ‬
‫‪۱۹۰‬‬
‫ﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺳﺔ‬
‫ﻛﺎﻣﻳﺭﺍ ﺭﻗﻣﻳﺔ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻋﺎﻛﺳﺔ ﻣﺯﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻣﻳﺯﺓ ‪AF/AE‬‬
‫ﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺫﺍﻛﺭﺓ ‪ SD‬ﻭ‪ SDHC‬ﻭ‪SDXC‬‬
‫* ﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺑﻁﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﻓﺎﺋﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﺭﻋﺔ ‪UHS-I‬‬
‫ﺣﻭﺍﻟﻲ ‪ ۱٤٫۹ x ۲۲٫۳‬ﻣﻡ‬
‫‪ EF-M‬ﻭ‪ *EF‬ﻭ‪ *EF-S‬ﻣﻥ ‪Canon‬‬
‫* ﻳﻠﺯﻡ ﺗﻭﻓﺭ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ‪.EF-EOS M‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺑُﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺎﻓﺊ ﻟﻣﻘﺎﺱ ‪ ۳٥‬ﻣﻡ ﻳﺑﻠﻎ ‪ ۱٫٦‬ﺿﻌﻑ ﺍﻟﺑُﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺑﺅﺭﻱ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻌﺩﺳﺔ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ(‬
‫ﺣﺎﻣﻝ ‪ EF-M‬ﻣﻥ ‪Canon‬‬
‫ﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻉ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺑﻛﺳﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫ﺇﺟﻣﺎﻟﻲ ﻋﺩﺩ ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﻛﺳﻝ‬
‫ﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ‬
‫ﻣﻳﺯﺓ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﻐﺑﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ ‪CMOS‬‬
‫‪ ۲٤٫۲‬ﻣﻠﻳﻭﻥ ﺑﻛﺳﻝ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‬
‫‪ ۲٤٫۷‬ﻣﻠﻳﻭﻥ ﺑﻛﺳﻝ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ‬
‫‪3:2‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻧﻔﻳﺫ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳًﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻳﺩﻭﻳًﺎ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪/‬ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﻗﺔ‬
‫‪Design rule for Camera File System (DCF) 2.0‬‬
‫‪) RAW ،JPEG‬ﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ ‪ Canon‬ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ ﺑﻧﻅﺎﻡ ‪ ۱٤‬ﺑﺕ(‪ ،‬ﺇﻣﻛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺳﺟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻳﺭﺓ ﺑﺗﻧﺳﻳﻕ ‪ RAW+JPEG‬ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺱ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‬
‫ﺣﻭﺍﻟﻲ ‪ ۲٤‬ﻣﻳﺟﺎﺑﻛﺳﻝ )‪(6000 x 4000‬‬
‫‪) L‬ﻛﺑﻳﺭﺓ(‪:‬‬
‫ﺣﻭﺍﻟﻲ ‪ ۱۲٫٤۰‬ﻣﻳﺟﺎﺑﻛﺳﻝ )‪(4320 x 2880‬‬
‫‪) M‬ﻣﺗﻭﺳﻁﺔ(‪:‬‬
‫ﺣﻭﺍﻟﻲ ‪ ٥٫٥۰‬ﻣﻳﺟﺎﺑﻛﺳﻝ )‪(2880 x 1920‬‬
‫‪) S1‬ﺻﻐﻳﺭﺓ ‪:(۱‬‬
‫ﺣﻭﺍﻟﻲ ‪ ۳٫٥۰‬ﻣﻳﺟﺎﺑﻛﺳﻝ )‪(2304 x 1536‬‬
‫‪) S2‬ﺻﻐﻳﺭﺓ ‪:(۲‬‬
‫ﺣﻭﺍﻟﻲ ‪ ۳٥۰٫۰۰۰‬ﺑﻛﺳﻝ )‪(720 x 480‬‬
‫‪) S3‬ﺻﻐﻳﺭﺓ ‪:(۳‬‬
‫ﺣﻭﺍﻟﻲ ‪ ۲٤‬ﻣﻳﺟﺎﺑﻛﺳﻝ )‪(6000 x 4000‬‬
‫‪:RAW